manual aspen analyzer version 7

8/20/2019 Manual Aspen Analyzer version 7

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manual-aspen-analyzer-version-7 1/519

Aspen ProcessEconomic AnalyzerV7.0

U s e r Gu i d e



Version Number: V7.0July 2008

Copyright (c) 2008 by Aspen Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, the aspen leaf logo and Plantelligence and Enterprise Optimization aretrademarks or registered trademarks of Aspen Technology, Inc., Burlington, MA.

All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

This document is intended as a guide to using AspenTech's software. This documentation contains AspenTechproprietary and confidential information and may not be disclosed, used, or copied without the prior consent ofAspenTech or as set forth in the applicable license agreement. Users are solely responsible for the proper use ofthe software and the application of the results obtained.

Although AspenTech has tested the software and reviewed the documentation, the sole warranty for the softwaremay be found in the applicable license agreement between AspenTech and the user. ASPENTECH MAKES NOWARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS DOCUMENTATION,ITS QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Aspen Technology, Inc.200 Wheeler RoadBurlington, MA 01803-5501

USAPhone: 781 221-6400Toll Free: 888-996-7100URL: http://www.aspentech.com



1 Introduction 3

Contents1 Introduction.......................................................................................................11

Main Features...............................................................................................11 Links to Process Simulator Software Programs.........................................11 Mapping of Simulator Models to Process Equipment Types.........................11 Sizing of Equipment.............................................................................12 Capital Investment and Schedules: Engineer-Procure-Construct.................12 Development of Operating Costs ...........................................................12 Investment Analysis and Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s Link to YourSpreadsheets......................................................................................12

Alternative Capacities and Locations ......................................................12 Detailed, Interactive Process Economics .................................................13 Links to Project Evaluation Programs......................................................13

Understanding Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s Project Workflow ....................13 The Guide ....................................................................................................14

Organization.......................................................................................14 Related Documentation..................................................................................15

Installation Guide................................................................................15 Known Issues and Workarounds............................................................16 New Features in Aspen Engineering V7.0 ................................................16 Icarus Reference.................................................................................16 Piping and Instrumentation Drawings.....................................................16

Technical Support .........................................................................................16 Online Technical Support Center............................................................16

2 Getting Started...................................................................................................17

Starting Aspen Process Economic Analyzer........................................................17 Starting a Project Scenario .............................................................................18

Creating a New Project Scenario............................................................18 Importing an Aspen Process Economic Analyzer 5.0/5.1 Project Scenario ....22

Opening an Existing Project Scenario ...............................................................24 Understanding the Icarus Interface ..................................................................26

Project Explorer ..................................................................................26 Main Window......................................................................................28

List View............................................................................................30 Palette...............................................................................................32 Properties Window...............................................................................34 Customizing the Icarus Interface ...........................................................35 Aspen Process Economic Analyzer's Toolbar ............................................36 Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Menu Bar............................................38

Working with Project Scenarios .......................................................................42 Saving Project Scenarios ......................................................................42 Deleting Project Scenarios ....................................................................43



1 Introduction 4

Salvaging Project Scenarios ..................................................................44 Unlocking Project Scenarios ..................................................................45 Copying Project Directories...................................................................46

Preferences ..................................................................................................46 General..............................................................................................47 Forms................................................................................................48

Backup ..............................................................................................49 Process..............................................................................................49 Locations ...........................................................................................50 Logging .............................................................................................53

3 Defining the Project Basis ..................................................................................55

Project Properties..........................................................................................56 General Project Data .....................................................................................57 Importing old Standard basis files ...................................................................58 Basis for Capital Costs ...................................................................................58

Input Units of Measure Customization ....................................................59 Output (Reports) Units of Measure Customization ....................................61

General Specs ....................................................................................62 Construction Workforce........................................................................70 Indexing ............................................................................................74

Process Design .............................................................................................77 Simulator Type and Simulator File Name ................................................77 Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs .............................................77 Project Component Map Specifications....................................................80 Default Simulator Mapping Specs...........................................................82 Design Criteria....................................................................................86 Utility Specifications ............................................................................98

Investment Analysis ....................................................................................101 Investment Parameters......................................................................101 Operating Unit Costs..........................................................................107

Raw Material Specifications.................................................................108 Product Specifications........................................................................111

Developing Streams ....................................................................................114 Viewing or Modifying an Existing Stream...............................................115 Mixture Specs Dialog Box ...................................................................118 Estimation of Utility Usage and Resulting Costs in Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer ..........................................................................................119 Stream Connectivity ..........................................................................120 Creating A New Stream......................................................................121 Deleting a Stream .............................................................................124

Specification Libraries..................................................................................125 Customizing Specification Libraries ......................................................126

Selecting to Use a Different Specification File ........................................129 Changing File Directory Location..........................................................129

4 Loading and Mapping Simulation Data .............................................................131

Overview ...................................................................................................131 Preparing Simulation Reports........................................................................131

AspenPlus Report Generation ..............................................................132 AspenPlus – Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Simulator link ..................135 ChemCAD Report Generation ..............................................................136



1 Introduction 5

HYSIM Report Generation...................................................................137 HYSYS Report Generation...................................................................139 SimSci’s PRO/II with PROVISION Report Generation...............................141

Loading Simulation Data ..............................................................................143 Viewing Data Derived from Simulator...................................................145

Working with Block Flow Diagrams ................................................................146

Displaying the Block Flow Diagram.......................................................146 The Drag & Find Feature ....................................................................147 Accessing Commands in the Block Flow Diagram....................................148 Zooming ..........................................................................................148 BlockFlow Diagram View Menu ............................................................150

Mapping Simulator Items to Icarus Project Components ...................................151 Component Status.............................................................................157 Deleting Mappings.............................................................................158

Tower Configurations...................................................................................158 Sizing Selection ..........................................................................................169 Project Sizing Selection................................................................................169 Specifying Additional Components .................................................................171 Working with Process Flow Diagrams .............................................................171

Editing the Layout .............................................................................172 Process Flow Diagram View Menu ........................................................172 Setting Grid Properties.......................................................................175 Editing Connectivity...........................................................................175 Adding a Stream...............................................................................177 Drawing a Disconnected Stream..........................................................179 Working with Streams........................................................................180

5 Defining Project Components...........................................................................181

Adding an Area...........................................................................................182 Adding a Project Component.........................................................................182

Method 1: Dragging a Component from the Palette ................................183

Method 2: Using the Pop-Up Menu.......................................................184 Entering Component Specifications ................................................................186 Defining Installation Bulks............................................................................188

Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments..............................................................189 Mat’l/Man-hours Additions ..................................................................191 Pipe – General Specs .........................................................................191 Pipe – Item Details ............................................................................191 Duct................................................................................................ 193 Civil ................................................................................................194 Steel ...............................................................................................194 Instrumentation................................................................................194 Electrical.......................................................................................... 197

Insulation.........................................................................................197 Paint ...............................................................................................198 Defining Area Specifications..........................................................................198

Method 1: Defining area specifications using Project View .......................198 Method 2: Defining area specifications using Spreadsheet View................200

Importing Areas and Components..................................................................200 Importing an Entire Scenario ........................................................................201 Copying Components...................................................................................202

Cut and Paste ...................................................................................203



1 Introduction 6

Drag and Drop..................................................................................203 Modifying Components.................................................................................203 Copying Areas ............................................................................................204 Deleting Components ..................................................................................204

Re-numbering Components ................................................................204 Deleting Areas ............................................................................................205

Re-Numbering Areas..........................................................................205 Using the Custom Model Tool ........................................................................206

Creating a Template ..........................................................................210 Running the Custom Model Tool at Project-Level for Batch Update............211

6 Sizing Project Components...............................................................................213

Overview ...................................................................................................213 Sizing for Project Components Mapped from Simulator Items ..................213 Interactive Sizing Expert ....................................................................214 Sizing for Project Components Not Mapped from Simulator Items.............215 Resizing Project Components ..............................................................215

Creating Streams to Connect to Equipment Items............................................216

Using the Interactive Sizing Form..................................................................219 Utility Resources ...............................................................................222 Global Sizing Selection.................................................................................226 Sizing Areas ...............................................................................................229 Sizing Requirements, Calculations, and Defaults ..............................................230

Air Coolers .......................................................................................230 Agitated Tanks..................................................................................232 Compressors ....................................................................................233 Crushers ..........................................................................................234 Crystallizers .....................................................................................235 Dryers .............................................................................................236 Dust Collectors .................................................................................236 Filters.............................................................................................. 237

Heat Exchangers...............................................................................238 Pumps.............................................................................................240 Screens ...........................................................................................242 Towers ............................................................................................243 Vessels ............................................................................................255

7 Piping and Instrumentation Models .................................................................263

Interconnecting Volumetric P&ID Lines...........................................................263 Open an Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project .......................................263 Run Interconnect Piping Lines .............................................................264 Connecting Piping Lines......................................................................265 Disconnecting Piping Lines..................................................................266

Renaming a Line Tag .........................................................................267 Saving All Connections and (optionally) Updating the Project ...................268 Getting the Connected Line List Report.................................................268

Mapping Streams to Piping Lines ...................................................................269 Mapping Streams to Piping Lines .........................................................271 Un-mapping Streams to Piping Lines....................................................271 Using the Auto-Map Option.................................................................272



1 Introduction 7

8 Developing and Using Cost Libraries ................................................................276

Equipment Model Library (EML).....................................................................276 Unit Cost Library (UCL)................................................................................276 Developing and Using an Equipment Model Library (EML)..................................277

Creating an EML................................................................................277 Adding an Item to an EML ..................................................................278 Adding an EML Item to a Project Scenario.............................................280

Developing and Using a Unit Cost Library (UCL)...............................................281 Creating a Unit Cost Library................................................................282 Adding an Item to a UCL ....................................................................283 Adding a UCL Item to a Project ...........................................................285 Creating an Assembly of UCL Items .....................................................287

Working with Cost Libraries ..........................................................................291 Copying a Library Item.......................................................................291 Deleting a Library Item ......................................................................291 Escalating Library Costs .....................................................................291 Importing a Cost Library ....................................................................292 Duplicating a Cost Library...................................................................293

Deleting a Cost Library.......................................................................294

9 Changing Plant Capacity and Location..............................................................295

Changing Plant Capacity...............................................................................295 Analyzer Scale-Up Module (ASM)...................................................................297

How ASM Works................................................................................297 Scale-Up Rule Set .............................................................................297 Scale-Up for Configuration Analysis......................................................298

Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM).................................................................298 Relocation Terminology......................................................................299 Workflow .........................................................................................299 Relocating the Project........................................................................302

ARM Knowledge Base.........................................................................303

10 Analyzer Utility Modules.................................................................................311

Introduction ...............................................................................................311 Analyzer Utility Modules (AUM) – Design and Scope Generators for UtilitySystems ..........................................................................................311 AUM_CW: Cooling Water Utility Selection, Sizing, and Design Module .......312 AUM_Air: Instrument and Plant Air Utility Selection, Sizing, and DesignModule ............................................................................................312

Analyzer Utility Module (AUM) Cooling Water (AUM_Water) ...............................313 Introduction to Analyzer Utility Module (AUM) Cooling Water ...................313 1. Overview.....................................................................................314

2. Working with the Cooling Water Model.............................................316 3. Working with the Cooling Water Model Worksheets............................322 4. Basis for the Cooling Water Design Model.........................................330 Notes to Analyzer Utility Model (AUM) Users: ........................................340

AUM_Air ....................................................................................................341 Utility Design and Scope Generator for Instrument and Plant Air ..............341

Overview ...................................................................................................341 Project areas and their project components...........................................341 Benefits:.......................................................................................... 342



1 Introduction 8

How AUM_Air Works..........................................................................342 General AUM_Air Workflow...........................................................................342 Using AUM_Air............................................................................................343

Accessing AUM_Air ............................................................................343 The Initial Design ..............................................................................345 Modifying Air – Instrument, Plant Data .................................................346

Guide for the Air Utility Model (AUM)..............................................................349 SPECS Organization Chart ..................................................................350 About this SPECS Book ......................................................................350 About an Air Plant Unit.......................................................................351 About Distribution Piping for an APU ....................................................352 Schematic........................................................................................353

Configuration of Air Utility Project Components................................................353 Project Components ..........................................................................354 An “Air Plant Unit” - APU ....................................................................354 Schematic of an Air Plant Unit .............................................................355 General Layout .................................................................................355 Multiple Air Plant Units for Multiple Areas..............................................356 Compressor Redundancy: Multiple, Stand-by, Start-up ...........................356

Design Considerations .................................................................................357 Units of Measure ...............................................................................357 Air Utility Area ..................................................................................357 Air Utility Project Components.............................................................357 Instrument Air (IA) Requirements: Air Flow Rate ...................................358 Plant Air (PA) Requirements: Air Flow Rate ...........................................358 Compressor Model Selection Method ....................................................359

Interactive Specs ........................................................................................362 User Preferences...............................................................................363 Equipment Redundancy......................................................................363 Equipment Configurations...................................................................363 Basis for Design: Preferences - 1........................................................364

Configuration Layout Method and Distribution........................................366 Example layout – group of areas served by APU “A” ...............................367 Circuit Preferences: Configuration of APUs ...........................................367 Sample Layouts: One APU .................................................................368 Sample Layouts: Multiple APUs...........................................................368

Design Methods ..........................................................................................368 Basis for Sizing Air Distribution Piping ..................................................368

Sample AUM_Air Worksheets ........................................................................370 List of AUM_Air Worksheets ................................................................370 Welcome Worksheet ..........................................................................371 Control Center Worksheet...................................................................371 Guide Worksheet...............................................................................372 Status Worksheet..............................................................................377

Preferences Worksheet.......................................................................379 Configuration Part 1: Assignment of Plant Air to Areas Not RequiringInstrument Air ..................................................................................381 Configuration Part 2: Assignment of Areas to an APU..............................381 Report – Equipment Component Stats..................................................382 Report – Pipe Stats............................................................................384



1 Introduction 9

11 Evaluating the Project....................................................................................385

Running a Project Evaluation ........................................................................385 Reviewing and Revising Process Economics in the Analyzer Economics Module .....387

Loading the Analyzer Economics Module (AEM)......................................387 Overview of Workbooks......................................................................388 Revising Premises .............................................................................397 Saving AEM Workbook .......................................................................399 Discussion of Economic Premises.........................................................399

Reviewing Results in Aspen Icarus Reporter ....................................................405 Accessing Aspen Reporter...................................................................405 Which Report Mode?..........................................................................407 Standard Reports ..............................................................................407 List of Standard Reports.....................................................................412 HTML Reports ...................................................................................415 Management Reports.........................................................................417 Excel Reports ...................................................................................420 Data Trending...................................................................................425 Importing Data into Aspen Icarus Reporter ...........................................428

Creating a User Database...................................................................429 Reviewing Results in Icarus Editor .................................................................430 Accessing Icarus Editor ......................................................................430 Printing a Single Section.....................................................................431 Icarus Editor Toolbar .........................................................................431 Report Sections.................................................................................432

Reviewing Investment Analysis .....................................................................439 Viewing Investment Analysis...............................................................440 Equipment Summary .........................................................................440 Project Summary ..............................................................................441 Cashflow.......................................................................................... 448 Executive Summary...........................................................................453 Using the Reporting Assistant..............................................................455

Steps to customize the Run Summary worksheet:.................................. 459 Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls>>Template worksheet:......460 Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls>>User defined functions:... 460

Item Evaluation ..........................................................................................462

Appendix A: Equipment and Slots of those Equipment Affected by Mapping .......465

Index ..................................................................................................................499



1 Introduction 10



1 Introduction 11

1 Introduction

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, formerly known as Icarus ProcessEvaluator (IPE), is designed to automate the preparation of detailed designs,estimates, investment analysis and schedules from minimum scope definition,whether from process simulation results or sized equipment lists. It lets youevaluate the financial viability of process design concepts in minutes, so thatyou can get early, detailed answers to the important questions of "Howmuch?", "How long?" and, most importantly, "Why?".

Main Features

Links to Process Simulator SoftwarePrograms

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, formerly known as Aspen Icarus Process

Evaluator, uses expert system links to effect the automatic transfer of yourprocess simulator output results. Links are available to process simulatorprograms from AspenTech, Chemstations, Hyprotech, SimSci and others.Aspen Process Economic Analyzer can link to virtually any commercial andproprietary process simulator program.

Mapping of Simulator Models to ProcessEquipment Types

Mapping relates each process simulator model to one or more of AspenProcess Economic Analyzer’s list of several hundred types of process

equipment. A simulator heat exchanger model might be mapped to a fin-tubetype; a distillation model might be mapped into several items, such as trayedtower, kettle-type reboiler, overhead condenser, and horizontal drum. AspenProcess Economic Analyzer’s expert equipment selection makes the mappingeasy, allowing you to map one item at a time or all at once.



1 Introduction 12

Sizing of Equipment

Size of equipment is a prerequisite to costing and the results of sizecalculations performed during process simulation are loaded automatically byAspen Process Economic Analyzer. With Aspen Process Economic Analyzer,you can revise sizes, enter your values for unsized equipment or develop

sizes using Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s built-in expert sizingprograms.

Capital Investment and Schedules:Engineer-Procure-Construct

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer checks and prepares all of the necessaryspecifications for detailed design, estimation, scheduling, and economic data.Aspen Process Economic Analyzer contains built-in, up-to-date knowledgebases of:

Design, cost and scheduling data, methods and models.

Engineering, procurement and construction methods and procedures.

Critical path programming for development of design, procure and constructschedules.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer comes with time-proven, field-tested,industry-standard design and cost modeling and scheduling methods used byproject evaluators for projects worldwide. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’sdetailed results are not based on factors. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’sestimates and schedules are consistent, being derived from your projectscope definition.

Development of Operating CostsAspen Process Economic Analyzer develops operating costs in tune to yourprocess design. You can override Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s valuesand with each revision, you can see the impact of your choice on investmentanalysis measures of profitability.

Investment Analysis and Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer’s Link to YourSpreadsheets

In addition to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s basic measures such asreturn on investment, payout time and discounted cash flow rate of return,your spreadsheet programs can be linked to Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer’s investment analysis data.

Alternative Capacities and Locations

Analyzer allows you to evaluate alternate plant capacities and locations. Youcan make a percentage adjustment to the capacity, and Analyzer will



1 Introduction 13

automatically re-size all project components and stream flows. You canchange the plant location (choosing from twenty-two different countries), andAnalyzer’s plant relocation technology will automatically revise the design andcost basis parameters, including parity exchange rate, workforce rates,productivities, and construction practices.

Detailed, Interactive Process Economics

Analyzer’s detailed economics module lets you perform interactive economicscenarios. It develops key economic measures, including payout time, interestrate of return, net present value, and income and expenses on changing anyeconomic premise. It performs economic analyses over the time line of aproject, from the strategic planning phase through engineering, procurementand construction of the process facility, into start-up and throughout theproduction life of the process facility. You can study the impact of cyclicchanges in market conditions and identify economic threats and opportunitiesupon changing costs of feedstocks, products and/or utilities for each period inthe life of a project.

Links to Project Evaluation Programs

After your evaluation and selection of the best design, Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer can prepare a project specs file in SPECS format. Then,project evaluators using these systems can easily develop detailed funding orbidding estimates and schedules.

Understanding Aspen Process

Economic Analyzer’s ProjectWorkflowBefore using Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, it may be helpful to reviewthe recommended project workflow.



1 Introduction 14

Notes:

• This workflow is recommended if you are bringing process simulator datainto Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. However, Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer lets you perform the same evaluation on a process comprised ofareas and components that you add in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer,rather than mapped from simulator models.

• During the project workflow, you can go back to previous steps to refinethe project.

The Guide

Organization

This guide contains the following:



1 Introduction 15

Chapter 1 − Introduction − an overview of Aspen Process Economic Analyzerand the user's guide, as well as a list of related documentation andinformation on technical support.

Chapter 2 − Getting Started − instructions on how to start Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer, open a project, enter project specifications, and work withthe Icarus Interface.

Chapter 3 − Defining the Project Basis − instructions on definingspecifications: units of measure, standard basis, component map, designcriteria, investment analysis, raw material, product, operating unit costs, andutility.

Chapter 4 − Loading and Mapping Simulation Data − instructions onpreparing different kinds of simulator reports for use in Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer, loading simulator data, mapping simulator models toIcarus project components, adding additional components to simulatormodels, and viewing and defining simulator models in Block Flow Diagram(BFD) and Process Flow Diagram (PFD) view.

Chapter 5 − Defining Project Components − instructions on defining projectcomponents, which are the pieces of the process plant that, when linkedtogether, complete a process.

Chapter 6 − Sizing Project Components − instructions on sizing projectcomponents.

Chapter 7 – Piping and Instrumentation Models – instructions on connectionpipelines between components and creating piping line list reports forconnected lines.

Chapter 8 – Developing and Using Cost Libraries − instructions on developingcost libraries and adding library items as project components.

Chapter 9 – Changing Plant Capacity and Location − instructions on

modifying plant capacity and locations, as well as details on the parametersaffected by these modifications.

Chapter 10 - Analyzer Utility Modules – instructions on using Analyzer UtilityModules for cooling water and air.

Chapter 11 - Evaluating the Project − instructions on running a project anditem evaluations and reviewing capital costs, operating costs, and investmentanalysis reports.

Related Documentation

In addition to this document, a number of other documents are provided tohelp users learn and use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. Thedocumentation set consists of the following:

Installation Guide Aspen Engineering V7.0 Installation Guide



1 Introduction 16

Known Issues and Workarounds

Aspen Engineering V7.0 Known Issues

New Features in Aspen Engineering V7.0

Aspen Engineering Suite V7.0 What's New

Icarus Reference Aspen Icarus Reference Guide, for Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE)

Piping and Instrumentation DrawingsIcarusPIDV7.0_Ref.PDF , for Icarus Piping and Instrumentation Drawings

Technical Support

Online Technical Support Center

AspenTech customers with a valid license and software maintenanceagreement can register to access the Online Technical Support Center at:

H0HTUhttp://support.aspentech.comUTHH

You use the Online Technical Support Center to:

• Access current product documentation.

• Search for technical tips, solutions, and frequently asked questions(FAQs).

• Search for and download application examples.

• Search for and download service packs and product updates.

• Submit and track technical issues.

• Search for and review known limitations.

• Send suggestions.

Registered users can also subscribe to our Technical Supporte-Bulletins. These e-Bulletins proactively alert you to important technicalsupport information such as:

• Technical advisories

• Product updates

• Service Pack announcements

• Product release announcements



2 Getting Started 17

2 Getting Started

Starting Aspen Process

Economic AnalyzerAfter completing the installation, you can start Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer.

To start Aspen Process Economic Analyzer:

1 Click the Windows Start button, point to Programs, and then point toAspenTech.

2 On the AspenTech menu, point to Economic Evaluation 7.0; then pointto Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer starts. The Main window, empty because

no project is open, appears on the left. The Palette appears in the upper-rightand the Properties window appears in the lower-right.




You can change the position of these windows, as explained later inCustomizing the Icarus Interface (page XX333H35XX).

Starting a Project ScenarioNote: Viewing the sample project scenario provided with Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer before creating a new one will allow you to familiarizeyourself with Aspen Process Economic Analyzer without having to fill out

specifications. To open the sample project, follow the instructions underOpening an Existing Project Scenario on page XX334H24XX.

Creating a New Project Scenario

To create a new project scenario:

1 Do one of the following:

• On the File menu, click New.

-or-

• Click on the toolbar.

The Create New Project dialog box appears.




Note: You can create scenarios in project directories other than the defaultone provided by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. See Preferences –Locations XX335Hon page 50XX for instructions on adding project directories.

2 Either click an existing project in which to start a new scenario, or enter anew Project Name. Long filenames are accepted, including spaces.However, punctuation marks, such as question marks (?), exclamationpoints (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*), are not allowed.

3 Enter the Scenario Name.

This is the name of the scenario within the project. As with the Project Name,long filenames are accepted, including spaces, while punctuation marks, suchas question marks (?), exclamation points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*) arenot allowed.

If you do not enter a Scenario Name, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer uses “BaseCase” as the default.

4 Click OK.

The Project Properties dialog box appears.

5 Enter a Project Description. The description can be up to 500 characters inlength and can be comprised of letters, numbers, and punctuation. . The




description can be edited later by accessing Project Properties from theProject Basis view (see page XX336H56XX).

6 In the Units of Measure section, you can keep the default basis ofInch-Pound (IP) or select Metric. The Units of Measure selection cannot bechanged after creating the project scenario.

7 If desired, enter more details about the project scenario in the Remarksfield. Remarks can be up to 6,000 characters in length and can becomprised of letters, numbers, and punctuation. Remarks can be editedlater by accessing Project Properties from the Project Basis view (see pageXX337H56XX).

8 Click OK.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Input Units of Measure

Specifications dialog box, which allows you to customize the units ofmeasure that appear on specification forms.

For example, if you want to use CM/H (centimeters per hour) instead of M/H (meters per hour) to specify conveyor belt speed in your metric-basis project,do the following:

9 Select Velocity and Flow Rate; then click Modify.10 On the Velocity and Flow Rate Units form, enter CM/H as the new unit

name for M/H. Then enter the conversion factor between the two units inthe Conversion field. In this example, the conversion factor between thetwo units is 100 because:

100 CM/H = 1 M/H.




11 Click OK to accept the modifications and return to the previous dialog box.When finished modifying input units of measure, click Close.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the General Project Data form,where you can select a country base and currency.

The default country base is US and the default currency is Dollars (USD).Changing the country base automatically changes the currency to that of thecountry base. You can, however, enter a currency different than that of thecountry base. Just be sure to also enter a currency conversion rate (thenumber of currency units per one country base currency unit).

Country base affects various system default values. Chapter 36 of Icarus

Reference provides a table listing the default values used for each countrybase.




This is the only time you can enter country base and currency. Otherspecifications on this form can be entered later by selecting General ProjectData in the Project Basis view (see page XX338H57XX).

12 Click OK when finished entering General Project Data.

The Main Window now displays Project Explorer and the List view. See

“Understanding the Icarus Interface” on pageXX339H

26XX

for instructions on workingwith these and other features now available on the interface.

Importing an Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer 5.0/5.1 Project Scenario

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides an Import feature so that you canimport your Aspen Process Economic Analyzer 5.0 or 5.1 project scenariosinto Aspen Process Economic Analyzer V7.0. You can also select an Analyzer2.0B project scenario to import.

The Import feature allows you to use Additional Project Component files in

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer V7.0. In order to do so, you must firstimport the Additional Project Component file into an Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer 5.0/5.1 project scenario and then import the Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer 5.0/5.1 project scenario into Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer V7.0.

To import an Aspen Process Economic Analyzer 5.0/5.1 orAnalyzer 2.0B project scenario:


• On the File menu, click New.

-or-


The Create New Project dialog box appears.




Note: You can create scenarios in project directories other than the defaultone provided by Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator. See Preferences – Locations on page XX340H50XX for instructions.

2 Either select an existing project in which to start a new scenario, or entera new Project Name. Long filenames are accepted, including spaces.However, punctuation marks, such as question marks (?), exclamation

points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*), are not allowed.

3 Type the Scenario Name.

This is the name of the scenario within the project. The selected AspenProcess Economic Analyzer 5.0 or Analyzer 2.0B project file’s project andcomponent specifications will be imported into this scenario.

Again, long filenames are accepted, including spaces, while punctuationmarks, such as question marks (?), exclamation points (!), tildes (~), andasterisks (*) are not allowed.

After making an entry in the Scenario Name field, the Import buttonbecomes active.

4 Click Import.

The Select Import Type dialog box appears.

5 Select either Aspen Process Economic Analyzer 5.0 and 5.1 or Analyzer2.0B and click OK.

The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.




6 Click the project scenario folder; then click OK.

The project scenario’s settings will be imported into the new project scenario.

Opening an Existing ProjectScenarioTo open an existing project scenario:


• On the File menu, click Open.

-or-


The Open Existing Project dialog box appears.

Note: In the pictured dialog box, the project named Expansion has beenexpanded on the tree structure to show the scenario named BaseCase.




The tree structure on the left side of the dialog box displays the projects inthe default project folder:

...\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V7.0\Data\Archives_Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer

Clicking “+” next to a project expands the view to display the scenarios under

that project. Selecting a scenario displays the following scenario informationin the pane on the right:

o Version of Aspen Process Economic Analyzer in which thescenario was created

o Name of the user who created the scenario

o Name of the computer on which the scenario was created

o Units of measure used in the scenario

2 Click a scenario; then click OK.

The project scenario opens. The Main Window now displays Project Explorerand the List view. See “ Understanding the Icarus Interface” on page XX341H26XX forinstructions on working with these and other features now available on the

interface.

Palette Shortcut

You can also open a project from the Palette, which appears to the right ofthe Main Window in the default interface arrangement (it can also be floatedin the Main Window or dragged onto the Main Window and re-sized, as shownbelow).

To open a project from the Palette :

• In the Projects view tab, right-click a scenario; then, on the menu thatappears, click Open.

This opens the selected scenario.




Understanding the IcarusInterfaceThe Icarus interface lets you see multiple windows and documents. You can

customize the interface arrangement.The following is the default interface arrangement, with a specifications formopen in the Main Window.

The Icarus interface includes the following features:

Title Bar - Displays the project file name and current Main Window view.

Menu Bar - Displays menu options.

Toolbar - Allows access to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer functions. Seepage XX342H36XX.

Main Window - Provides workspace for all Aspen Process Economic Analyzerdocuments, List view, specification forms, and other views. See page XX343H28XX.

Project Explorer - Organizes project items in tree format. See page XX344H26XX.

Palette - Allows access to libraries, projects, and components. See page XX345H32XX.

Status Bar - Displays Aspen Process Economic Analyzer system status.

Properties Window – Describes the field selected on specifications form.See page XX346H32XX.

Project Explorer

Project Explorer is a graphical representation of the project. It has threeviews:

• Project Basis view

• Process view

• Project view




Each view organizes items in a tree format.

To switch views:

• Click the appropriate tab at the bottom of Project Explorer. (Stretching thewidth of the Project Explorer will display the full names on the tabs.)

The different views are described on page XX347H27XX.

To expand a tree level:

• Click the PLUS SIGN next to the condensed level.

To condense a tree level:

• Click the MINUS SIGN next to the expanded level.

Project Explorer Views

Project Basis View displays project basis specifications. Double-click on aspecification to view and/or modify it. A red arrow on an icon in this viewindicates that you can right-click on the icon for options.

Level Icon Description

2 Specifications folder

3 Specification

Process View displays simulator data information. In this view, simulatoritems can be mapped to Icarus project components. Mapped items can thenbe sized, modified, and/or deleted.


2 Main Project, containing a group of simulator areas

3 Process simulator area

4 Unmapped simulator block (yellow)

Mapped simulator block (green)

As in a process simulator, like AspenPlus or HYSYS, blocks represent differentoperations within the process. A block is sometimes referred to as a unitoperation.

Project View displays project data information. In this view, mapped itemscan be sized, modified, and/or deleted. In addition, new areas and Icarusproject components can be defined.


1 Main Project, containing the default Main Area and anyuser-added areas

2 Area

3 Project component




Main Window

The Main Window is located to the right of Project Explorer by default. TheMain Window is a workspace for all Aspen Process Economic Analyzerdocuments, the List view, and other views. The relative size of each windowcan be adjusted by clicking on the division bar and dragging it to the desired

location.

Here, the Main Window in Workbook Mode displays several tabs because acomponent specifications form and a project specifications form have beenopened.

Workbook Mode

By default, the Main Window is in Workbook Mode. In this mode, tabs areplaced at the bottom of the window. These tabs represent all windows open inthe Main Window. Clicking on a tab brings the associated window to theforeground.

Clicking Tile or Cascade on the Window menu displays all windows open inthe Main Window. Regardless of the window arrangement, the tabs are stillat the bottom of the Main Window when in Workbook Mode. Clicking themaximize button ( ) on a window returns all windows to full tab view.Clicking the condense button ( ) on the menu bar displays all windows openin the Main Window as they were when last condensed.




This is how the Main Window appears when in Workbook Mode withCascade selected as the condensed window arrangement.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer lets float Project Explorer, the Palette, andthe Properties Window in the Main window. When in this state, these windowsbehave identically to other windows that are part of the Main Window. See “Customizing the Icarus Interface” on page XX348H35XX for details.

You can turn off Workbook Mode by unmarking Workbook Mode on theView menu.

When Workbook Mode is off, no tabs are displayed. In this Mode, to bring awindow to the front, you must click on the desired window or select thedesired window from the Window menu.




List View

The List view in the Main Window displays details on items selected inProject Explorer. For example, when you click on an area in Project Explorer’sProject view, the List view displays a list of all components in the area. Thisis referred to as the “area-level” list (shown below), in which the components

are displayed in rows with component details in columns. When you click on acomponent in Project Explorer’s Project view, the List provides informationonly on the selected component, with component details listed in rows. This isreferred to as the “component-level”.

Note: In the interface arrangement pictured here, the Palette and the

Properties Window have been hidden to make room for the Main Window.

to press

hide or display the Palette ALT+1

hide or display the Properties Window ALT+2

hide or display Project Explorer ALT+0

Filtering Mechanism

You can limit area-level lists to a single category of component. To do so,click the drop-down arrow on the toolbar and click on a category.




For example, if you click “? Incomplete Items,” the list will only includecomponents that still have specifications that need to be entered in order forthe component to be included in an evaluation.

Column Settings

You can select which columns appear on the area-level list and in whichorder.

To change column settings on the area-level list:

1 Right-click on any of the column headings.

A pop-up menu lists all of the columns. Columns currently displayed arechecked.

2 To simply hide/unhide a column, click it on the menu.

3 To change the order, click Settings on the menu.

The Settings dialog box appears.

• To move a column to the right on the List View, click Move Down.

• To move a column to the left, click Move Up.




• To return the columns to the default setting (shown above), click Reset.

4 Click OK to save the settings.

When you restart Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, all columns will bedisplayed in the default order unless Save Window States is selected inPreferences (by default, Save Window States is selected). See “Saving

Window States” on pageXX349H36350H

36 for more information.

Palette

The Palette contains elements that you can apply to the project scenario. Ifyou think of Project Explorer as a picture of the project scenario, you mightthink of the Palette’s contents as the pigments and dyes used to first sketchout and then color in that picture.

For example, if you wish to import areas or components from anotherscenario into your current scenario, you can double-click on the scenario inthe Palette to get a listing of its areas and components and then drag thearea/component to the Project Explorer’s Project View. (See “Importing Areas

and Components” on 351H198.)

Likewise, the Palette’s Libraries view contains libraries of Project Basisspecification files that, in Project Explorer’s Project Basis view, you can selectto use. From the Palette, you can develop the libraries by creating new files,modifying existing files, and importing files. (See “Specification Libraries” onpage X352H125X.)




Finally, when you add a component to the project scenario, you can choosefrom the components listed in the Palette’s Components view. Then, after youadd the component, it appears in Project Explorer’s Project view. (See “Adding a Project Component” on page X353H182X).

In the default interface arrangement, the Palette appears on the right side of

the screen. Like Project Explorer, it can be displayed in a variety of ways. See “Customizing the Icarus Interface” (page X354H35X) for display options. Tohide/display the Palette, press ALT+1 or used the checked command on theView menu.

As indicated previously, the Palette has three views: Projects, Libraries, andComponents. The Components view, shown below, has a scrollable splitwindow that displays details on equipment items. The division bar can beadjusted to hide or expand the details section.

Note: The Palette pictured in this section has been dragged onto the MainWindow and re-sized.

In addition to allowing you to import the contents of other scenarios, theProjects view provides options for opening scenarios, viewing scenarioproperties, and deleting scenarios. Right-click on a project scenario to accessthe pop-up menu of options. The Projects view displays all projects in the




default project folder and any other active project folders. (See “Preferences,”particularly the “Locations” subsection on page X355H50X, for instructions.)

Properties WindowWhen you select a field on a specifications form, the Properties Windowprovides a description of the field. The description often includes minimum,maximum, and default values.

Here, the Properties Window (docked on the right side of the screen) displaysinformation on the Heat Transfer Area field, which is selected on thespecifications form.

Clicking on the Properties Window freezes and unfreezes the content. Whenthe content is frozen, you can move to another field while retaining thedescription of the original field in the Properties Window.




Like the Palette and Project Explorer, the Properties Window can be displayedin a variety of ways. See “Customizing the Icarus Interface” on page XX356H35XX fordisplay options.

To hide/display the Properties Window, press ALT+2 or use the checkedcommand on the View menu.

Customizing the Icarus Interface

In the default interface arrangement, Project Explorer docks to the left edgeand the Palette and the Properties Window share the right. When docked,windows remain attached to an edge and all other windows are sized to fit inthe remaining space available.

Clicking on a border of any of these three windows accesses a pop-up menufrom which you can select Allow Docking. When Allow Docking is marked, thewindow can be docked to any edge.

Note: When the Float In Main window is selected on the pop-up menu, theAllow Docking option is inactive.

To dock to a different edge:

1 Click the border that contains the Close button ( ) and hold down themouse button. A bounding outline will appear as you drag the window.

2 Drag the outline to the desired edge and release the mouse button.




When multiple windows are docked to the same edge, you can use thedivision bar to adjust the relative sizes. You can also use the Contract/Expand( / ) buttons to either switch from one window to the other or split the

side.

Undocking by Dragging onto Main Window

One way to undock the window is by dragging it onto the Main Window. Itssize can then be adjusted.

Float In Main Window Option

You can at any time select Float In Main Window on the pop-up menu. In thisstate, the window behaves like the List view or a specifications form, with atab at the bottom of the Main Window.

Saving Window StatesIf you are using the default Preferences, Aspen Process Economic Analyzerwill save the interface arrangement. This way, when you open Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer the arrangement is the same as you left it.

You can also set the Preferences so that Aspen Process Economic Analyzeropens displaying the default arrangement. See “Preferences,” particularly thesubsection on the General tab view (page XX357H47XX), for more information.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer's Toolbar

By default, the toolbar is docked under the menu bar. However, you can float

the toolbar by clicking on a blank area of the toolbar and dragging it. You canalso dock the toolbar to the bottom of the screen or vertically to the edge ofthe Project Explorer, Main Window, or the Palette. To do so, drag the toolbarover any one of these areas until an outline of the toolbar appears. Releasethe mouse button when the outline appears in the desired area.




The following toolbar buttons are available in Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer:

Click

this

to

Create a new project scenario. See “Creating a New Project Scenario” onpage XX358H18 XX.

Open an existing project scenario. See “Opening an Existing ProjectScenario” on page

XX359H

24XX

.

Save the current project. See “Saving a Project Scenario” on page XX360H42XX.

Print.

Load simulator data. See “Loading Simulator Data” on pageXX361H

143XX

.

Map simulator items to corresponding Icarus project components and sizethe component. See “Mapping Simulator Items” on page

XX362H

151XX

.

Run project evaluation. See page XX363H385XX for instructions.

Load Capital Costs and other reports. See page XX364H

405XX

for instructions.

Load investment analysis results. See page XX365H439 XX for instructions.

Edit connectivity in Process Flow Diagram (PFD) view. See on “EditingConnectivity” on page

XX366H

175XX

.

Add stream in PFD view. See “XX367HAdding a StreamXX” on page XX368H177XX.

Draw disconnected stream in PFD view. See “XX369H

Drawing a DisconnectedStream

XX

” on pageXX370H

179XX

.

Zoom in. Active in PFD and Block Flow Diagram (BFD) view.

Zoom out. Active in PFD and BFD view.

Hide/Display ports in PFD view.

Go back. Navigate back through previously viewed links.

Go forward. Navigate forward through previously viewed links.

Other buttons that appear on the toolbar are always inactive in Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer. They are for use in other Icarus programs.




Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Menu Bar

File Menu

Clickthis

to

New Start a new project scenario. Details on pageXX371H

18XX

.

Open Open an existing project scenario. Details on pageXX372H

24XX

.

Close Close the current project scenario.

Save Save the current project scenario. Details on page XX373H42XX.

Save As Save the current project scenario as a different file. Details on pageXX374H

42XX

.

Import Access instructions for importing areas and components. Details on page

XX375H

200XX

.

ExporttoIcarus2000

Save the current project scenario as an Icarus 2000 (*.ic2) project file.

Print Print the form or report currently active in the Main Window.

PrintPreview

Preview how form or report will appear printed.

PrintSetup

View and modify printer name and properties, paper size and source, andorientation.

PageSetup

Define page specifications.

Exit Close Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.




Run Menu

Click this to

Load Data Load simulator data. See page XX376H143 XX for details.

Map Items Map simulator items to Icarus project components and sizecomponents. See page XX377H151 XX for details.

EvaluateProject

Run a project evaluation. See pageXX378H

385XX

for details.

DevelopSchedule

This sub-menu contains commands for use in Aspen In-Plant CostEstimator only.

Scan forErrors

Scan for potential errors in the project evaluation.

Add Entry forReportingAssistant

Generate report based on template in Reporting Assistant. See pagesXX379H455XX through XX380H455XX for instructions.

RegenerateBlockDiagram

Regenerate the Block Flow Diagram. If you have indicated that someof the simulator streams are utility streams, the placement of blockswill reflect this.

RegenerateProcess FlowDiagram

Regenerate the Process Flow Diagram. See “Working with ProcessFlow Diagrams,” page

XX381H

171XX

, for details.

Reroute AllStreams

Reroute all streams on the Process Flow Diagram.

Re-number Re-number project components or project areas so that thenumbering contains no gaps. Details on page XX382H204XX.




View Menu

Click this to

Toolbar View or hide the toolbar. See page XX383H36 XX for description of the toolbar.

Status Bar View or hide the status bar. See pageXX384H

26XX

for description of the statusbar.

ProjectExplorer

View or hide Project Explorer. See pageXX385H

26XX

for description of ProjectExplorer.

Palette View or hide the Palette. See pageXX386H

32XX

for description of the Palette.

PropertiesWindow

View or hide the Properties Window. See page XX387H32XX for a description ofthe Properties Window.

WorkbookMode

Turn Workbook Mode on and off. See page XX388H28XX for an explanation ofWorkbook Mode.

Capital CostsView

Launch Aspen Icarus Reporter for interactive reports (on-screen,HTML, or Excel) or Icarus Editor for evaluation reports (.ccp). TheProject Evaluation needs to have already been run. See page

XX389H

405XX

andpage

XX390H

430XX

for details.

InvestmentAnalysis View

Display Investment Analysis spreadsheets. See “ReviewingInvestment Analysis” on page XX391H439 XX for details.

Block FlowDiagram

Display Block Flow Diagram of the loaded simulator data. See pageXX392H146XX for details.

Process FlowDiagram

Display Process Flow Diagram. This command is not active until youhave mapped the simulator items. See page XX393H171XX for details.

Streams List Display a read-only list of all simulator-derived stream properties in aspreadsheet. You can customize some of the features of the

spreadsheet (which stream properties to display, whether to displaynames of the properties, and the display style of the property values)by editing the stream list template file:

...\ Economic Evaluation V7.0\Data\ICS\strlist.fil

ErrorMessages

Display error messages found in the last Capital Costs evaluation.




Tools Menu

Click this to

Icarus Editor Launch Icarus Editor. See “Reviewing Results in Icarus Editor” onpage

XX394H

430XX

for instructions.

ExternalSimulationImport Tool

Access the simulator link for importing simulation data. See page XX395H139XX for instructions on using this tool with HYSYS.

Options Access Options sub-menu. See below.

Options Sub-Menu of Tools Menu

Click this to

Automatic

ItemEvaluation

Automatic Item Evaluation

ViewSpreadsheetsin Excel

Have the results normally reported in Icarus spreadsheets exported toExcel. The following Excel workbook, containing some Excel macros,is provided as a sample:

...\ Economic Evaluation V7.0 \Data\ICS\IpeWb.xls

A copy of this workbook also resides in each project directory. WhenAspen Process Economic Analyzer needs to report the results (that is,when you click the Investment Analysis button), the results will beexported to ASCII delimited files and loaded into IpeWb.xls. Themacro contained in the workbook will also be run.

Reporting

Assistant

Access the Reporting Assistant Options dialog box, where you can

create your own customized report spreadsheets, combininginformation from all other Icarus generated spreadsheets. See pagesXX396H

455XX

throughXX397H

455XX

for details.

Custom Tasks This command is reserved for future releases.

Preferences Access Preferences. See pageXX398H

47XX

for details.




Window Menu

Click this to

Cascade View the Main Window contents in Cascade mode. See pageXX399H

28XX

.

Tile View the Main Window contents in Tile mode. See page XX400H28XX.

Arrange Icons Return all minimized windows to the bottom of the Main Window.

# XXX View opened window in the Main Window.

Help Menu

Click this to

Contents Access Aspen Icarus Online Help.

Documentation Display list of available documentation.Training Display training information.

ProductSupport on theWeb

Display product support information.

About Display program information and copyright.

Working with Project Scenarios

This section explains how to save, delete, salvage, and unlock projectscenarios.

Saving Project Scenarios

To save a project scenario:

• Click on the toolbar or click Save on the File menu.




Aspen Process Economic Analyzer saves any changes.

If you are using the default Preferences settings, Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer will ask if you wish to save any changes when you close the projectscenario.

You can select in Preferences not to have this prompt appear (see page XX401H47XX).

To save the scenario with a new name:

1 Click Save As on the File menu.

Save As is useful when studying alternatives.

Note: You can save scenarios to project directories other than the defaultone provided by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. See “Preferences,”particularly the “Locations” subsection on page XX402H50XX, for instructions.

2 Specify a Project Name and Scenario Name and click OK.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer saves the scenario as specified.

Deleting Project Scenarios

Delete project scenarios when they are no longer needed. Deleting oldscenarios opens free disk space and makes working with scenarios easier.

To delete a project scenario:

1 In the project directory, right-click the scenario within and, on the menuthat appears, click Delete.




A dialog box asks you to confirm deletion.

Note: You can select in Preferences not to have this prompt appear (seepage XX403H47XX).

2 Click Yes to delete the project scenario.

-or-

Click No to retain the project scenario.

Salvaging Project Scenarios

If you exit Aspen Process Economic Analyzer abnormally without being able tosave the current project scenario, you can salvage the project scenario fromcached project information.

To salvage a project scenario

1 Restart Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.

A window appears asking if you wish to save the cached information found instorage.




2 Click Yes.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Salvage Project As dialogbox.

3 Specify a project and scenario name.

You cannot overwrite the scenario being salvaged. Y you must specify aproject and scenario name different from that of the original scenario.

4 Click OK.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer creates the new scenario. Except in name,this project scenario is identical to the scenario that was open when AspenProcess Economic Analyzer was abnormally exited. After creating the newscenario, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer asks if you want to open it.

Unlocking Project Scenarios

If Aspen Process Economic Analyzer crashes while you have a project scenarioopen, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer remembers that you have the projectscenario checked out. When you re-open Aspen Process Economic Analyzer,you will have to unlock the project scenario before opening it.

Anyone trying to open a locked project is denied access and provided with amessage that states the time the project scenario was checked out, the username of the person who checked it out, and the computer on which it waschecked out.

A project can only be unlocked by the user who checked it out or by anadministrator.




To unlock a project scenario

• Right-click on the project scenario in the Palette and click Unlock on thepop-up menu.

You can now open the project scenario as you normally would.

Copying Project Directories

Within a project directory, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer creates anindependent folder for each project and also creates, within a project folder,an independent folder for each project scenario. This makes it easy to moveproject scenario files from one computer to another on the same network.Simply copy and paste the folder in Windows Explorer.

You can also copy an entire project directory with multiple project and project

scenario folders. Doing so creates an identical set of folders and files in thenew location.

Note: You can copy project directories only in Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer V7.0. To use an Aspen Process Economic Analyzer 5.0/5.1 projectscenario, you must import it first (see page XX404H22XX for instructions).

See “Preferences,” particularly the “Locations” subsection on page XX405H50XX, forinformation on adding project directories and setting a new default projectdirectory.

PreferencesThe settings in Preferences allow you to specify how Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer will act each time it is used.

UTo access Preferences:

1 On the Tools menu, click Options.

2 On the menu that appears, click Preferences.




Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Preferences dialog box.

Click To do this

OK Save changes and close the Preferences.

Apply Save changes without closing Preferences.

Cancel Close Preferences without saving changes. (Clicking Apply and thenimmediately clicking Cancel would have the same effect as clicking OK.)

General

In the General tab view, you can select the following:

Prompts

Select which prompts appear.

Close Project – prompt to save any changes when closing project.

Overwrite Project – prompt to confirm overwriting project that has the samename as the one being created.

Delete Project – prompt to confirm deletion of project.

Delete Area – prompt to confirm deletion of area.

Delete Component – prompt to confirm deletion of component.

Cancel Component Edit – prompt to save changes when you click Cancel afterediting a Component Specifications form.

Delete Library – prompt to confirm deletion of library.




Delete Report Group – prompt to confirm deletion of Report Group in AspenCapital Cost Estimator. Does not apply to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.

Evaluation

Display results after evaluation - mark to have Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer open a detailed results report after you run an evaluation.

Scan for Errors before evaluation – mark to have Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer scan for errors before evaluation.

Item Report

Select which type of report you wish to display when generating an ItemReport.

HTML Item Report – mark to display the HTML Item Report, like the oneshown on page XX406H462XX, in the Main Window

Capital Cost Report – mark to display the Capital Cost Report in Icarus Editor.

Reporter Report – mark to display the Single Component Summary, exportedfrom Aspen Icarus Reporter, in the Main Window.

Display

Save Window States – mark to have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer savethe position of Project Explorer, the Main Window, the Palette, and theProperties Window, as well as selected columns on the List view. Unmark tohave Aspen Process Economic Analyzer open with the default interfacearrangement (shown on page XX407H26XX).

Display Aspen Capital Cost Estimator & Analyzer Choice Dialog on AspenProcess Economic Analyzer – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator askyou at startup whether to use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and/orAnalyzer in the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer environment. This option isincluded here because Preference selections (except for file locations) made in

one product affects all other Aspen Icarus products in the AES suite.

Show Report Group in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator – mark to have AspenCapital Cost Estimator display Report Groups.

Forms

The Forms tab view provides options related to Component Specification andInstallation Bulk forms.

Display P&I Installation Bulks in Grid – mark to have Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer display all items on the Installation Bulk specificationforms for Pipe and Instrumentation. If you unmark the checkbox, Aspen

Process Economic Analyzer allows you to select, when opening the form, theitems to include.

Use OK Button in Installation Bulks Form to Go to Main Component

Form – mark to have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer return you to themain Component Specifications form when you click OK at an InstallationBulks form. Otherwise, clicking OK simply closes the Componentspecifications.




Save Component When Switching to Different Installation Bulk or

Main Component Form – mark to have Aspen Process Economic Analyzersave the Component specifications when you switch to a different form on theComponent’s Options menu.

BackupThe Backup tab view lets you select when backups are to be performed. Youcan select both options.

Automatic Task Backup – mark to have Aspen Process Economic Analyzerperform a backup before executing major tasks, such as a project evaluation.

Timed Backup (Interval, in minutes) – mark to have Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer perform a backup at a specified interval. Specify theinterval in the box provided.

You can also select to either have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer overwritethe project backups or create unique backups.

Overwrite Project Backups – mark to have Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer overwrite the previous backup every time the program performs abackup.

Unique Project Backups – mark to have Aspen Process Economic Analyzerretain previous backups by creating a unique backup each time. Dependingon the frequency of backups (see task and timed backup options above),selecting Unique Project Backups could result in large amounts of disk spacebeing consumed by backups.

Process

The Process tab view provides options for importing from an external project.

Import Connected Streams – mark to include connected streams whenimporting an external project.

Import Installation Bulks – mark to include installation bulks whenimporting an external project.

The Process tab view also provides options for unsupported simulator modelsand custom model tool activation.

Map Unsupported Models To Quoted Cost Item – mark to have AspenProcess Economic Analyzer map, by default, unsupported simulator models toquoted cost items.

“Unsupported Models” refer to models not listed in the Project Component

Map Specifications dialog box shown on page XX408H80XX. Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer does not recognize them and, therefore, cannot map them to Icarusproject components. If this option is left unmarked, Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer will not map unsupported models. As a result, a unit operation couldappear disconnected in the Process Flow Diagram (PFD).

Quoted cost items are not project components, but act as place markers toensure that unit operations remain connected in the PFD.




Note that marking this option will not affect the mapping of supported simulator models. If a simulator model is listed in the Project Component MapSpecification dialog box, then the specified mapping will be used. Further, if asimulator model is listed and has no default mapping (that is, Current Map

List section is blank), then it is assumed that the user does not want to mapsuch simulator models to any Icarus project components.

For example, if this option is marked, a USER unit operation in Aspen Plus canbe mapped to a quoted cost item if this option is marked. This ensures thatthe unit operation remains connected in the PFD.

Activate Custom Model – mark to activate the Custom Model tool explainedon pages XX409H206XX through XX410H212XX.

Use Automatic Mapping Selection when Available (Beta feature) –Mark to use the Mapping Selection feature explained in the section on ' HH1HTUDefaultand Simulator DataUTHH' Mapping.

Locations

In the Locations tab view, you can select:

Project Directories

Add/remove alternate project directories and set the default projectdirectory. See “Adding Project Directories” on page XX411H51XX for instructions.

Other Locations Specifications

To specify the location of various specification files and

data:

1 Click an item in the list to display its description and location.2 Click the Browse button to select a new location.

Note: In some cases the description warns against changing the location.

Note: Make sure to create the IP and MET subfolder structure whenchanging the source locations for library files that are units dependent (forexample, Basis for Capital Cost, EML, UML, Custom Piping Specs, and soon).




Adding Project Directories

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer comes set up with two project directories:

...\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V7.0\data\My Econ_ProcessProjects

...\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation

V7.0\data\Archives_Econ_Process

These directories, by default,are the sole choices of project directory whenopening or saving a new project, as well as the only directories displayed onthe Palette’s Projects view.

To add a project directory and set a new default

1 On the Locations tab view of the Preferences dialog, click Add.




The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.

2 Select the folder you wish to add as an alternate directory and click OK.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer adds the directory to the AlternateProject Directories list.

3 To set an alternate project directory as the default, select it and click Set

Default.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a prompt asking you to confirm thechange.

4 Click Yes to set the new default.




If the old default location is not on the list of alternate project directories,Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays another prompt asking if you wishto add it to the list.

5 Click Yes or No.

Note: Adding the old default directory to the alternate project directory listlets you easily revert to it.

6 Click OK to save the changes to Preferences.

Before the added project directory appears on the Create New Project dialogbox and elsewhere, you will need to either restart Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer or else right-click on the current project in the Palette and click

refresh on the pop-up menu.

Logging

The Logging tab view is reserved for future releases, in which it will be usedto help clients with Technical Support issues. It is not currently activated.



3 Defining the Project Basis 55

3 Defining the Project Basis

The Project Basis defines specifications that pertain to the overall projectscenario. These specifications influence the design and cost estimate bydefining system defaults and environmental variables.

Project Basis Specifications are accessed from the Project Basis view in

Project Explorer.

A red arrow on an icon indicates that you can right-click on the item to accessa pop-up menu.




This chapter describes the different Project Basis specifications, as well ashow to customize specification libraries.

Project PropertiesProject Properties are initially specified when creating a new project.

To access Project Properties:

• Right-click on Project Properties in the main Project Basis folder, andthen click Edit.


You cannot edit:

• Project Name

• Scenario Name

• Units of Measure

You can specify these only when creating a new project.

You can edit the following:

• Project Description: The description entered here appears as the ProjectDescription on the Project Summary spreadsheet and as the BriefDescription on the Executive Summary spreadsheet. The projectdescription is shared by all scenarios that are under the project. Thedescription can be up to 500 characters in length and can be comprised ofletters, numbers, and punctuation.

• Remarks: Any remarks entered will appear immediately after the TitlePage of evaluation reports in Icarus Editor. Remarks can be up to 6,000characters in length and can be comprised of letters, numbers, and




punctuation. Remarks might include, for example, the intended purpose ofthe estimate, executive summary of results, or an explanation ofassumptions.

General Project DataGeneral Project Data is initially specified when creating a project.

To access General Project Data:

1 Right-click on General Project Data in the main Project Basis folder.

2 In the menu that appears, click Edit.

The Standard Basis Input File Specifications form appears.

You cannot edit:

• Units of Measure

• Country Base

• Currency Symbol

These can only be specified when creating a new project.

You can edit the following:




• Currency Conversion Rate: The number of currency units per onecountry base currency unit. This is for when you are using a currencyother than that of the country base.

• Project Title: Appears as the project title on reports in Aspen IcarusReporter and Icarus Editor and appears as the Scenario Description on theProject Summary spreadsheet.

• Estimate Class: Appears on the Title Page in Icarus Editor. Intended toindicate the purpose of specifications (for example, budget).

• Job Number: Appears on the Title Page in Icarus Editor.

• Prepared By: Appears at the top of reports generated by Aspen IcarusReporter and on the Title Page in Icarus Editor.

• Estimate Date: Appears immediately under the project title at the top ofthe Title Page in Icarus Editor. Reports generated by Aspen IcarusReporter also include an Estimate Date; however, the Estimate Dateshown in Aspen Icarus Reporter is the date on which the projectevaluation was run.

Importing old Standard basisfiles1 Open your Aspen Icarus Project Evaluator Software.

2 Go to the Libraries tab.

3 Click Basis for Capital Costs.

4 Right-click either Inch-Pound or Metric.

5 Click IMPORT.

The dialog that appears defaults to looking for the .D01 files for your Aspen Process

Economic Analyzer project.6 Browse to the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project you want to import.

7 Click the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project file to import.

Your Aspen Process Economic Analyzer template (standard basis file) is nowin the new Aspen Icarus Project Evaluator system.

Basis for Capital Costs• The Basis for Capital Costs folder includes:

• Units of measure customization.

• General specs affecting capital and operating costs, including contingency(based on specified process description, process complexity, and projecttype) , process control, location, engineering start date, soil conditions,vessel design code, and level of instrumentation.

• Workforce wage rates (for both the overall project and by craft),productivities, and workweek definition.

• Indexing of material costs and man-hours by COA.




Input Units of Measure Customization

Input Units of Measure Customization allows you to customize the units ofmeasure that appear on specification forms.

Input Units of Measure Customization can only be accessed from outside ofthe project in the Palette’s Libraries view. It does not appear in the ProjectExplorer’s Project Basis view.

To customize input units of measure:

1 With no project open, expand the Basis for Capital Costs folder in thePalette’s Libraries view. Expand the appropriate units of measure basisfolder – Inch-Pound or Metric. Right-click on one of the specification filesand click Modify.

Note: If you are modifying a file you will need to later select the file in theproject. To do so, right-click on Basis for Capital Costs in the ProjectExplorer’s Project Basis view, click Select, and select the file.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Basis for Capital Costslibrary in Project Explorer.

2 In the Units of Measure Customization folder, right-click on Input and clickEdit on the pop-up menu.

The Input Units of Measure Specifications dialog box appears.




3 If, for example, you want to use CM/H (centimeters per hour) instead ofM/H (meters per hour) to specify conveyor belt speed in your metric-basisproject, click Velocity and Flow Rate and then click Modify.

4 On the Velocity and Flow Rate Units form, enter “CM/H” as the new unitname for M/H. Then enter the conversion factor between the two units in

the Conversion field. In this example, the conversion factor between thetwo units is 100 because:

100 CM/H = 1 M/H.

5 Click OK to accept the modifications and return to the previous dialog box.

6 When finished modifying input units of measure, click Close.




Output (Reports) Units of Measure

Customization

Output (Reports) Units of Measure Customization allows you to customize theunits of measure that appear on Capital Costs and other reports.

To customize output units of measure

1 Right-click on Output (Reports) Units of Measure Customization in theBasis for Capital Costs folder in Project Explorer’s Project Basis view, andthen click Edit on the pop-up menu.

The Output Units of Measure Specifications dialog box appears.

You can change the basis for all output units of measure by selecting adifferent basis in the Unit of Measure Basis section; however, note that thisvoids all previous customizations.

2 To customize only individual units, such as velocity and flow rate units,select the unit type and click Modify. Then, for each unit you wish tochange, enter the new unit name and the conversion factor (between the

old and new units).




In this example, centimeters per hour (CM/H) replaces meters per hour(M/H). A conversion factor of 100 has been entered because 100 CM/H = 1M/H.

3 For example, if you want to use CM/H (centimeters per hour) instead ofM/H (meters per hour) to specify conveyor belt speed in your metric-basisproject, enter “CM/H” as the new unit name for M/H. Then, enter theconversion factor between the two units in the Conversion field. In thisexample, the conversion factor between the two units is 100 because 100CM/H = 1 M/H.

4 Click OK to accept the modifications and return to the previous dialog box.

5 When finished modifying output units of measure, click Close.

General Specs

General Specs greatly affect the total capital and operating cost of theproject.

To access General Specs:

1 Right-click General Specs in the Project Basis view’s Basis for CapitalCosts folder.

2 On the menu that appears, click Edit. menu.

The section of the Standard Basis file containing General Specs appears in aspecification form.




Process Description, Process Complexity and Project Type combine togenerate contingency (as a percent of total project cost). They areinterdependent, and the final value is a nonlinear combination of theindividual contribution. As an example of the various rule-based deductionsused, consider the selections made in the Standard Basis file pictured above:

• Process Description: New and unproven process

• Process Complexity: Highly complex

• Project Type: Grass roots/Clear field

Since the process is new and unproven, contingency value is made “high”compared to the base condition. Also, since the process complexity is high,the contingency is “raised” again. The Grass roots/Clear field project type “lowers” the contingency because of reduced site constraints.

Note: You must clear the Contingency Percent field for the system tocalculate the contingency based on your changes.

Field Description

Process

Description Also drives the design allowances for allequipment whose material cost is system-generated. User-entered costs are notaffected. A new and unproven process hasa higher design allowance compared with aproven process. This is applied against allnon-quoted equipment

ProcessComplexity

Used to adjust contingency. Highlycomplex implies hightemperature/pressure and more




Field Description

instrumentation and controllers (forexample, batch), whereas simplicityimplies offsites.

Process Control You can provide either digital, analog or

distributed control system for the projectand the process control strategy is fixedwith this choice.

P r o j ec t I n f o r m a t i on

Project Location Adjusts the various location dependentcost fields based on the actualgeographical location of the project site.The system calculates values such asfreight (domestic and ocean), taxes/duties,wage rates and workforce productivities.

Project Type Used to determine the configuration of theproject’s electrical power distribution andprocess control systems.

Contingency

Percent This field will have the value of thecontingency percentage calculated by thestandard basis expert based on userspecification of project information. Thisallows you to modify the value estimatedby Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. Thisvalue represents:

Construction Contingency

Material Contingency

Engineering Contingency

Estimated StartYear/Month/Day

of BasicEngineering

These three fields show the year, month,and day that the basic engineering willbegin. Refer to Icarus Reference, Chapter31: Engineering, for a definition ofengineering functions.

Soil Conditions

Around Site

Specifies the nature of the soil most

prevalent around the construction site.This impacts the development of allfoundations, the amount of pilingsdeveloped, any excavation and trenchingwork items, and construction rentalrequirements. Icarus Reference, Chapter19: Civil, provides soil type definitions.




Field Description

Eq u i pm e n t Sp e c i f i c a t i o n

Pressure Vessel

Design Code Specifies the design code used for pressurevessels design. The following design codescan be chosen:

ASME = ASME code, Section VIII, Div 1

BS5500 = British code, BS5500

JIS = Japanese code, B8243

DIN = German Code, AD Merkblatt

Vessel DiameterSpecification

Specifies the vessel dimension in thecomponent specification form as insidediameter (ID) or outside diameter (OD).

P and I DesignLevel

Specifies the level of instrumentationprovided for the equipment. The P and Imay be standard instrumentation (STD) or

highly instrumented (FULL). Refer to thePiping and Instrumentation Drawings forinstrumentation on specific equipment.

Data Affected by General Specs

The following is a detailed description of the data affected by the GeneralSpecs and the magnitude of their effect depending on the different selections.

• Domestic Freight (% of material)

Specifies cost of domestic freight as a percentage of material costs. The value

for this field depends on the project location selected in the standard basis.Domestic freight percentages for the different locations are:

o North America = 4

o South America = 5

o Central America = 5

o Europe = 1

o Asia = 1

o Africa = 4

o Australia =

• Ocean Freight (% of material)

Specifies cost of ocean freight as a percentage of material costs. The value forthis field depends on the project location selected in the standard basis.Ocean freight for the different locations is adjusted based on the percentageof plant material that can be purchased locally. The percent adjustments forthe different locations are:

o North America = 0

o South America = 8





o Europe = 0

o Asia = 0

o Africa = 8

o Australia = 12

The final value of the field is calculated by the following formula:

O.F (%) = % Adjust * (100 - % material locally purchased) / 100

• Taxes/Duty (% of material)

Specifies taxes as a percentage of total material costs. The value used in thecapital cost evaluation depends on the project location chosen in the file. Theyare:

o North America = 6.25

o South America = 4.00

o Central America = 4.00

o Europe = 0.00

o Asia = 6.00

o Africa = 4.00

o Australia = 7.00

• Contingency (%)

Specifies allowance for contingencies as a percentage of the bare plant cost.This field depends on the selection made for the following fields in thestandard basis file:

o Process Description

o Process Complexity

o Project Type

You must clear the Contingency Percent field for the system to calculate the

contingency based on your changes.

The following data defines the general design conditions to be applied to theentire project being estimated; this information is used to reflect the desiredproject design methodology.

• Equipment Design Allowance (%)

Specifies percent allowance for design changes for system developedequipment costs. The value depends on the selection made in the ProcessDescription field. The following values are selected for the different projectconditions:

o New and unproven process = 15

o New process = 10

o Redesigned process = 7

o Licensed process = 5

o Proven process = 3

• Equipment Rotating Spares (%)

Specifies a percentage of the purchase cost of all rotating equipment in theestimate to allow for spare rotors, seals and parts. The allowance for spares isdeveloped based upon-0 purchased equipment cost values for pumps,




compressors, drivers and generators. The following value is chosen for theabove field based on the project location:

o North America = 7

o South America = 10


o Europe = 7o Asia = 10

o Africa = 15

o Australia = 7

• Soil Condition at Site

Specifies the soil type used to develop data for civil work throughout theproject. Based on the soil type chosen, soil loading and soil density areselected. Icarus Reference, Chapter 19, provides a complete definition for allthe soil types. Once the soil type is selected, the system automatically selectsthe type of piles used in the project. The following pile types will be selected:

Soil Type Pile TypeSoft clay Creosoted wood - 18-30 tons

Firm clay Creosoted wood - 18-30 tons

Wet sand Creosoted wood - 18-30 tons

Sand+clay Precast concrete - 24-50 tons

Dry sand Precast concrete - 24-50 tons

Sand Precast concrete - 24-50 tons

Gravel Steel h-pile - 60-170 tons

Soft rock Steel h-pile - 60-170 tons

Hardpan Steel h-pile - 60-170 tons

Med-rock Steel h-pile - 60-170 tons

Hard rock Steel h-pile - 60-170 tons

Pile foundations are designated according to the country base defaultcapacities and spacing. Pile foundations are provided for equipment andstructures whose weight (including concrete) exceeds one-half the pilecompression capacity.

• Power Distribution

The type of project is used to configure the electrical power distributionsystem inside Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. The power distributionspecification generated by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides the

means of designating MAIN and UNIT substations and the cabling betweenthem

Note that no transmission LINE is provided for any of the different choices of “Project Type.”

Components Included

Project Type MAIN Substation UNIT




Grass roots/Clearfield

Transformers,Switchgears

MCC, SWTransformer

Plant addition -adjacent to existingplant

Switchgear MCC

Plant addition -

inside existingplant

Switchgear MCC

Plant addition -suppressedinfrastructure

None Added None Added

Plant Modifications / Revamps

Switchgear MCC

In addition, for plant modifications/revamps, the capital cost excludes cablecosts related to connecting the main substation with the unit; in contrast, forthe remaining project types, a default distance of 1,000 FEET [300 M](excluding hook-up allowance) is used to cost the power distributioncomponents.

• Process Control

Specifies the desired type of control scheme: Analog, DDCTL (DistributedDigital), or PLC (Programmable Logic Controllers)

• Project

Schedule

The systemdevelops aproject schedulebased upon theestimate scopeof workincluding dates and durations for design engineering, procurement, deliveryof materials and equipment, site development and construction. Theconstruction schedule is integrated with the cost estimate to provide the basisfor estimation of schedule-dependent costs such as equipment rentalrequirements, field supervision and construction management.

The schedule commences at the start of basic engineering, as indicated bythe date for basic engineering in the standard basis file.

In addition, the General Specs provide defaults for various general designconditions that control project design methodology. This in turn affects costsfor equipment, material and manpower, and the overall project schedules.

These defaults are not editable in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. Thefollowing defaults (based on their major categories) are used by AspenProcess Economic Analyzer to convey specifications for the project designdata:

Components Included

Project Type Operator Center Control Center

Grass roots/Clear field YES YES

Plant addition -suppressedinfrastructure

NO NO

All others NO YES




Item Defaults

Equipment Remote shop fabrication maximumdimensions:

Maximum diameter : 14.5 FEET [4.5 M] Maximum length : 100 FEET [30 M]

Maximum weight: 250 TONS [225 TON]

Piping Pipe Fabrication: Remote shop fabricatedpiping

Specifies the general method of pipefabrication for the project.

Civil Concrete Mix type: READY - Ready mix(purchased)

Steel Steel finish type: PT – painted steel

Start engineering phase: BASIC – Basicengineering phase

Delivery Schedule Adjust (%): 100

Specifies an adjustment, as apercentage, to the schedule durationsdeveloped by the system for delivery ofequipment items, bulk materials, controlsystem. This adjustment applies toreceipt of vendor data and

fabricate/ship lead times.

Construction Schedule Adjust (%):100

Specifies an adjustment, as apercentage, to the schedule durationsdeveloped by the system for allconstruction manpower.

Project Schedule

Bar Symbol: *

Specifies the symbol to be used to printsummary activity bars.

Gap Symbol : -

Specifies the symbol to print the gapswithin activity bars.

Critical path symbol: c

Specifies the symbol to be used to printthe critical path.

User bar symbol: x




Symbol for printing user-defined bars onbar charts.

EngineeringAdjustment forBasic Engineering

Phase

% man-hour : 100

Adjustment of the duration of the basicengineering phase. A value less than

100% will shorten the duration. A valuegreater than 100% will increase theduration.

EngineeringAdjustment forDetailedengineering Phase

% man-hour: 100

Adjustment of the duration of detailengineering. A value less than 100% willshorten the duration. A value greaterthan 100% will increase the duration.

Contracts(scope/definition)

Contract number: 1

Specifies the number used to reference

this contract, its description, scope ofeffort and profile of indirects,overheads, fee, contingency, etc.

Company title: PRIME CONTRACTOR

Specifies the description of the contract. This description is used as the title inappropriate reports.

Construction Workforce

Construction Workforce specifications are divided into General Rates and CraftRates.

General Rates

The General Wage Rates information globally sets wage rates andproductivities for all crafts.

To access:

1 Right-click on General Wage Rates in the Project Basis view’s Basis forConstruction Workforce folder.

2 On the menu that appears, click Edit.




Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Wage General Infospecifications form in the Main Window.

Descriptions of the General Wage Rate specifications follow.

Field Description

Number ofshifts

Number of shifts used during construction. Ifany premium pay is involved with secondand third shift work (beyond overtime pay),such premium should be indicated by aproperly averaged craft rate per shift.

Productivityadjustment

Specifies whether to use multi-shift /workweek adjustments or not.

Indirects If wage rates are to be treated asall-inclusive, the indirects may be deleted forthis workforce by specifying “-”. Selecting anall-in rate suppresses all constructionindirects: fringes, burdens, small tools,construction rental equipment, etc.

A l l Cr a f t s P e r c e n t o f B a s e

Workforce

referencebase

Enter B for system base. (Reference to apreviously defined workforce number appliesto Icarus 2000 only.)




Field Description

Wage Rate

percent ofbase

Wage rates for all crafts as a percentage ofreference base wage rates.

Productivity

percent ofbase

Productivities for all crafts as a percentage ofreference base wage rates.

A l l Cr a f t s F ix e d Ra t e s

This input may be used to globally set the wage rates andproductivities of all crafts in this workforce to fixed values.

Wage rate allcrafts

Specifies the fixed wage rate (in the projectcurrency) for all crafts in the workforce. Seediscussion in Icarus Reference.

Productivity all

crafts

Specifies the fixed productivity value for all

crafts in this workforce. See discussion inIcarus Reference. If no value is specified,the system defaults to 100%.

Work week per

shift Refer to the description of workforces inIcarus Reference for the effect of changingthe work week and number of shifts uponproductivity and job duration. The standardworkweek plus overtime must not exceed 84hours per week per shift.

Standard workweek

Specifies number of standard hours perweek per man per shift.

Overtime Specifies number of overtime hours perweek per man per shift.

Overtime rate

percent

standard

Specifies overtime pay expressed as apercentage of standard pay (for example,time and one half = 150%).

Gen e r a l C r a f t W a g e s

The general craft wages are for crafts that could appear inmost crews and whose productivities and/or wage rates aredependent on the type of crew.

Helper wagerate

UK Base only. Specifies wage rate for crafthelp as a fixed rate to be used in all crews.

Helper wage

percent craftrate

UK Base only. Specifies the wage rate forcraft help as a percent of the principal craftin the crew. This value must be less than100%.




Field Description

Foreman wage

rate Specifies the wage rate for foremen as afixed rate to be used in all crews. Default:110% of rate of highest paid craft in crew.

Foreman wage

percent craftrate

Specifies the wage rate for foreman as apercent of the highest paid craft in crew.This value must be greater than or equal to100%. Default: 110% of rate of highestpaid craft in crew.

Craft Rates

Craft Rates set the wage rate and productivity individually for each craft.

To access:

1 Right-click on Craft Rates in the Project Basis view’s Basis for CapitalCosts\Construction Workforce folder.


Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Wage Rate Info specificationsform in the Main Window.

3 To add multiple definitions to Craft Wage Rates, click the Add button onthe button bar:

4 Use these fields to set the wage rate and productivity individually for eachcraft.

Field Description

Craft

wages/prod. Wage rates and productivities may beassigned to individual crafts. Those




Field Description

crafts not referenced are assigned wagerates and productivities specified inGeneral Wage Rate or the systemdefault values.

Craft code Identifies the craft to which thefollowing wage rate and productivityapply.

The craft code must be an existingsystem craft code.

Wage rate/mh Specifies the wage rate (in the projectcurrency) for this craft for standardhours.

Productivity Specifies the productivity of this craftas a percentage of the system’s base.

(See discussion in Icarus Reference.)

Indexing

The Material and Man-hour specification forms in the Indexing folder allowyou to manipulate the material and/or man-hour costs for process equipmentand installation bulks. You can also adjust these indexes by location by usingthe Location specification form.

For example, you could specify to increase the material costs associated witha type of process equipment.

Indexing is used to tailor Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to mimic your

work methods and costs. If your equipment costs for a category areconsistently offset from Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s values, useIndexing to correct that.

To adjust the Material or Man-hour index

1 Right-click on Material or Man-hour and click Edit.




2 To adjust the index for all equipment or for all of one of the installationbulks, enter the index value in the box provided. For example, entering “200” in the Equipment box will double the material costs for all itemsunder the equipment account group.

To adjust the index for a sub-category, click the arrow-button in the box. This

accesses a similar form listing sub-categories corresponding to the Code ofAccounts (see Icarus Reference, Chapter 34, for a complete list). Adjustments

to a sub-category override adjustments to the account-group.3 Click OK to close the form and apply changes.

To adjust by location

1 Right-click on Location and click Edit.

2 Type the location description.

3 Type the Code of Account (COA) to indicate the start of the COA range, orclick the red arrow and then click Select by the subcategory on the COASubcategory Selection window.




The Equipment COA Selection window appears.

4 Click Select again by the COA.

The COA is entered on the form.

5 Do the same to indicate the end of the COA range.




6 Enter the amount to escalate material costs and/or the amount to escalateman-hour costs.

7 To escalate another range, click Add.

8 Click OK to close the form and apply changes.

Process DesignThe Process Design specifications are used in Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer projects that contain a simulator input. These specs allow AspenProcess Economic Analyzer to map simulator models into Icarus projectcomponents. For example, a distillation column model in a simulator may bemapped to a combination of equipment such as a double diameter tower, anair-cooler (for a condenser), a horizontal tank (for a reflux drum), a generalservice pump (for a reflux pump) and a thermosiphon reboiler.

The Process Design Specifications indicate the default settings that thesystem uses for mapping all models of the same class. These specs can be

customized in files and used in many projects.

Simulator Type and Simulator File Name

Simulator Type and Simulator File Name are described under Loading

Simulator Data on page XX412H143XX.

Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs

The Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs are used in mapping simulatorunits to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer units, serving as the

cross-reference.

To access:

1 Right-click on Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs in the ProjectBasis view’s Process Design folder.





The Units of Measure Specification dialog box appears.

Note: Each simulator cross-reference UOM file contains a basis (which maybe METRIC or I-P). The basis indicates the Aspen Process Economic Analyzerbase units set to which simulator units will be converted.

The left side of the screen displays the simulation output units. The right sideof the screen displays the corresponding Aspen Process Economic Analyzerunits. The conversion factors between the two units are entered in the lower-center section of the screen.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides a set of common simulator unitsand their conversions to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer units. You canmodify and/or add units to these files.

Specifying the Mapping for a Simulator Unit

To specify the mapping for a simulator unit:

1 Select the simulation unit from the Units Used list in the SimulationOutput section. In the example below, the simulation unit is CM/HR(Centimeters/Hour).

2 Select the appropriate units category from Units Category list in the AspenProcess Economic Analyzer section. In the example below, the unitscategory is Velocity.

3 Select the appropriate Aspen Process Economic Analyzer unit from Unitslist in the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer section. In the examplebelow, the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer unit is M/H (Meters/Hour).




Note: If an equivalent Aspen Process Economic Analyzer unit is not found,select Miscellaneous as the Units Category and map the simulator unit toOther in the Units window.

4 Enter the conversion factor between the two units (the simulation unit andthe Aspen Process Economic Analyzer unit) in the Conversion Factor box.In the example below, the conversion factor between 100 CM/HR = 1 M/H

5 Click Save to save the mapping.

When a unit has been mapped and saved, a green box appears next to thesimulation unit. A yellow box indicates the unit is not mapped.

Deleting a Mapping

To delete a mapping

• Select the simulator unit; then click Delete.

Removing a Unit

To remove a particular unit from the simulation units list

• Select the unit; then click Remove.




Adding a Unit

To add a new unit to the list, enter the new unit symbol in the New Units toAdd box in the Simulation Output section and click Add. Changes will notaffect existing project components.

Changing Existing Components

To change existing components:

1 Unsize the item or unmap the items and then re-map and re-size.

2 Once all of the units have been specified, click OK to store and save thespecifications.

It is critical that all simulator units of measure be mapped into Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer units. When the simulator output is loaded, Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer identifies all units of measure in the file. Any units notmapped in the project’s current simulator cross-reference UOM specificationare automatically added to the list and you are alerted to the need to define

the mapping and re-load the file.You must correct this in order to continue without problems. Complete thesteps above to specify the mapping for a simulator unit. Scroll through theUnits Used list for any yellow-tagged units. Map all these, save the file, andre-load the simulator data.

Project Component Map Specifications

The Project Component Map Specifications dialog box contains a list of modelsfor the selected simulator and a list of the corresponding Icarus projectcomponents to which the simulator models will map.

To access:

1 Right-click Project Component Map Specifications in the Project Basisview’s Process Design folder.





Models that are mapped in the current file are marked with an asterisk (*). Ifno asterisk is present, then that model will not generate any projectcomponents when loaded, mapped, and sized.

3 Exclude simulator models from the mapping process by selecting thesimulator item and then clicking Delete All Mappings.

You can select a simulator item and review the mapping(s) for that item.

To change one of the mappings:

1 Click an item in the Current Map List.

2 Click Delete One Mapping

3 Create a new mapping.

To create a new mapping:

• Click New Mapping; then select an appropriate Icarus projectcomponent.

For simulator column models, an additional specification can be made. Since acolumn may be mapped to multiple pieces of equipment, Aspen Process

Economic Analyzer requires an identification for each of these mappings.Refer to Mapping Simulator Models in Chapter 4 for tower/columnconfiguration mapping identifications.

Note: You can select in Preferences to have Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer map unsupported simulator models (i.e., models not included in thelist of simulator models on the Project Component Map Specifications dialogbox) to quoted cost items. See page XX413H49XX for instructions.




Default Simulator Mapping Specs

The following tables list models that are mapped to Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer project components. Models that are not supported can be mappedto a quoted item if you mark “Map Unsupported Models To Quoted Cost Item”in Preferences, Process tab (see page XX414H49XX).

AspenTech’s Aspen Plus Map Specs

ModelName

Model Description Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Default

CCD Countercurrentdecanter

Rotary drum filter

CFUGE Centrifuge filter Centrifuge SOLID-BOWL

COMPR Compressor/turbine Centrifugal gas compressor / Gas turbine withcombustion chamber

CRUSHER Solids crusher Jaw crusher

CYCLONE Solid-gas cyclone Cyclone Dust collector

DECANTER Liquid-liquid decanter Vertical vessel – process

DISTL Shortcut distillationrating

Single-diameter trayed tower

DSTWU Shortcut distillationdesign

Single-diameter trayed tower

ESP Electrostaticprecipitator

Low voltage electrical precipitator

FABFL Baghouse filter Cloth bay baghouse

FILTER Continuous rotaryvacuum

Rotary drum filter

FLASH2 Two-outlet flash Vertical vessel – process

FLASH3 Three-outlet flash Vertical vessel – processFSPLIT Stream splitter

HEATER Heater/cooler Floating head heat exchanger

HEATX Two-stream heatexchanger

Floating head heat exchanger

HYCYC Solid-liquidhydrocyclone

Water only cyclones - mineral

PUMP Pump/hydraulicturbine

Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump

RADFRAC Rigorousfractionation

Single-diameter trayed tower (column)

Floating head heat exchanger (condenser)

U-tube reboiler (reboiler)

Horizontal drum (accumulator)

Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump (refluxpump)

PETROFAC Consists of 42configurations. It hasbeen confirmed thatthe following can bemapped to Aspen

Single-diameter trayed tower (column)

Floating head heat exchanger (condenser)






Process EconomicAnalyzer:

PREFLIF- preflashblock with furnace,zero pumparoundsand zerosidestrippers.

CDUIOF – crudeblock with furnace,three pumparoundsand threesidestrippers.

CDU 3 – vacuumblock with twopumparounds andtwo sidestrippers.

Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump (refluxpump)

Furnace block

RBATCH Batch reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed

RCSTR Continuous stirredtank

Agitated Tank – enclosed, reactor jacketed

REQUIL Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketedRGIBBS Equilibrium reactor-

gibbsAgitated Tank – enclosed, energy jacketedminimization

RPLUG Plug-flow reactor Single diameter packed tower

RSTOIC Stoichiometer reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed

RYIELD Yield reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed

SCFRAC Short-cut distillation Single-diameter trayed tower

SCREEN Wet or dry screenseparator

Vibrating system

SWASH Single-stage solidswasher

Rotary drum filter

VSCRUB Venturi scrubber Washer dust collector

ChemCAD V Map Specs

Model Model Description Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerDefault

BAGH Baghouse filter Cloth bay baghouse dust collector

COMP Adiabatic (isentropic) or polytopicCompression

Centrifugal Axial Gas Compressor

CFUG Basket centrifugal filter Atmospheric suspended basketcentrifuge

CRYS Crystallizer or melting bycooling/heating

Batch vacuum crystallizer

CSED Solid-wall basket centrifugeseparating solids from liq slurry

Solid bowl centrifuge

CYCL Gas-solid cyclone separator Cyclone dust collector

DRYE Dryer Direct rotary dryer

EREA Equilibrium reactor Agitated tank reactor

ESPT Electrostatic precipitator Low voltage electrical precipitator




FIRE Fired heater Floating head heat exchanger

FLAS Multipurpose flash Vertical cylindrical vessel

FLTR Vacuum or constant-pressure filter Rotary disk filter

GIBS Gibbs reactor Agitated tank reactor

HCYC Hydrocyclone Water cyclone (separation

equipment)HTXR Heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger

KREA Kinetic reactor (plug flow orcontinuous stirred tank reactors)

Agitated tank reactor

LLVF Vapor/liquid/liquid flash Vertical cylindrical vessel

MIXE Stream mixer (flash calculation atoutput pressure)

Vertical cylindrical vessel

PUMP Liquid pump (to increase pressure ofliquid stream)

Centrifugal pump

REAC Stoichiometric reactor Agitated tank reactor

SCDS Simultaneous correction rigorousfractionation (single column)

Single diameter trayed tower

Floating head heat exchanger

(condenser)



Centrifugal single or multi-stagepump (reflux pump)

SCRE Screen Single deck rectangular vibratingscreen

TOWR Inside/out rigorous fractionation(single column)

Single diameter trayed tower

Floating head heat exchanger(condenser)


Horizontal drum (accumulator) Centrifugal single or multi-stagepump (reflux pump)

WASH Washer Washer dust collector

H y s i m M a p S p e cs

Model Name Model Description Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerDefault

BAG FILTER Baghouse filter Dust collector cloth bay

COLUMN Distillation column Single-diameter trayed tower




Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump (reflux pump)

COMPRESSOR Compressor Centrifugal gas compressor

CSTR Continuous stirred-tank Agitated Tank - enclosed,




jacketed

CYCLONE Gas-solid separator Cyclone dust collector

EXPANDER Expander Gas turbine

FILTER Rotary drum filter Rotary drum filter

HEATER Heater/cooler Floating head heat exchanger

HEATEX Simple heat exchanger Floating head heat exchangerHYDROCYCLONE Solid-liquid hydrocyclone Water only cyclones - mineral

separation

PIPING Pipeline

PLUG Plug-flow reactor Single-diameter packed towerand others

PUMP Pump Centrifugal single or multi-stagepump

RATEHEATEX Rigorous heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger

REQUI Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed

RGIBBS Gibbs-energy reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed,

jacketedRSTOIC Stoichiometric reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed,

jacketed

SOLIDSEP Solids separator Cyclone dust collector

HYSYS Map Spe c s

Model Name Model Description Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerDefault

AIR COOLER Air cooler Free standing or rack mounted aircooler

BAG FILTER Baghouse filter Dust collector cloth bay

COLUMN Distillation column Single-diameter trayed tower


CSTR Continuous stirred-tank

Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed

CYCLONE Gas-solid separator Cyclone dust collector

EXPANDER Expander Turbo expander

FILTER Rotary drum filter Rotary drum filter

HEATER Heater/Cooler Floating head heat exchanger

HEATX Simple heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger

HYDROCYCLONE Solid-liquidhydrocyclone Water only cyclones – mineralseparation

PLUG Plug-flow reactor Single-diameter packed tower andothers

PUMP Pump Centrifugal single or multi-stagepump

REQUI Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed

RGIBBS Gibbs-energy reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed

RSTOIC Stoichiometric reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed




SEP Separator HT Drum – horizontal drum

TANK Tank VT Storage – flat-bottom storagetank, optional roof

SimSci's Pro II with PROVISION SimSci’s Pro II Ma S ecs

Model Name Model Description Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer Default

CENTRIFUGE Centrifuge Solid bowl centrifuge

COLUMN UNITS Distillation column Single-diameter trayed tower




Centrifugal single or multi-stagepump (reflux pump)


CRYSTAL Crystalizer Oslo growth type crystalizer

CSTR Continuous stirred tank Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed

DECANTER Countercurrent decanter Rotary drum filter

DEPRESSURE Non-steady-state depressure Vertical vessel - process

DRYER Solids dryer Atmospheric tray dryer

EXPANDER Expander Gas turbine

FLASH FLASH Vertical vessel - process

HEATEX Simple heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger

PLUG Plug-flow reactor Single diameter packed tower

PUMP Pump Centrifugal single or multi-stage

pump

REACTOR Reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed

RIGHTEX Rigorous heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger

ROTDRUM Rotary drum filter Rotary drum filter

SHORTCUT Distillation column Single-diameter trayed tower

Design Criteria

After the simulator model is loaded into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer,

mapping and sizing of the items can be performed. If an item is already sizedinside the simulator, the sizing parameters are automatically brought intoAspen Process Economic Analyzer and used.

Items not sized by the simulator can be sized following the instructions inChapter 6. In addition to process information obtained from the simulator,certain design specifications may be required before sizing can beaccomplished.




Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s Sizing Expert uses design values based onthe user-defined field values on specification forms in the Design Criteriasub-folder. The values on these forms provide the basis for developing designspecifications from operating conditions for all equipment to be sized.

You can enter design conditions (design pressure and temperature) for allequipment (using the Common form) and also enter design conditions fortypes of equipment. (Conditions entered on the equipment type formsoverride those on the Common form).

Common

Design pressure and temperature entered on the Common specifications formapplies to all equipment except equipment for which you have separatelyspecified these design conditions.

• Design Pressure

Click on the Design Pressure field to open the Design PressureSpecifications form. The specifications form lets you specify rules forcalculating the design pressure based on the range in which the operatingpressure falls. The design pressure is calculated from the operatingpressure using the formula shown on the form. You can modify thepressure limit (upper and lower limit) as well as parameters A and B.




Note: In earlier versions of Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, the “DesignPressure – Multiplier” field was used. This field has now been replaced bythe Design Pressure Specifications form. If projects created using theseearlier versions are opened, then the parameters A and B areautomatically adjusted based on the multiplier value specified. Thisensures that old projects can be carried over using the same design

criteria.• Design Temperature

Click on the Design Temperature field to open the Design TemperatureSpecifications form. The specifications form lets you specify rules forcalculating the design temperature based on the range in which theoperating temperature falls. The design pressure is calculated from theoperating temperature using the formula shown on the form. You canmodify the temperature ranges (upper and lower limit) as well asparameters A and B.

Note: In earlier versions of Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, the “Design

Temperature - Increase” field was used. This field has now been replacedby the Design Temperature Specifications form. If projects created usingthese earlier versions are opened, then the parameters A and B areautomatically adjusted based on the multiplier value specified.

Pumps

In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructionsunder Common, page XX415H87XX), you can enter the following design criteria forpumps:

• Pump Overdesign Factor

The pump overdesign factor is used by Aspen Process Economic Analyzerto increase the volumetric throughput of the pump and the powerrequirement of the pump. The total volumetric flow rate calculated fromthe simulator information is multiplied by the value provided in this fieldto estimate the design flow rate for the equipment.

For example:

o Operation flow rate: 250 GPM

o Pump overdesign factor: 1.1




o Calculated design capacity: 250 X 1.1 = 275 GPM

Compressors

In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructionsunder Common, page XX416H87XX), you can enter the following design criteria for

compressors:

• Driver Type

Specifies the driver type used for compressors. The default value is “None.” The selections are NONE, GAS ENGINE, MOTOR, TURBINE.

Heat Exchangers

In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructionsunder Common, page XX417H87XX), you can enter the following design criteria for heatexchangers:

• Launch MUSE

MUSE™ performs detailed simulation of multi-stream plate-fin heatexchangers made from brazed aluminum, stainless steel or titanium.

A valid MUSE version 3.3 license is required to use this feature.

Select “Yes” to launch MUSE during interactive sizing of plate fin heatexchangers. Select “No” to run MUSE in the silent mode.

• Furnace Fractional Efficiency

The furnace duty obtained from the simulator is the absorbed duty. Totalfired duty is obtained by dividing the absorbed duty by fractionalefficiency. This value should be <1.0.

• Fuel Heating Value

The Lower Heating Value (LHV) used to estimate the fuel consumption byfired furnaces.

• Air Cooler Inlet Temperature

This field represents the default value that shall be used as the inlet airtemperature in the case of Air Coolers.

• Air Cooler Exit Temperature

Air Cooler Exit Temperature is used when estimating the surface area ofair cooled heat exchangers. The value given in this field is used as the exittemperature for the air cooler.

If the field is empty or has value of 0.0, then the Sizing Expert assigns the

exit air temperature value to be 10.0 DEG F greater than the inlet airtemperature.

For example, if the Air Cooler Inlet Temperature is 77.0 DEG F and you donot enter the Air Cooler Exit Temperature, Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer uses 87.0 DEG F as the default value.

• Apply 2/3 Rule for Design Pressure

In the design of shell and tube heat exchangers, design engineerssometimes apply the 2/3P

rdP rule in calculating the design pressure. As per




ASME heat exchanger code, if the design pressure of the lower-pressureside (either tube or shell) is at least 2/3rd the design pressure on thehigh-pressure side, then overpressure in the high-pressure side will notresult in rupture in the lower-pressure side (provided relief devices havebeen properly sized).

When specified, the 2/3 rule will increase the design pressure of the lowpressure side to at least 67% of the design pressure of the high pressureside, even when the operating pressure on the low pressure side couldresult in a lower design pressure as per the Design Pressure field.

• Heat Exchanger Area Minimum Overdesign Factor

The calculated heat transfer area is multiplied by the value given in thefield.

The mechanical design is performed for the final heat transfer area.

For example:

o Calculated surface area = 1000 SF

o Heat Exchanger Area Minimum Overdesign Factor = 1.1

o Surface area used for mechanical design: 1000 X 1.1 = 1100SF

Note: The final surface area in general is greater than the calculatedvalue because of mechanical considerations.

Towers

In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructionsunder Common, page XX418H87XX), you can enter the following design criteria on theTowers form (applies to all towers):

• Bottom Sump Height (For Trayed and Packed Towers)

For both trayed and packed towers, extra height in addition to thatrequired for separation is provided at the bottom for liquid level andreboiler return.

The value in this field is added to the calculated height of the tower.

• R/R-Minimum (For SHORTCUT model in Pro/II)

The SimSci simulator shortcut distillation model calculates the number oftheoretical stages required for different ratios of operating reflux ratio (R)to minimum reflux ratio (R-Minimum).

The number of stages should be available in the simulator report for theratio chosen.

• Vapor Disengagement Height (For Trayed and Packed Towers)

For both trayed and packed towers, extra height in addition to thatrequired for separation is provided at the top for vapor disengagementbefore passing to the condenser.

The value in this field is added to the calculated height of the tower.




Packed Towers

In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructionsunder Common, page XX419H87XX), you can enter the following design criteria forpacked towers:

• Packing Type

Two types of packings, random and structured, are used in packed towers.The type of packing affects the flood point pressure drop estimation andthe packing efficiency (HETP) value.

The value in this field is used by the Sizing Expert in the calculation of thetower diameter and height.

• Packing Factor for Packings

Packing factor is used in the Kister and Gill correlation to estimatepressure drop at the flood point. Once the pressure drop is known, theflood velocity is calculated using the latest versions of the generalizedpressure drop correlation (GPDC) charts for both the random andstructured packings.

• Packed Tower Derating Factor

With certain systems, traditional flooding equations consistently predicthigher flood points than those actually experienced. To allow for suchdiscrepancies, an empirical derating factor (< 1.0) is applied. The deratingfactor is multiplied by the predicted flood vapor load or liquid loadobtained from the traditional equation to obtain the actual or derated floodload for the given system.

The derating factors are often vaguely related to the foaming tendency ofthe system. The higher the foaming tendency, the lower the deratingfactor.

If you do not enter a value, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer uses 1.0 as the

derating factor.• Packed Tower Flooding Factor

Packed towers are usually designed for 70 to 80 percent of the flood pointvelocity. This allows a sufficient margin for uncertainties associated withthe flood point concept and prediction and to keep the design point awayfrom the region at which efficiency rapidly diminishes (just below the floodpoint).

The Sizing Expert uses the default value specified if the user-providedvalue is not available.

• HETP

The concept of HETP (height equivalent of a theoretical plate) enablescomparison of efficiency between packed and plate columns. Becausethere are only a few variables that significantly affect HETP and due to theunreliability of even the best mass transfer models, rules of thumb forHETP successfully compete with the mass transfer models.

For the packing types available in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer(given in the Icarus Reference), Aspen Process Economic Analyzerestimates the HETP value based on the packing shape, dimensions andtype of material. If a user-provided value is available, then the Sizing




Expert uses the value in the above field for calculating the height of thepacked tower.

• Packed Section Height

The value represents the height of each packed section and is used in thedesign of packed towers to estimate the number of packed sections.

• Surface Area Per Unit Volume Higher specific surface areas (surface area per unit volume) increasesvapor-liquid contact area and therefore, efficiency. For structuredpackings, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer determines this valueempirically and uses it in estimating HETP if you have not alreadyspecified an HETP value.

A default value of 75 SF/CF is used in the absence of a user-enteredvalue.

Trayed Towers

In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructions

under Common, page XX420H87XX), you can enter the following design criteria fortrayed towers:

• Trayed Tower Flooding Factor

Flooding is the condition where pressure drop across a tray is sufficient tocause the dynamic liquid head to be equivalent to the tray spacing plusthe weir height. At this point, the liquid backup in the downcomer is justat the point of overflowing the weir on the plate above. When thishappens, the column fills with a foamy liquid and becomes inoperable.

The flood factor is the fractional velocity approach to flooding, i.e., (ActualVapor Velocity)/(Vapor velocity at the point of flooding).

The Sizing Expert uses the default value specified if the user-providedvalue is not available.

• Foaming Tendency

Vapor disengagement is easy in non-foaming, low-pressure systems.However, vapor disengagement from downcomer liquid in foamingsystems is difficult as the liquid hangs on to the entrained vapor.Sufficient residence time must be provided in the downcomer to allowadequate disengagement of vapor from the descending liquid. Industrialpractice has created a guideline for the mum downcomer velocity of clearliquids based on their foaming tendency.

The following values for the downcomer liquid velocity are used based onthe choice for the above field.

Downcomer Liquid Velocity, (FPS)

Tray Spacing, INCHES

FoamingTendency

18 24 30

Low 0. 4 – 0. 5 0. 5 – 0. 6 0. 6 – 0. 7

Moderate 0. 3 – 0. 4 0. 4 – 0. 5 0. 5 - 0. 6




High 0. 2 – 0. 25 0. 2 – 0. 25 0. 2 - 0. 3

With certain systems, traditional flooding equations consistently predicthigher flood points than those actually experienced. To allow for suchdiscrepancies, an empirical derating factor (< 1.0) is applied. The deratingfactor is multiplied by the predicted flood vapor load or liquid load

obtained from the traditional equation to obtain the actual or derated floodload for the given system.

The trayed derating factors are often related to the foaming tendency ofthe system. The higher the foaming tendency, the lower the deratingfactor. If the user-specified value is not available, a derating factor isselected based on the value of foaming tendency.

The default value for foaming tendency is Moderate.

• Trayed Tower Derating Factor

With certain systems, traditional flooding equations consistently predicthigher flood points than those actually experienced. To allow for such adiscrepancy, an empirical derating factor (< 1.0) is applied. The derating

factor is multiplied by the predicted flood vapor load or liquid loadobtained from the traditional equation to obtain the actual or derated floodload for the given system.

The derating factors are often vaguely related to the foaming tendency ofthe system. The higher the foaming tendency, the lower the deratingfactor.

If the user-provided value is not available, or the value 0.0 is entered inthe field, then the derating factor is selected based on the foamingtendency of the liquids in the column.

• Relative Volatility of Key Components

The number of theoretical stages for a trayed tower is obtained from the

simulator report. The actual number of trays is calculated by using thetray efficiency value provided by the user in the design criteria file.

However, if the field is empty or has a 0.0 value, the tray efficiency forthe separation is estimated by using the correlation of relative volatility ofkey components with tray efficiency. The O’Connell correlation is used toestimate the overall tray efficiency.

• Tray Efficiency

Overall column efficiency is defined by:

E_oc = N_t/ N_a

where:

N_t = Number of theoretical stages required for the separation minusthe sum of theoretical stages provided by the reboiler, condenser, andintermediate heat exchangers.

N_a = Number of actual trays in the column.

Several empirical correlations are available in the literature. Also, rigoroustheoretical predictions based on gas and liquid film resistances areavailable to assist in predicting the tray efficiency.




If the user specification is not available for the field, then the value isestimated using empirical correlations from the literature.

Configurations Towers

Use this form to specify design criteria for tower configurations.

Vessels

In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructionsunder Common, page XX421H87XX), you can enter the following design criteria on theVessels form (applies to all process vessels):

• Residence Time

The amount of liquid holdup in the vessel is estimated by the liquidvolumetric flow through a vessel in a specified amount of time. The vessel

volume divided by volumetric flow rate is defined as the residence time for

the vessel.

For example:

o Liquid flow through the vessel: 100 CFM

o Residence time: 5 MIN

o Calculated liquid volume in the vessel: 100 CFM X 5 = 500 CF.

• Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio (For Vertical and

Horizontal Vessel Design)

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer defaults for this field are used if thefield is empty or has the value of “0.0.” The Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer defaults depend on the operating conditions for the vessel. Basedon the operating pressure of the vessel obtained from the simulatorreport, the following values are used:

Pressure (PSIA) Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio

0 – 250 3250 – 500 4

> 500 5

For example:

Vessel operation pressure: <250 PSIA

Diameter: 6 FEET

Calculated vessel height: 6 X 3 = 18 FEET

Residence time overrides Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio.

• Minimum Vessel Diameter

The Minimum Vessel Diameter field is used if the vessel diametercalculated by the sizing routines is less than this value.

• Vapor/Liquid Separator Sizing Method

When sizing vertical and horizontal vapor liquid separators, Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer computes the maximum allowable vapor velocity usingthe method selected in this field.

o Liquid Entrainment Method:




This is an empirical correlation developed by Watkins and is afunction of vapor and liquid densities, and the parameter Kv,which itself is a polynomial function of vapor and liquid flowsand densities.

o Particle size separation method:

This method estimates the disengagement velocity of the liquiddroplet in the continuous vapor phase. The design velocity isdetermined as a percentage of the disengagement velocity.

• Average Liquid Particle Diameter (For particle size separation

method)

This field specifies the default average liquid droplet diameter. This valueis used in the design of horizontal and vertical vessels by the particle sizeseparation method (which can be selected in the Vapor/LiquidSeparator Sizing Method field right above this field).

• Design Factor Multiplier for Disengagement Velocity (For particle

size separation method)

This field is used in the calculation of the maximum allowable design

velocity, which is a percentage of the disengagement velocity.

For example:

o Disengagement velocity : 10 FEET/SECOND

o Design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity: 0.5

o Maximum allowable design velocity: 10 X 0.5 = 5FEET/SECOND

• Separation Factor (For liquid entrainment method)

In the liquid entrainment method, the separation factor is used todetermine the maximum allowable vapor velocity. The separation factor iseither entered by the user in this field or computed by Aspen Process

Economic Analyzer using the relation described in the vessel sizing designprocedure.

Agitated Vessels

In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructionsunder Common, page XX422H87XX), you can enter the following design criteria foragitated vessels:

• Agitator Type

The various types of agitators that can be chosen for design are describedin the Icarus Reference. The type of agitator selected determines thedefault driver power and impeller speed. This is used to estimate the

agitation requirements in tanks.

Storage Vessels

In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructionsunder Common, page XX423H87XX), you can enter the following design criteria forstorage vessels:

• Number of Holding Days




Storage vessel sizing is determined by estimating the volume of liquidrequired for a certain period of operation. Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer uses this field to determine the liquid volume stored in thevessel.

For example:

o Inlet flow rate: 500 CF per day.o Number of holding days: 30 (specified by user).

o Liquid volume inside the storage vessel: 500 X 30 = 1,500 CF.

• Holding Hours in a Day

Storage vessel sizing is determined by estimating the volume of liquidrequired for a certain period of operation. Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer uses this field to determine the liquid volume required per day.

For example:

o Inlet flow rate: 500 CFH.

o Holding Hours in a Day: 24 (specified by user).

o Final volume per day : 500 X 24 = 12,000 CF/day.

• Storage Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio

Once the volume of the storage vessel is determined based on the process

fluid flow rate and design conditions, the actual dimensions (height and

diameter) of the equipment must be estimated. You can specify thedimensional requirements of the equipment using this field.

A default is used if the field is empty or has value 0.0. The default depends onthe operating conditions for the vessel.

• Vapor Free Space (% of Total Storage Vessel Volume)

A percent volume of the sized vessel in excess of the required liquid

volume.

Horizontal Vessels

In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructionsunder Common, page XX424H87XX), you can enter the following design criteria forhorizontal vessels:

• Vapor Area /Cross-Sectional Area

Once Aspen Process Economic Analyzer calculates the maximum vaporvelocity, the velocity and flow rate are used to determine the vapor spacerequired. The vapor space is then divided by the vapor area /cross-sectional area to get the total required cross-sectional area.

The process vessel height to diameter ratio overrides this field.

• Separation Factor Multiplier

For horizontal vessels, the separation factor is normally higher undersimilar operating conditions than for vertical vessels. Therefore, thecalculated separation factor is multiplied by the separation factormultiplier.

• Minimum Boot Length




When horizontal vessels are used for three phase separations, the heavysecond liquid phase is removed in the drip leg situated at the bottom ofthe vessel.

• Minimum Boot Diameter

This field represents diameter of the boot leg which is designed to remove

the heavy second liquid.• Boot Leg Liquid Velocity

The bootleg cross-sectional area is estimated using the liquid velocity fieldspecified in this field and the process vessel height to diameter ratio.

Vertical Vessels

In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructionsunder Common, page XX425H87XX), you can enter the following design criteria forvertical vessels:

• Minimum Disengagement Height

This is the height from the liquid level to the mist eliminator.

• Minimum Height Above the Mist Eliminator

Used in the calculation of the total vessel height.

• Height of Mist Eliminator

Height of mist eliminator section.

• Minimum Ht. Btw Low and High Liquid Level Taps

The liquid level based on residence time should meet this minimumspecification. (Field is at bottom of form, not in Vertical Vessels section.)

• Ht. Btw Inlet Nozzle and High Liquid Level Tap

Represents the height between the inlet nozzle (center line) and the high

liquid level tap. (Field is at bottom of form, not in Vertical Vesselssection.)

• Ht. Btw Low Liquid Level Tap and Tangent Line

Represents the height between the low liquid level tap and the tangentline. (Field is at bottom of form, not in Vertical Vessels section.)

Miscellaneous• Vibrating Screen Feed Material

This field specifies the solid material type used by solids handlingequipment. The material type affects the screen unit capacity which is

defined as the amount of solids (TPH) flowing through one square foot ofscreen cloth based on material, having 6 to 8% moisture, screen clothhaving 50% or more open area; 85% screen efficiency.

Based on the choice made for this field and the screen opening size, thescreen unit capacity is estimated.

The following choices are available for this field:

o Sand and Gravel

o Limestone/Crushed Stones




o Coal

o Cinders

o Coke

o Wood

• Cyclone Inlet Linear Velocity

In case of cyclones, the sizing program assumes a default linear velocityof 150 FPS. You can enter a different velocity here.

Configurations Flash

Use this form to specify design criteria for flash configurations.

Utility Specifications

Most chemical processes require heating or cooling process utility fluids tooperate. In many cases, the choice of which utilities are used plays an

important role in determining the total project cost by defining heat transferequipment sizing. In addition, utility costs form an important part of theoperating costs of the plant.

In the design of heat exchangers and reboilers, Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer permits you to select appropriate process utility fluids for theapplication. You can select utility fluids from the list already present in AspenProcess Economic Analyzer or can create your own based on utility fluidclasses allowed by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. Once the utilityresource for the equipment is selected either by you or by the Sizing Expert,then an actual utility process stream is created for the equipment. The utilitystream contains the amount of utility used by the equipment. During theoperating cost evaluation, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer processes all the

utility streams connected to the equipment to determine the utility cost forevery utility resource used in the project.

You can override these selections by a combination of disabling/enablingappropriate utilities and re-mapping and re-sizing the equipment items.Alternately, you can specify the desired utility in the interactive Sizing Expert.This method is available even if the utility has been disabled.

To modify or create a utility stream:

1 Right-click on Utility Specifications in the Project Basis view’s ProcessDesign folder.





The Develop Utility Specifications dialog box appears.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides 11 default utility streamsresources:

Cooling Water

High Temp Heating Oil *

Low Temp Heating Oil **

Refrigerant – Ethane

Refrigerant - EthyleneRefrigerant - Freon 12

Refrigerant - Propane

Refrigerant - Propylene

Steam @165 PSI

Steam @100 PSI

Steam @400 PSI

* High temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM A.

** Low temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM E.

To modify an existing utility stream:

• Highlight it on the Modify Existing Stream list and click Modify.

To create a new utility stream:

1 Click Create in the Option section.

2 In the Create New Utility Stream section, type the name and select oneof the following fluid classes:




High Temp Heating Oil *

Low Temp Heating Oil **

Refrigerant – Ethane

Refrigerant – Ethylene

Refrigerant – Freon 12Refrigerant – Propane

Refrigerant – Propylene

Refrigerant 50 Utility

Steam

Water

* High temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM A.

** Low temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM E.

3 Click Create.

4 Enter or modify the specifications on the Utility Specifications form.

The form contains the following fields:

Description:

Describes the utility fluid resource in the sizing report generated by AspenProcess Economic Analyzer. Also, the field value is used to represent theutility fluid usage and its related cost on the Project Summary investmentanalysis spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS).

Fluid:

Determines the type of utility fluid described by the current specification. Thefluid class is used to determine the heat transfer coefficient, fouling tendencyand related thermal and transport properties used by Sizing Expert.

Design Temperature

Specifies the temperature, which will be considered in the estimation of thedesign temperature for the process equipment carrying the utility fluid.

Design Pressure:




Specifies the pressure, which will be considered in the estimation of thedesign pressure for the process equipment carrying the utility fluid.

Inlet temperature:

Provides the inlet temperature for the utility fluid.

Exit temperature:

Provides the exit temperature condition for the utility fluid.

Pressure:

Provides the operating pressure for the utility fluid.

Energy transfer per unit mass:

Specifies the amount of energy provided or removed by the utility fluid overthe specified temperature range. The value in this field is used to estimatethe amount of utility required for the given process conditions.

Unit Cost:

Provides the cost value used to estimate the utility cost for the project.

Unit Cost Units:

Provides the units for the value provided in the unit cost field.

When you specify a new utility fluid resource, all the information on thespecification form must be provided; otherwise, the Sizing Expert will not beable to use the utility fluid resource properly.

Using the utility specification form, you can specify a maximum of 20 utilityfluids.

If different utility fluid resource was used by simulation, then it is added tothe utility resource in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.

Utility type: Describes the usage of the utility fluid. Select either Heat source or Heat sink.

Click OK when done entering the utility specifications.

Investment Analysis

Investment Parameters

To specify parameters required for investment analysis:1 Right-click Investment Parameters in the Project Basis view’s

Investment Analysis folder.





Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Investment Parameters in theMain Window.

A description of the parameters follows.

General Investment Parameters

Period Description

This field allows you to enter text indicating the name/description of a period.The period is defined in “Number of Weeks per Period.” The period descriptionis used in the display of some of the results in the spreadsheets.




Number of Weeks per Period

The period used for investment analysis is defined in terms of number ofweeks.

Number of Periods for Analysis

The number of periods to include in the cashflow and other project totals andcalculations.

Tax Rate

The tax rate for investment analysis, in terms of percent per period, is usedto calculate the percentage of earnings before taxes that must be paid to thegovernment.

Desired Rate of Return

The desired rate of return, in percent per period, for the investment.

Economic Life of Project

This field indicates the length of time in terms of periods over which capitalcosts will be depreciated.

Salvage Value (Percent of Initial Capital Cost)

This number indicates the approximate worth of capital costs at the end ofthe Economic Life of Project. The number is expressed as a percent of initialcapital cost.

Depreciation Method

There are four depreciation methods allowed in Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer. The description of each follows:

Straight Line — The straight line method is used most commonly. In thismethod, the Salvage Value is subtracted from the Total Project Cost. Thisresult is then divided by the Economic Life of Project, so that the project isdepreciated evenly over its economic life.

Sum of the Digits — When this method is used, the Depreciation Expensedecreases during each period of the Economic Life of Project. Therefore, thehighest value for the depreciation occurs in the first period and decreasesevery period thereafter. The sum of the digits multiplier is n/((N(N+1))/2),where N is the Economic amount is the Total Project Cost less its SalvageValue. For the duration of the project’s economic life, this factor is multipliedby the depreciable amount.

Double Declining (Balance) — When this method is used, the project isdepreciated in geometric increments. The multiplier for the first period is 2/N,where N is the Economic Life of Project. For the second period thedepreciation rate, D2, is (1-D1)D1 where D1 is 2/N. For the third period, thedepreciation rate, D3, is (1-D1)D2. For the fourth period, the depreciationrate is (1-D1)D3. These factors are multiplied by the Total Project Cost. This




process (multiplying the factor by the capital cost) continues until the StraightLine Method produces a higher value for the depreciation. When the StraightLine Method produces a higher value, this higher value is used for theremaining depreciation calculations.

Accelerated Cost Recovery System (ACRS) — The ACRS approach assumesthat operations begin during the second half of the first period and stopduring the first half of the last period. Therefore, as a result of the two half-periods (one at the beginning and one at the end of the operating cycle), ittakes 6 periods to depreciate a project which has an Economic Life of 5periods. The ACRS adapts the Double Declining Balance Method to the half-life system. The depreciation rate for the first period, D1, is 2/N, where N isthe Economic Life of Project. However, the half-life convention reduces thisfactor to 1/N. For the second period the depreciation rate, D2, is D1(1-1/ N).For the third period the depreciation rate, D3, is D1(1-1/N-D2). This process(multiplying the factor by the Total Project Cost continues until the StraightLine Method produces a higher value for the depreciation. When the StraightLine Method produces a higher value, this higher value is used for theremaining depreciation calculations.

Escalation Parameters

Project Capital Escalation

This number indicates the rate at which project capital expenses may increaseexpressed in percent per period. If the addition of Engineer-Procure-Construct(EPC) period and start-up period is greater than one whole period, ProjectCapital Escalation is used to escalate the capital expenses for periods beyondthe first period.

Products Escalation

This is the rate at which the sales revenue from products of the facility is tobe escalated (increased) in terms of percent per period.

Raw Material Escalation

This is the rate at which the raw material costs of the facility are to beescalated (increased) in terms of percent per period.

Operating and Maintenance Labor Escalation

This is the rate at which the operating and maintenance costs of the facilityare to be escalated (increased) in terms of percent per period. The operating

labor costs include operators per shift and supervisory costs.

Utilities Escalation

User-entered percentages reflecting the anticipated utility price increase eachperiod.




Project Capital Parameter

Working Capital Percentage

The working capital expressed as a percentage of total capital expense perperiod indicates the amount required to operate the facility until the revenue

from product sales is sufficient to cover costs. It includes current assets suchas cash, accounts receivable and inventories. When the facility startsproducing revenue, this cost item can be covered by the product sales.

Operating Costs Parameters

Operating Supplies

This field indicates the cost of miscellaneous items that are required in orderto run the plant in terms of cost per period.

Laboratory Charges

This is a cost per period indicating the cost of having product analyzed eachperiod.

Operating Charges

This includes operating supplies and laboratory charges. It is specified as apercentage of the operating labor costs. (If you specify a value for either “Operating Supplies” or “Laboratory Charges”, the system will add the twoentered values and calculate the percentage of Operating Labor Costs. (This isdone for compatibility with earlier releases of the system.)

Plant Overhead

This field consists of charges during production for services, facilities, payrolloverhead, etc. This number is specified as a percent of operating labor andmaintenance costs. This number should not be used for the construction ofthe facility, only for operation after start-up.

G and A Expenses

This represents general and administrative costs incurred during productionsuch as administrative salaries/expenses, R&D, product distribution and salescosts. Specify this number as a percentage of subtotal operating costs.

Facility Operation Parameters

Facility Type

This field defines the facility type. The following types are currently available:

Chemical Processing Facility

Food Processing Facility

Oil Refining Facility




Petrochemical Processing Facility

Pharmaceutical Facility

Pulp and/or Paper Processing Facility

Specialty Chemical Processing Facility (A specialty chemical is defined as achemical which is produced in low quantity and has a usually high price perunit.)

The type of facility affects the number of operators/shift and maintenancecosts of facility equipment.

Operating Mode

This refers to the operating mode of the facility. The available options are:

Continuous Processing - 24 Hours/Day

Continuous Processing - Less than 24 Hours/Day

Batch Processing - 24 Hours/Day

Batch Processing - 1 Batch per Shift

Batch Processing - More than 1 Batch per Shift

Intermittent Processing - 24 Hours/Day

Intermittent Processing - Less than 24 Hours/Day

The operating mode of the facility affects the number of operators/shift andmaintenance costs of facility equipment.

Length of Start-up Period

After the facility has been constructed (i.e., gone through engineering,procurement and construction), the plant must go through the owner’s start-up period until it starts producing the product to be sold. This period isreferred to as Length of Start-up Period in weeks and is added into the EPCduration.

Operating Hours per Period

This field refers to the number of hours per period that the plant will beoperating.

Process Fluids

Process Fluids indicate the types of fluids involved in the process. The

selection affects operating and maintenance costs. The selections are:Liquids

Liquids and Gases

Liquids and Solids

Liquids, Gases, and Solids

Gases




Gases and Solids

Solids

Operating Unit Costs

To specify operating unit costs:

1 Right-click on Operating Unit Costs in the Project Basis view’sInvestment Analysis folder.


Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Operating Unit Costs in the

Main Window.

The Operating Unit Cost form specifies Labor Unit Costs and non-heat transferUtility Unit Costs.

Labor Unit Costs are given for Operators and Supervisors. The total cost ofoperating labor is calculated by:

Determining the total number of operators and supervisors necessary to runthe facility for a certain number of hours.

Adjusting that number for the number of hours the facility operates perperiod.

Multiplying that number by the respective Labor Unit Costs and adding themtogether.




Labor Unit Costs

Operator

The loaded wage rate paid for operating the facility in terms of the cost peroperator per hour. Operator labor includes labor that is associated with

operating the facility.

Supervisor

The loaded wage rate paid for supervision in terms of the cost per supervisorper hour. Supervision includes all labor associated with overseeing personnelwho operate the facility.

Utility Unit Costs

The non-heat transfer utility unit costs are also specified in this file as “overthe fence” costs. Utilities used for process heating and cooling are given inthe Utility Specifications File.

Electricity

The unit cost per KWH of electricity used for the facility.

Potable Water

The potable water unit cost per MMGAL or MB used for the plant.

Fuel

The fuel unit cost per MMBTH or MEGAWH used for the plant.

Instrument Air

The instrument air unit cost per KCF or MB.

Raw Material Specifications

An investment analysis conducted on any process needs to provide anaccurate figure for total project expenditure. Since operating costs are usuallya large part of this cost, it is important to accurately account for all rawmaterials consumed in the process.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer lets you identify simulator streams as raw

materials for the process.

The raw material costs will be directly placed in the PROJSUM.ICSspreadsheet for use in cash flow analyses.

To develop raw material specifications:

1 Right-click Raw Material Specifications in the Project Basis view’sInvestment Analysis folder.





The Develop Raw Material Specifications dialog box appears.

3 In the Option section, click the Create option button.

4 In the Create New Stream section, type a name for the stream.

5 Select the Basis and the Phase for the stream.

6 Click Create.

The Raw Material Specifications dialog box appears.

The following input information is required in order to estimate the rawmaterial costs during the evaluation of the operating costs for the project:Process Stream (or “none” if user-defined); Rate (do not specify a rate if aprocess stream is selected); and Cost Per Unit.




In addition to the above minimum information, you have to specify certainfield values for the raw material fluid program to estimate the raw materialrate necessary for the cost estimate.

If you specify “none” in the Process Stream field, then the value for the Ratefield must be specified in the appropriate units. If you specify a processstream, then the program determines the raw material rate in the desiredSpecification Basis and units.

You can specify a maximum of 150 raw material streams.

The Raw Material Specifications form contains the following fields:

Description

The value you provide in this field will be used to describe the raw material inthe Project Summary investment analyses spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS)

Specification Basis

This field describes the raw material properties from the following list:

Mass, Gas

Mass, Liquid

Mass, Solid

Volume, Gas

Volume, Liquid

Volume, Solid

Energy

Process Stream

This field provides a list of fluid streams present in the current project. Youcan select any stream to represent the raw material. Also, there is a provision

in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer for you to provide actual value for theraw material rate if none of the process streams represent the raw materialsfor the project. In this case, you must specify the field value as “none.”

Rate

This field gives the total rate of raw materials consumed for the process in thedesired rate units.

When a new raw material fluid is specified, Aspen Process Economic Analyzerchecks whether enough information has been specified to estimate the rawmaterial cost.

Rate Units

This field describes the flow rate units for the current raw material. Thechoices available for the field vary with the selection made for SpecificationBasis and your choice of Base UOM:

Specification Basis I-P METRIC

Mass, Gas LB/H

KLB/H

MLB/H

TPH

KG/H

MEGAG/H

TON/H




Mass, Liquid LB/H

KLB/H

MLB/H

TPH

KG/H

MEGAG/H

TON/H

Mass, Solid LB/H

KLB/HMLB/H

TPH

KG/H

MEGAG/HTON/H

Volume, Gas GPH

MMGAL/H

CFH

KCFH

M3/H

L/S

Volume, Liquid GPH

MMGAL/H

CFH

KCFH

M3/H

L/S

Volume, Solid GPHMMGAL/H

CFH

KCFH

M3/HL/S

Energy BTU/H

MMBTU/H

MEGAW

CAL/H

W

KW

Unit Cost

This field provides the cost value per unit mass, volume or energy used to

estimate the raw material cost for the project.7 When you are done entering raw material specifications, click OK.

The new stream appears in the Existing Stream list on the Develop RawMaterials Specifications dialog box. You can enter a maximum of 150 rawmaterial streams using this dialog box. When done, click Close.

Product Specifications

An investment analysis conducted on any process needs to include anaccurate figure for the project’s total revenue. In order to do so, it is veryimportant to accurately account for all the products obtained from theprocess.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer allows you to identify simulation streams asproduct materials for the process. Once the simulation stream is defined,Aspen Process Economic Analyzer determines the necessary amount ofproduct materials generated based on the information provided in the productmaterial specification file.

The product material costs are directly placed in the PROJSUM.ICSspreadsheet, where they are used for further cashflow analyses.




To develop product specifications:

1 Right-click Product Specifications in the Project Basis view’s InvestmentAnalysis folder.


The Develop Product Specifications dialog box appears.

3 Select the Create check box in the Options section.

4 Enter a new stream name, select a basis and phase.

5 Click Create.

The Product Specifications form appears.




The following input information is needed for Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer to estimate the product material costs during the evaluation of theoperating costs for the project:

Description

The value specified in this field is used to describe the product material fluid

in the investment analyses spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS).Specification Basis

This field describes the product material properties from the following list:

Mass, Gas

Mass, Liquid

Mass, Solid

Volume, Gas

Volume, Liquid

Volume, Solid

Energy Process Stream

This field provides a list of streams present in the current project. You canselect any of the streams to represent the product material. Also, there is aprovision in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer for providing an actual valuefor the product material rate if none of the process streams represent theproduct materials for the project. In this case, you must specify the fieldvalue as “none.”

Rate

This field defines the total rate of product materials obtained for the processin the desired rate units. Do not enter a value if you have specified a process

stream.

When a new product material is specified, Aspen Process Economic Analyzerchecks whether the minimum information necessary to estimate the productmaterial cost has been specified.

The following minimum information must be present before Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer can proceed with the estimate.

Rate Units

This field describes the flow rate units for the current product material. Thechoices available for the field vary with the selection made for SpecificationBasis and your choice of Base UOM:


Mass, Gas LB/H

KLB/H

MLB/H

TPH

KG/H

MEGAG/H

TON/H





Mass, Liquid LB/H

KLB/H

MLB/H

TPH

KG/H

MEGAG/H

TON/H

Mass, Solid LB/H

KLB/H

MLB/H

TPH

KG/H

MEGAG/H

TON/H

Volume, Gas GPH

MMGAL/H

CFH

KCFH

M3/H

L/S

Volume, Liquid GPH

MMGAL/H

CFHKCFH

M3/H

L/S

Volume, Solid GPH

MMGAL/H

CFH

KCFH

M3/H

L/S

Energy BTU/H

MMBTU/H

MEGAW

CAL/H

W

KW

Unit Cost

The field provides the cost value used to estimate the product material costfor the project.

6 When you are done entering product specifications, click OK.

The new stream appears in the Existing Stream list on the Develop ProductSpecifications dialog box. You can enter a maximum of 150 product materialstreams using this dialog box. When done, click Close.

Developing Streams

After opening a project, new streams can be developed. You have the optionto develop completely new streams or use an existing stream as a base.When an existing stream is used as a base, the new stream can be eithercopied from the existing stream (Absolute Basis mode) or copied from andlinked dynamically to the existing stream (Relative Basis mode).

To develop streams:

1 Right-click Streams in the Project Basis view’s main folder (at thebottom).




2 On the menu that appears, click Edit..

The Develop Streams dialog box appears.

Viewing or Modifying an Existing Stream3 To view or modify an existing stream, select the stream on the Modify

tab view. You may need to use the scrollbar(s) to locate a stream if alarge number of streams exist in the project. With the desired streamhighlighted, click Modify to have the stream information displayed in aspecifications form.




The functions of the six buttons on the Develop Stream specifications formare explained below:

Click To do this:

OK Perform a check on the information currently present in the DevelopStream specifications form to ensure that all information needed tospecify the stream is completed. Aspen Process Economic Analyzergenerates error messages indicating missing data.

Generate estimates for any specifications not entered.

Save the information in the Develop Stream specifications form. TheDevelop Stream specifications form closes and the Develop Streamsdialog box re-appears.

Apply Same as clicking OK, but does not exit the Develop Stream specificationsform. This allows you to review the estimates and revise the data.

Update Same as clicking Apply, except that if the Primary Fluid Component, theTemperature, and/or the Pressure were changed, then all the physicalproperties of the stream will be estimated using these new values.

Cancel Exit the Develop Stream specifications form without making checks anddoes not save or change any information in the database.

Reset Reset the information in the Develop Stream specifications form to thevalues previously saved into the database. Any changes have been madesince opening the form will be lost.

Mixture Define a stream as a mixture. Opens the Mixture Information dialog boxdiscussed below.

Most Develop Stream specifications need no further explanation. Those thatdo are described below.

Primary Fluid Component

One of the most important specifications in this form is Primary FluidComponent, which is classifies the chemical components of a stream. The




fluid selected here is used as the basis for any properties that are unavailableand need to be estimated to complete the specifications for the stream. Theavailable general fluid classifications are:

Alcohol Medium Hydrocarbon Liquid

Aromatic Liquid Miscellaneous Inorganic Liquid

Halogenated Gas Miscellaneous Organic Gas

Heavy Hydrocarbon Liquid Organic Acid

Hydrocarbon Gas Very Heavy Hydrocarbon Liquid

Inorganic Gas Solid

Light Hydrocarbon Liquid

The following pure components are also available for selection as the PrimaryFluid Component of a stream:

Acetic Acid Glycerol Phosphoric Acid

Ammonia Hydrogen Propane

Argon Isopropyl Alcohol Propanol

Carbon Monoxide Methane Propylene

Carbon Dioxide Methanol Steam

Ethane N-Butanol Sulfuric Acid

Ethanol Nitric Acid Toluene

Ethyl Benzene Nitrogen Water

Ethylene Oxygen

If the Primary Fluid Component is specified, the other needed information willbe filled in with default values. This feature is only apparent when notemperature or pressure is entered into the Develop Stream specifications

form and the Primary Fluid Component is changed. After changing thePrimary Fluid Component, either press Enter or click on another field and thedefault values will be loaded. If either the pressure or temperature value ischanged from the default value, clicking OK, Apply, or Update will estimatethe properties at the new condition(s).

Base Stream

The Base Stream field contains the name of the stream on which thedisplayed stream was based. This cannot be changed.

If the name begins with the character “$”, the stream was created usingAbsolute Basis and the stream name following this character is that of theparent stream. A stream created using Absolute Basis uses the data from the

parent stream; however, if the parent steam’s data changes afterward, theAbsolute Basis stream is not updated.

If the value begins with the character “@”, the stream was created using theRelative Basis and the stream name following this character is that of theparent stream. A stream created using Relative Basis is updated when itsparent stream’s data changes.




Description

Select information from the menu to describe the particular stream. Forexample, you can indicate the source component of the stream (for example,From Pump P-103) or tag it with one of the available utility stream names.

Mass Flow

The Mass Flow fields are used to determine the phase of the stream. Forinstance, if the stream has only Liquid Mass Flow specified, the stream istotally liquid; therefore, it will have no vapor properties estimated for it. Thereverse is true for a case with only a Vapor Mass Flow specified. For caseswith both types of flow, all properties will be estimated and the Primary FluidComponent will belong to the phase of the largest mass flow.

Note: Aspen Process Economic Analyzer automatically calculates Total MassFlow from the individual mass flow values.

Density

The Density fields are required information. Thus, if a particular phase has a

mass flow rate specified, then the corresponding density must also bespecified. Clicking Update will estimate any required density fields based onthe flow rate, except in the case of Solid Mass Density. It is recommendedthat you enter a Liquid Mass Density if one is available.

Mixture Specs Dialog Box

Clicking Mixture on the Develop Stream specifications form accesses theMixture Specs dialog box.

After you click Apply, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer normalizes theFraction values to total a sum of one.

The values shown above would change into the values shown on the nextpage.




The mixture information specified in this dialog box is used to estimateproperties as a mixture of the specified composition. If no mixture informationis present, the stream is assumed to be pure Primary Fluid Component. Thefraction information can be entered on either a Mass or Mole Fraction Basis,as specified in the Fraction Basis section.

The Cancel and Reset buttons behave in a similar manner as their respectivebuttons on the Develop Stream specifications form.

The OK and Apply buttons also behave in a similar manner as theirrespective buttons on the Develop Stream specifications form, except thechecking is different. Here, a check is made to ensure that the fractions havea total sum of one. If not, the values are normalized to give a total sum ofone, as indicated below.

The check also combines duplicate entries into one entry by combining the

two fraction specifications.

After the check is done, the components are sorted in order of decreasingfractional amount, as shown above. When you click OK, Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer loads into the specifications form the name of the fluidwith the highest fraction and the properties of the mixture generated from thecontributions of the individual components.

Estimation of Utility Usage and ResultingCosts in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer

Utility usage estimation is based on the stream information. All the streams

that are present in the project are taken into consideration for the estimationof the utility usage for the project. This includes all utility streams, user-defined streams, simulator streams, and pre-map Streams. The Descriptionfield on the Develop Stream spreadsheet can be used to designate streams asutilities. If the Description field for a stream exactly matches (exact textcharacters and spaces) the Description field for any utility resource as givenon the Utility Specifications spreadsheet, then that stream is included in theutility usage calculation. If you change the description field of any of the




simulator or pre-map streams, then the new description you provided is usedfor this calculation.

Also, stream connectivity information is used to identify the nature of thestream. If the stream is being generated then it is considered to be revenuefor the project, and if it is being consumed it is considered an expense. (Note:Streams that are connected at both ends to process equipments are ignoredin estimating the utility usage costs. Also, utility streams that have a zero unitcost do not show up in the final report.)

User-defined streams that are not connected to any equipment (do not showup in the PFD) are considered as input streams, i.e., consumption.

System-generated utility streams are included in the utility usage calculationas long as they are connected to equipment. A case where they would bedisconnected would be if you manually disconnect these streams or if theequipment to which these streams are connected is deleted.

Notes to Analyzer Utility Model (AUM) Users:

Cooling Water utility resources that need to be accounted in the Analyzer

Utility Model ( AUM) should be named as either Cooling Water or CoolingWater x x where x x can be two digits ranging from 01 to 99, for example, Cooling Water 01.

User-created utility resources that do not adhere to this format (for example,CW, Sea Water, Cooling Water o3) will not be identified as cooling waterstreams and will be excluded from AUM's cooling water analysis.

Cooling water streams that are not associated with any equipment, will beassigned to the Area with the maximum cooling water flow rate. For areasassigned to two or more circuits, the collected unassigned cooling water flowrate will be assigned to the first area in the circuit handling the largest circuitflow rate.

Cooling water can either be bought or be made. If it is to be made, the dewpoint of ambient air added to the lower model limit for the approach gradientwill determine the lowest possible deliverable temperature. To ensure thatyour specified cooling water utility resource streams can be made, review thelimits for the two cooling water models (CTWCOOLING andCTWPACKAGED).

Stream Connectivity

Process streams are “connected” to project components in a real way. Youcan see this in the Process Flow Diagram (PFD) that you can display afterloading and mapping simulator blocks. Each stream has a Source end and a

Sink end. The Source end connects to an Outlet port on a component and theSink end to an Inlet as depicted below:




In the PFD view, when you Edit Connectivity (see page XX426H175XX) for the Sink end of a stream and move the mouse over a component, only Inlet port(s)turn green, thereby indicating their availability for making a connection to aSink end.

The same concept also carries into the Interactive Sizing form (see pageXX427H

219XX

). Only streams whose Sink ends are not connected are listed in thepulldown for any Inlet. This explains why the Inlet and Outlet pulldowns willinclude different streams.

Since the connectivity in the PFD and the Interactive Sizing form are twoways of looking at the same information, Aspen Process Economic Analyzertracks your changes and synchronizes them in both views. Thus, if youchange the connectivity in one view, Aspen Process Economic Analyzerautomatically changes it in the other view.

When you first map and size components, the streams in the simulator will beconnected to the project components and the underlying process conditions ofthose streams are available for further use. For example, you may create newstreams based on the properties of any stream, connected or not, then use

these new streams as Sources/Sinks for connecting new components (youmight do this to set up spares). You may also add a New Mapping to an itemalready mapped and the newly mapped and sized item utilizes the underlyingstream properties.

Creating A New Stream

Streams can be created from scratch or by using a base stream.

To create a stream from scratch:

1 Go to the Create tab view on the Develop Streams dialog box. Without

selecting a stream from the Base Streams list, click Create. (The Basisselection will not matter.)

The Create Stream dialog box appears.




2 Enter a name for the new stream in the Create Stream dialog box. Thisname must not be the same as any existing streams in the project.

3 Click OK.

The Develop Stream specifications form appears.

Note: See page XX428H116XX and XX429H116XX for descriptions of the buttons and fields on thisform.

Enter values for the new stream. See page XX430H116XX for descriptions of thedifferent fields.

4 When done, click OK.

To create a stream based on an existing stream:1 On the Create tab view on the Develop Streams dialog box, click the

stream to be used as the base.




Select the Basis mode. If the Basis mode is Relative, the data from the twostreams will be linked so that when the base stream is changed the newstream will inherit these changes. If the Basis mode is Absolute, the datafrom the base stream is copied to the new stream at the time the new streamis created. Changes in a base stream will not affect a new stream created viaAbsolute basis.

2 Click Create.


3 Enter a name for the new stream in the Create Stream window. This namemust not be the same as any existing streams in the project. Click OK.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the specifications form for thenewly created stream. The data is that of the Base Stream. Data appearsgray (dimmed) to indicate that it is relative to a referenced Base Stream.




Note: See pages XX431H116XX and XX432H116XX for descriptions of the buttons and fields onthis form.

Even in a Relative Stream, you may override any value with a manual entry.If you do so, the text turns black, indicating that that value is absolute andtherefore no longer references a Base Stream.

4 Make modifications to the data and click OK.

Deleting a StreamNote: Only user-added streams and streams added by the Sizing Expert asutilities can be deleted.

To delete a stream:

1 At the Delete tab view, select the stream to be deleted. You may need touse the scrollbars to locate a stream if a large number of streams exist inthe currently opened project.




2 Click Delete.

A dialog box will appear asking for confirmation of the delete action.

3 Click OK to delete the stream.– or –

Click Cancel to retain the stream.

Specification LibrariesThe default specifications are derived from files that you can access, whenoutside of a project, from the Palette’s Libraries view.

It includes specification files for the following:

• Basis for Capital Costs




• Cost Libraries (see Chapter 7, “Developing and Using Cost Libraries”)

• Design Criteria

• Investment Parameters

• Operating Unit Costs

• Product Specifications

• Project Component Map Specifications• Raw Material Specifications

• Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs

• Utility Specifications

When you create a project scenario, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer selectsthe specification file to use based upon the selected units of measure basis.However, you can right-click on any of the above Project Basis specificationcategories in Project Explorer, click Select on the pop-up menu, and select adifferent file from which to derive the default specifications.

Customizing Specification LibrariesWhen no project is open, you can create your own specification files or editexisting files. Then, when in a project, you can select your specification files.For example, if you frequently created project scenarios that used the samedesign basis, you could create a Basis for Capital Costs specification file withthose design basis specifications. Then you could just select this file, insteadof entering the specifications every time.

If, after making modifications to your libraries, you wish to revert to theoriginal libraries, you can copy or import the copy of the installed librariesprovided in the following folder:

…\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V7.0\Program\Sys\Libraries

Creating a File

To create a specification file:

1 With no project open, go to the Libraries tab view in the Palette andexpand the desired specification category.

2 Except for Investment Parameters and Project Component MapSpecifications, right-click on the units of measure basis folder –Inch-Pound or Metric. For Investment Parameters, right-click on theInvestment Parameters folder. For Project Component Map Specifications,right-click on the simulator type folder.

3 On the pop-up menu, click New.The New [Specification Category] dialog box appears.




4 Enter a file name and, if desired, a file description.

5 Click OK.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer creates the file and displays thespecifications in a separate window.

6 Edit the specifications just as in a project.

7 When you are done, close the specifications window. If a library file isopen, you cannot access another library file or open a project.

See page XX433H129XX for instructions on selecting the newly created specification fileto use in a project.

Modifying a File

To modify an existing specification file:

1 Right-click on it in the Palette (Libraries view).

2 On the menu that appears, click Modify.

Importing a File

You can import specification files from elsewhere on your computer ornetwork.

To import a file:

1 In the Palette (Libraries view), expand the library to which you wish toimport a file.

2 Except for Investment Parameters and Project Component MapSpecifications, right-click on the units of measure basis folder –Inch-Pound or Metric. For Investment Parameters, right-click on the

Investment Parameters folder. For Project Component Map Specifications,right-click on the simulator type folder.

3 On the pop-up menu, click Import.

4 In the Select a File for Import dialog box, locate the file and then clickOpen.




The file is copied to the appropriate sub-folder.

Duplicating a File

To duplicate a file:

1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click on the file you wish to duplicate,and then click Duplicate on the pop-up menu.

2 Enter a file name and description (optional) for the new file.

3 Click OK.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer creates the file and displays thespecifications in a separate window.

4 Edit the specifications just as in a project.

5 When you are done, close the specifications window. If a library file isopen, you cannot access another library file or open a project.

Deleting a File

To delete a specification file:

• In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click on the file to be deleted, andthen click Delete on the pop-up menu.




Note: You cannot delete files named Default, only modify them.

Selecting to Use a Different SpecificationFile

After creating a new specification file, you still need to select it in ProjectExplorer for Analyzer to use its specifications.

To select a specification file:

1 In Project Explorer (Project Basis view), right-click on the specificationcategory for which you wish to select a new file. On the pop-up menu,click Select.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a dialog box listing the filesavailable for the selected category.

2 Select a new file from which to derive default specifications and click OK.

Changing File Directory Location

If you decide to store specification library files in a directory other than thedefault, move the default files to the new location and recreate the same sub-folder arrangement. Otherwise, Icarus will generate an error when you pointto the new location.



4 Loading and Mapping Simulation Data 131

4 Loading and MappingSimulation Data

OverviewIf the process you wish to evaluate in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer isbased on a simulator file report from a process simulator software program,the first step, after creating a project scenario and defining the Design Basis,is to load and map simulation data.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer supports reports from the followingsimulators:

• AspenTech’s AspenPlus Version 12.1 or higher

• Chemstations’ ChemCAD for Windows Version 5.3.2

• HYSIM Version STD/C.271

• HYSYS Version 2.4.1

• SimSci’s PRO/II with PROVISION Version 5.61

• Pacific Simulation’s WINGEMS 2.0

• WinSim’s DESIGN II for Windows Version 8.17

Preparing Simulation ReportsFor Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to load the simulation data, anappropriate ASCII output report needs to be generated from the simulator.Most simulators describe the various steps needed to generate ASCII reports.

This section provides additional procedures to generate reports in anAnalyzer-compatible format.

The procedures provided here start with the default report generation options.If changes have been made from the default report generation options, thenit may be necessary to change them back to the default settings for creatingan output report for Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.




AspenPlus Report Generation

AspenPlus provides a template containing the property sets that a projectneeds in order to generate an output report for Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer.

Note: If you use the template, the following component specification, ifentered in AspenPlus, must be re-entered in Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer:

Block - CCD

STAGE EFFICIENCY

To use the template:

1 Open the project in AspenPlus.

2 On the File menu, click Import.

3 Navigate to:

x: \ Progr amFi l es\ AspenTech\ Economi c Eval uat i on V7. 0\ Dat a\ Load\

Note: This is the default path; it may differ depending on where you installedAspen Icarus.

4 Depending on the simulation units of measure, select the appropriatesimulator directory (for example, AspenPlus) and then the correspondingtemplate (.apt) file.

To create the required property steps in Aspen Plus

without using a template:

1 On the Data menu, click Properties. This will open the data browser tothe property specifications.

2 In the data browser tree structure, open the folder Prop-Sets located inthe Properties folder.

3 Click New to create a new property set.

4 Type a name for the property set or use the default name.

5 Click OK.

6 In the Substream field, select All.

7 Scroll down the list of available properties, clicking those you wish toselect. To start the scroll window, click in a physical properties cell:

o MASSVFRA

o MASSSFRA

o MASSFLMX

o VOLFLMX

o MASSFLOW

o TEMP

o PRES

o MWMX




The specifications for this property set are complete as indicated by the checkmark displayed on the tree view of the data browser.

8 Click the Prop-Sets folder. You will see the property set you just createdin the object manager and the status should be Input Complete.

9 Create the second property set by once again clicking New.

10 Type a name for the property set or use the default name.11 Click OK.

12 Click the Qualifiers tab.

13 In the Phase cell, click Total.

14 Click the Properties tab.

15 In the Substream field, click ALL.

16 Now click the Units cell corresponding to the CPMX property and pickeither of the following units:

o KJ/KG-K

-or-

o BTU/LB-R

The specifications for this property set are complete.

17 Click the Prop-Sets folder. The newly created property set will appear inthe object manager with an input complete status.

18 Create the final property set needed by Aspen Process Economic Analyzerby clicking New.

19 Type a name for the property set, or use the default name.

20 Click OK.

21 Click the Qualifiers tab.

22 In the Phase cell, click Vapor.

23 Click the Properties tab.

24 Select the following properties for this property set:

o VOLFLMX

o MASSFLMX

o KMX

o MUMX

o CPMX

o MWMX

25 Now click the Units cell corresponding to the CPMX property and pickeither of the following units:

o KJ/KG-K

-or-

o BTU/LB-R

The creation of property sets is complete.

Now these property sets must be specified for use in the generation of areport.




To specify these property sets for use in reportgeneration:

1 If the Setup folder is not already expanded, expand it by clicking on theplus sign next to the folder symbol.

2 Click Report Options.

3 Click the Stream tab.4 Click the Property Sets button.

5 Move the three property sets you just created to the Selected propertysets box.

6 Click the > button to move them to the Selected property sets box.

7 Click Close.

The specifications required for loading an AspenPlus report file are nowcomplete. You can close the data browser window.

After running the simulation, you must create an output report.

To create an output report:1 On the File menu, click Export.

2 In the Save As dialog box, use the drop-down menu to select Report

Files ( *.rep) or XML files (*.xml).

3 Type a file name or accept the default value.

4 Click Save. This will create the ASCII report file needed to load into AspenProcess Economic Analyzer with the name given above.

Note: The order on any of the tower models must be set to TOP-DOWN inorder for the tray information to get loaded into Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer correctly. This is the default setting.

Aspen Plus Utilities

If a unit operation block has a utility specified, the utility resourcespecifications and usage data will be transferred into Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer. After loading the simulator data, a preference screen will appear.Specify any missing data for the Aspen Plus utilities in order for the AspenPlus utility to be properly handled. The Aspen Plus utilities will appear as newutility resources. The appropriate project components will use the specifiedutility resource, based on the Aspen Plus utility used in the simulation.

A message box will appear if utility resources are modified or deleted from theAspen Plus simulation prior to a reload of data into Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer. You can choose to delete the old imported Aspen Plus utility

resources in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, or just add/update existingimported utilities in Aspen Plus.




AspenPlus – Aspen Process Economic

Analyzer Simulator link

A link from AspenPlus to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer allows you to loadchanges into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer when simulation settings are

changed in AspenPlus.

To load process simulator data through the Aspen Icaruslink into a new Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project

scenario:

1 Run the simulation in AspenPlus.

2 On the File menu, click Send To and click Aspen Icarus.

When the prompt appears, the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer projectname will be designated to be the name of the simulation file from AspenPlus.AspenPlus will designate the scenario name. If the scenario name is changed,any future attempts to run the link for the same project will result in a new

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project being created. It is recommendedthat the scenario name designated by AspenPlus be left as it is for maximumusability.

3 Click OK.


4 Specify the Project Description, Remarks, and the Units of Measure.

5 Click OK.

The Input Units of Measure Specifications dialog box appears.

6 Verify the Input Units of Measure Specifications; then click OK.

The General Project Data dialog box appears.

7 Verify the General Project Data; then click OK.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a prompt to load the SimulatorData.

8 Click OK.

If the simulation has specified units that are undefined, a prompt will appearto do so. Define all AspenPlus units with those available in Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer.

To load process simulator data through the Aspen Icaruslink into an existing project scenario:

1 Run the simulation in AspenPlus

2 On the File menu, click Send To and click Aspen Icarus.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a prompt to load simulator data.

3 Click OK.

Because all other project basis settings have been specified, mapping andsizing can be performed at this time.




ChemCAD Report Generation

These instructions apply to both ChemCAD for Windows, Version 5.3.2, andfor previous versions of ChemCAD. The specifications are the same for allversions.

1 On the main menu, on the Output menu, click Report.

Note: In ChemCAD for Windows, just click the Output menu from the menubar.

2 Specify the following for report options:

• Select Streams

• Print All Streams: Y

Note: Check box in ChemCAD for Windows

• Select Unit Operations

• Print All Unit Operations: Y

Note: Check box in ChemCAD for Windows.• Stream Properties

3 Select or deselect the following stream properties as indicated below:

Property Select De-Select

OVERALL PROPERTIES

Mass flow rate X

Mole flow rate X

Temperature X

Pressure X

Mole Vap frac X

Enthalpy X

Molecular wt. X

Total act.dens X

VAPOR PROPERTIES

Mass flow rate X

Mole flow rate X

Molecular wt. X

Vap. Act. Dens X

Vap. Viscosity X

Vap. Cp X

Vap. Thrm. Cond XLiq. Surf. Tens. X

LIQUID PROPERTIES

Mole flow rate X

Molecular wt. X

Liq. act. Dens X

Liq. Viscosity X

Liq. Cp X




Property Select De-Select

Liq. Thrm. Cond. X

SOLID PROPERTIES*

Mass flow rate X

Molecular wt. XDensity X

PSD X

DISTILLATION OPTIONS

Tray profile X

Tray properties X

Tray sizing X

Packed column sizing X

TRAY COMPOSITIONS

Mass flow rate X

* Solid properties are located on Page 2 of Stream Properties in ChemCAD forWindows.

The component mass flow rates for individual streams must be included in theoutput report.

4 Navigate to the Stream Flowrate/Composition menu under theReports/Output menu.

5 Pick Mass Flowrate.

If you want Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to use tray sizing informationfrom the simulator, then you must include the appropriate sizing information.

6 To do this, go to Distillation Summaries under the Reports/Output menu; then select the appropriate sizing section (packed or trayed).

7 After the completion of all these specifications, generate the output reportby selecting Calculate and Give Results. This should generate an outputreport. You can rename it if you wish. This is the file to be used as inputfor Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.

HYSIM Report Generation1 Copy the following . spc files from the \Program\Load\Hysim directory

to your HYSIM working directory before generating output inside thesimulator.

• MIXER.SPC

• TEE.SPC• HTXRATE.SPC

• BALANCE.SPC

• CALC.SPC

• MASSBAL.SPC

• MOLEBAL.SPC

For all other operations, use the default .spc files provided by Hyprotech.




2 For HYSIM version 386|C2.12 or earlier, copy the stream format fileSTRSUM.FMT located in the /Aspen Process Economic

Analyzer/Docs directory of your HYSIM working directory. If you haveHYSIM version STD:C2.63 and above, copy the stream format fileSTRSUM2.FMT located in the /Aspen Process Economic

Analyzer/Docs directory to your HYSIM working directory and rename it

STRSUM.FMT. You must either delete or rename the existingSTRSUM.FMT file to perform this.

The output report generated from HYSIM should contain o p e r a t i o n o u t p u t (defined as spec_sheet in HYSIM) and the complete s t r ea m s u mm a r y . Bothof these outputs must be saved under the same file name. The information isappended to the file and does not get overwritten.

To generate the o p e r a t io n o u t p u t and s t r e am s u m m a r y

(Required):

1 Load the desired project inside HYSIM ( *.sim).

o operation output

o stream summary

2 On the main menu, click Print.

3 On the print option, click File; then press Enter.

4 Select the s a m e file ( f i l e _ n a m e ) as above; then press Enter.

5 Click the Print option; then press Enter.

6 Select the Stream option; then press Enter.

7 Inside the Stream option, select Summary; then press Enter.

8 The list of streams present in the current project is displayed. Click the <-> option for all the streams to be written in f i le _ n a m e .

The procedure creates the required report (f i l e _ n a m e ), which can be loaded

into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and used for project evaluation.If sizing operations are performed inside the simulator and you want theinformation to be carried over to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, thefollowing steps must be performed in addition to the above procedure:

1 Load the desired project inside HYSIM ( *.sim).

sizing summary

2 On the main menu, click Size.

3 Inside the size option, choose the unit operation desired; then pressEnter.

4 Select the particular equipment (for example, col-101) ; then press Enter.

5 Select a u t o _ s e c t i o n or u s e r _ s e c t i o n ; then press Enter.

6 After the sizing calculations are performed, select Print.

7 Select File; then press Enter.

8 Select the same file name ( file_name) ; then press Enter.

9 Click Summary; then press Enter.

Important:

• The operation names and stream names can not contain the followingcharacters:




+, -, *, or spaces

• The ASCII report has to be created in the default units specified by HYSIMfor the ENGLISH and the SI modes of operation. You can run a simulationin any simulator-provided units. However, prior to creating the report file,you must convert the units to the default specifications provided byHYSIM.

• During the sizing procedure for the column operation, if user_section ischosen, care should be taken to check that the stage numbers are notrepeated in the different sections of the same column operation. Thefollowing two examples demonstrate the correct and incorrectspecifications.

Correct Incorrect

user_section_1 : (start stage) 1 user_section_1 : (start stage) 1

(end stage) 10 (end stage) 10

user_section_2: (start stage) 11 user_section_2 : (start stage) 3

(end stage) 15 (end stage) 15

• The user_section name should not contain the following characters:

+, -, *

• The report format should be such that the width of the report should beless than or equal to 4 streams wide. This can be accomplished from theformat option provided in HYSIM.

• Stream summary should follow the operation output in the report, thatis, the order should be maintained.

HYSYS Report Generation

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s External Simulation Import Tool importsHYSYS simulator data into Icarus database files, which you can then load intoAspen Process Economic Analyzer.

To import HYSYS simulation data for loading into AspenProcess Economic Analyzer:

1 On the Tools menu, click External Simulation Import Tool.

The Simulator Link dialog box appears.

2 Click the Browse button for the Simulator File field.




3 Select the process simulator project you created; then click Open.

4 Click the Browse button for the Export File field. The Export File willcontain the exported simulation results data from the selected HYSYSproject. Do not include any file extensions for this file. The import tool willautomatically assign a d01 extension to this file.

5 Select the location and enter the file name you want to be used to contain

the exported data. You can also select an existing file.6 Click Save.

7 On the Tools menu, click Connect. HYSYS will automatically start withthe selected project.

The following figure shows the file Cheplant.hsc in the HYSYS interface.




8 Click Export on the Simulator Link dialog box to start the process ofexporting the simulation data from the selected HYSYS project into theExport File.

Once finished, you will see five files with the name you gave to the ExportFile. These files contain the exported data.

Note: These files should always go together, in case you want to copy themto another location.

D:\test\cheplantn.d01 Icarus database file

D:\test\cheplantn.d02



9 On the Simulator Link dialog box, click Disconnect. The tool will closeHYSYS. If you want to keep HYSYS running and make changes to yoursimulation, you can use the Export Again button to export the data againinto the Export File.

10 Exit the import tool.

11 Start Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and create a new project.

12 Select Hyprotech’s HYSYS as the Simulator Type.

13 When selecting the simulator report file, select the Export File (the filewith the extension .d01) created using the import tool

14 To load, map, and size this project, continue as described in this guide.

SimSci’s PRO/II with PROVISION ReportGeneration

Two methods can be used for generating reports from PRO/II withPROVISION.

• You can change the input keyword file (*.inp) to include the requiredprint options using keywords for those using PRO/II directly

-or-

• You can change the print options from within the PROVISION userinterface.

For either method, the operation names and stream names should not containthe following characters:

• +

• *

Note: When specifying sidestrippers, each sidestripper must be identified bya unique four-character name. Currently, sidestrippers are not alwaysidentified by their full user-given names in PRO/II with PROVISION reportfiles. Sometimes, they are identified by only the first four characters of theuser-given names. Therefore, to properly load sidestripper information intoAspen Process Economic Analyzer, sidestripper Unit identifiers (UID’s) mustbe used, which are only four characters long.




To prepare the SimSci report in PROVISION:

1 On the Input menu, select Problem Description. Make sure that theProblem Identifier field is not blank; something must be entered.

2 On the Output menu, select Report Format.

3 On the Report Format menu, select Miscellaneous Data.

4 Set the Report Width field to 80 Columns (the PROVISION defaultvalue).

5 On the Report Format menu, select Stream Properties.

6 Select Molar Flowrate and Weight Fraction.

7 On the Report Format menu select Unit Operations.

8 For each column unit operation:

A On the Unit Operations list, select Column.

B Click the Print Options button while unit is highlighted.

C Select Molar Basis from the Column Summary list.

D From their respective column print options window, select:

o Molecular Weights

o Actual Densities

o Actual Volumetric Flowrates

o Transport Properties

o Flowing Enthalpies

o Standard Liquid Densities

E Click OK.

F Repeat for each remaining COLUMN unit operation in list.

Note: See the note in the KEYWORD section regarding COLUMN sidestripper’sUID’s.

9 Click Close to finish.

10 Use the default options for remaining unit operations.

Using Keywords

For General Print Options, use the following keywords:

Print INPUT = ALL

STREAM = ALL

RATE = M

WIDTH = 80

For COLUMN operations, use the following keyword:

Print PROPTABLES = PART or ALL




Loading Simulation DataThe following loading procedure translates the specified process simulatorreport file into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.

To load process simulator data:1 In Project Explorer, Project Basis view, right-click Simulator Type in

the Process Design folder; then click Edit.

The Select Simulator Type dialog box appears.

2 Click one type from the list; then click OK.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a message saying what the newsimulator type is.

3 Click OK.4 In the Process Design folder, right-click Simulator File Name; then

click Edit.




The Open dialog box appears, showing all simulator files in the Report folder. You can browse other drives and folders as well.

5 Select a file; then click Open.

Note: The List view now displays the pathname of the selected simulator filewhen you select Simulator File Name in Project Explorer.


• On the toolbar, click .

-or-

• On the Run menu, click Load Data.

A confirmation window appears.

7 Click Yes.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer loads the simulator data.

When the loading of the data is finished, the Process view of Project Exploreris populated with simulator areas and simulator blocks.




Viewing Data Derived from Simulator

To access simulator-derived data (read-only):

1 Right-click a block, and on the menu that appears, click Modify.

2 Click Cancel to close.




Working with Block FlowDiagramsAspen Process Economic Analyzer automatically generates a Block Flow

Diagram (BFD) from a loaded simulator report. Providing a graphicalrepresentation of the process, the BFD displays computational blocks andtheir connections.

The blocks in the diagram correspond to tree items displayed in the ProjectExplorer’s Process view. Color-coding of the blocks in both the Process viewand the BFD agree; mapped items are displayed green and unmapped itemsare displayed yellow.

Displaying the Block Flow Diagram

To display the Block Flow Diagram:

• On the View menu, click Block Flow Diagram.




The BFD appears in the Main Window.

Note: You can move a block by clicking on the center of the block anddragging it to the desired location. This will also move the streams connectedto the block. If the simulator data is reloaded, the block and stream locationswill be regenerated by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.

In addition to the blocks displayed in the Process view, the BFD displaysstreams, direction of stream flows, inlets, and outlets.

The commands on the View menu change when the BFD is active.

The Drag & Find Feature

There is a quick and easy way to find a block on the BFD.

Drag the block from the Project Explorer’s Process view and drop it anywherein the BFD. The part of the BFD displayed changes so that the block you wantto find appears in the upper-left corner of the Main Window.




Drag a block from Project Explorer (Process view) to the BFD

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer finds the block on the diagram

Accessing Commands in the Block FlowDiagram

Right-clicking on blocks in the BFD accesses the same commands availablewhen you right-click a block in Project Explorer’s Process view.

Block commands

Clicking View accesses simulator-derived data (read-only), as shown on pageXX434H145XX.

The Map command and Delete Mappings command are explained in thenext section, Mapping Simulator Items to Icarus Project Components, startingon page 147. Alteration of mapping will alter the blocks' color based on itsstatus.

Stream commands

You can double-click a stream to access the Develop Stream specificationsform. This form is explained on page XX435H116XX.

ZoomingYou can use the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons to increase or decrease themagnification by degrees:

You can also select an exact magnification by using the Zoom dialog box.




To use the Zoom dialog box:

1 On the View menu, click Zoom.

The Zoom dialog box appears.

2 Click the desired magnification, or click Custom and type a percentagebetween 10 and 1,000.

3 Click OK to change magnification and close the dialog box.

-or-

Click Cancel to close the dialog box without changing magnification.

The Zoom dialog box also has two options that affect printing:

Fit into one page

Mark this box to have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer re-size the BFD to fitonto one page when printed. This automatically selects the next option,What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get, since the screen image will reflect the sizerequired to fit on one printed page.

What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get (WYSIWYG)

When WYSIWYG is cleared, zooming in or out will only affect themagnification factor on the screen, while the printer always prints at 100%.However, if WYSIWYG is selected, the magnification factor on the printer willbe changed so that the printed image will have the same size as the imageappearing on the screen.




BlockFlow Diagram View Menu

The View menu contains some options that are only displayed when the Block FlowDiagram is active

Use this to

Toolbar View or hide the toolbar. See pageXX436H

36XX

fordescriptions of toolbar buttons.

Status Bar View or hide the status bar. See pageXX437H

26XX

for description of the status bar.

Project Explorer View or hide Project Explorer. See page

XX438H

26XX

for description of Project Explorer.

Palette View or hide the Palette. See pageXX439H

32XX

fordescription of the Palette

Properties Window View or hide the Properties Window. Seepage XX440H32 XX for a description of the PropertiesWindow.

Workbook Mode Turn Workbook Mode on and off. Seepage XX441H28 XX for an explanation of WorkbookMode.

Capital Costs View Launch Aspen Icarus Reporter forinteractive reports (on-screen, HTML, orExcel) or Icarus Editor for evaluation




reports (.ccp). The Project Evaluationneeds to have already been run. See pageXX442H405XX and page XX443H430XX for details.

Investment Analysis View Display Investment Analysisspreadsheets. See Reviewing Investment Analysis on page

XX444H

439XX

for instructions.

Block Flow Diagram Display Block Flow Diagram of the loadedsimulator data.

Process Flow Diagram Display Process Flow Diagram. Thiscommand is not active until you havemapped the simulator items.

Streams List Display a read-only list of all simulator-derived stream properties in aspreadsheet. You can customize some ofthe features of the spreadsheet (whichstream properties to display, whether todisplay names of the properties, and thedisplay style of the property values) byediting the stream list template file:

...\Economic EvaluationV7.0\Data\ICS\strlist.fil

Grid Visible View or hide grid lines.

Snap to Grid Move blocks in increments correspondingto the grid lines when dragging to newlocation.

Show Page Bounds View or hide page separation lines. Whendisplayed, you can see where page breakswill be when printing.

Ports Visible View or hide ports in the Process FlowDiagram. Does not apply to Block FlowDiagram.

Zoom Access Zoom dialog box. See pageXX445H

148XX

.

Mapping Simulator Items toIcarus Project ComponentsMapping is the process of converting each simulator block (that is, model orunit operation) into one or more Icarus project components.

To map simulator items:

1 If you want to map all items, access the Map dialog box by doing one ofthe following:


-or-

• On the Run menu, click Map Items.




2 If you want to map a single block or all blocks in an area, do one of thefollowing:

• In Process view, right-click a block or area; then click Map on themenu that appears.

-or-

• In the Block Flow Diagram, right-click a block then click Map on themenu that appears.

The Map dialog box appears.

Note: If you clicked the Map button on the toolbar or clicked Map Items onthe Run menu, only the Map All Items check box is available in the Source

section.If you clicked Map on a pop-up menu, both Map Selected Item(s) – thedefault choice – and Map All Items are available.

Select the desired mapping options.

Option Description

Source




Option Description

Map Selected Item(s) Map the selected simulator block or the simulator blocks inthe selected simulator area. This option is available only ifyou selected Map from a pop-up menu.

Map All Items Map all simulator items in the project.

Basis

Last Mapping Map a block according to the last time it was mapped. Thisoption retains only the type of Icarus project component(s)to which the block was last mapped.

Default Use the Component Map Specs file for the basis.

Default and SimulatorData

Use the Component Map Specs file for the basis, butoverride the mapping using specific data in the simulator.For example, if you select this option and a reboiler type isspecified in the simulator report, an equivalent reboilertype will be used in the mapping.

Further, if the Preferences | Process | Use AutomaticMapping Selection when Available was selected, thenadditional engineering rules of thumb will be used for aselected category of equipments (for example, pumps,compressors, and heat exchangers) to come up themapping recommendations. (Note: Currently this mode isactive only when blocks are mapped one at a time.)

Users are encouraged to review these recommendationsand either accept them or select a different equipment typebased on their knowledge of their processes and practices.

Options

Size Icarus ProjectComponent(s)

Size the mapped Icarus project component(s).

If you are mapping a single item to a single componentthat can be sized using the interactive Sizing Expert, theInteractive Sizing form will appear after mapping.

Otherwise, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer uses itsautomatic sizing.

Although the Sizing Expert is unavailable when sizingmultiple components, you can still use it later (assumingthe component is one of those that can be sizedinteractively). Just right-click on the mapped componentand click Re-Size on the pop-up menu.

Note: See Chapter 6 for instructions on using theSizing Expert.

3 Click OK.




The Project Component Map Preview dialog box appears.

Note: All simulator items are displayed because Map all Items was selectedat the previous dialog box. Those components being mapped have asterisksnext to them.

If you selected Map Selected Item(s) on the Map dialog box, theSimulator Items list displays just the selected simulator block(s). If youselected Map all Items, the Simulator Items list displays all simulatorblocks.

The Current Map List displays any components that are already mapped tothe simulator block highlighted on the Simulation List.

The Configuration option box is active only for blocks representing columnmodels. (In the sample project, Block B7 represents a column model.)

You must use the arrow scroll buttons to see all ten possible configurations.Selecting a configuration type automatically fills in the Current Map List withthe components required for that configuration type. See Tower

Configurations for more information.

4 Click New Mapping to map a block highlighted on the Simulator Items list to an Icarus project component.

If the simulator block represents a column model that does not yet have allits required mappings, the Select a Suffix dialog box appears, listing thetypes of components (indicated by suffixes that appear at the end of ItemDescriptions on the List view) that still need to be mapped to the block.




Note: See Tower Configurations for more information.

Suffix To indicate

bottoms split bottoms splitter

bot exchanger bottoms exchanger

bottoms pump bottoms pump

Cond condenser for the tower

cond acc condenser accumulator

ovhd exchanger Overhead exchanger

Overhead split Overhead splitter

ovhd pump Overhead pump

precooler first heat exchanger in “split” configuration”

Reb reboiler for the towerreflux pump reflux pump

Tower main tower

Trim second heat exchanger in “split” configuration”

Other user-selectable.

spray cond Spray condenser

spray cond exit pump Pump for recirculating the spray condenser exit

sc tot recycle splitter Splitter in Spray Condenser Configuration that generatesthe total recycle stream

sc cooler Heat exchanger in the Spray Condenser Configuration thatcools the entire total recycle stream

sc tot recycle trim splitter Trim splitter in Spray Condenser Configuration 2sc trim Heat exchanger in the Spray Condenser Configuration that

cools the entire total recycle stream

5 Select a suffix; then click OK.




The Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box appears.

6 Select a component.

The Project Component Map Preview dialog box now displays thecomponent category's item symbol (for example, AG) and the componenttype (for example, DIRECT) in the Current Map List. More componentdetails are displayed in the Icarus Project Component Description section.




By default, the Component Name field contains the block name. You maywant to modify it to be more descriptive and to distinguish the componentfrom others to which the block has also been mapped. This can be as simpleas adding a descriptor at the end.

Each component mapped from the block must have a unique name; if anothercomponent already has the default component name, Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer prompts you to enter a unique name after you selectanother component.

7 Click OK to complete the mapping.

If you selected to size the mapped component(s), Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer also performs automatic sizing or, in cases in which a single item isbeing mapped to a single component for which interactive sizing is available,the Interactive Sizing form appears. See Chapter 6, Sizing Project

Components, page 446H213, for information on this feature.

With the block now mapped, the List view displays the components mappedfrom the simulator block.

Component StatusYou may notice a "?" in the Status column of a project component mappedfrom the simulator block. This indicates that there are still specifications thatneed to be entered for the component.

To enter the specifications:

1 Right-click the component.

2 On the menu that appears, click Modify Item.




Entering specifications in the required fields will change the status to OK.Required fields are indicated by color-coding explained on page XX447H186XX, underEntering Component Specifications.

If you do not enter the specifications and the "?" remains in the Statuscolumn, the item will not be included in the project evaluation and will have"0" cost associated with it. It will not cause SCAN messages.

Deleting Mappings

To delete mappings:

• Right-click in the simulator area or simulator block in Process view; then,on the menu that appears, click Delete.

Tower ConfigurationsBecause a column can be mapped to multiple pieces of equipment, AspenProcess Economic Analyzer requires that you select a tower configuration onthe Project Component Map Preview dialog box.

You can select from among ten possible configurations:

• Standard – Single

• Standard – Total

• Standard – Total w/Circ.

• Standard – Split

• Standard – Split Total

• Standard – Split Total w/Circ.




• Full – Single

• Full – Single w.Circ.

• Full – Split

• Full – Split w/Circ.

This term means

Single Tower has one condenser.

Split Tower has multiple condensers.

Total the reflux pump handles the total outlet liquid flow fromthe accumulator. In such configurations, the splitting intoa reflux and overhead liquid product occurs after thereflux pump.

Circ. there is a pump between the bottoms splitter and thereboiler giving a forced circulation configuration aroundthe reboiler.

Note: Full configurations include the following equipment not found inStandard configurations:

• overhead pump

• overhead product heat exchanger

• bottoms product pump

• bottoms product heat exchanger

Based on the tower configuration selected, Aspen Process Economic Analyzerautomatically creates a model for each tower block and then maps the modelto an Icarus project component. In addition, you can specify how thecondenser requirements should be split between the Precooler and the Trim cooler on the Design Criteria specifications form.

If subcooling is present, the precooler will completely condense the overheadvapor and the trim cooler will perform the subcooling; the split specificationon the Design Criteria specifications form will be ignored when subcoolingis present.

The following figures display the ten possible configurations. The default itemdescription suffixes (see page XX448H155XX) are used to identify the configurationparts, each of which is mapped to an Icarus project component.




F i g u r e 1 : S t a n d a r d – S i n g l e




F ig u r e 2 : S t a n d a r d T o t a l




F ig u r e 3 : S t a n d a r d T o t a l w / Ci r c




F ig u r e 4 : S t a n d a r d S p l i t




F i g u r e 5 : S t a n d a r d S p l i t T o t a l

F ig u r e 6 : St a n d a r d S p l it T o t a l w / Ci r c .




F i g u r e 7 : Fu l l – S i n g l e

F i g u r e 8 : F u l l – S i n g l e w / Ci r c .




F i g u r e 9 : Fu l l – Sp l i t

F ig u r e 1 0 : Fu l l – S p l i t w / Ci r c .




F ig u r e 1 1 : S p r a y Co n d e n s e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n 1 w / Ci r c .

Note: Flow rate of the Spray Cond Total Recycle (SCTR) stream is calculatedusing Ratio of Recycle to (Ovhdliqprod + Reflux) Flowrates = mSCTR / (mOVHLIQ PROD+ mREFLUX). Ratio of Recycle to (Ovhdliqprod + Reflux) Flowratesis an input specified in the Design Criteria.

mSCTR = mass flow rate of the SCTR stream.

mOVH LIQ PROD = mass flow rate of the Overhead Liquid Product stream.

mREFLUX = mass flow rate of the Reflux stream.




F ig u r e 1 2 : S p r a y Co n d e n s e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n 2 w / Ci r c .

The duty for the SC COOLER and SC TRIM exchangers are calculated using

Ratio of SC Trim Duty to Overall Duty = QBSCTRIM B / QBCONDENSER

QBCONDENSERB = QBSCTRIM B + QBSCCOOLERB

where:

Ra t i o o f SC Tr i m D u t y t o O v e r a l l D u t y is an input specified in the DesignCriteria

QBSCTRIMB

= Spray Condenser Cooler Duty

QBSCCOOLERB = Spray Condenser Trim Duty

QBCONDENSERB

= Total Overhead Condenser Duty, obtained fromSimulator Data

Then the temperatures of the streams exiting the Spray Condenser Coolerand Spray Condenser Trim exchangers are calculated using:

a Q = mCpDeltaT calculation.

Flow rate of the streams exiting the SC To t Rec y c l e T r im Splitter aredetermined using:

SC Trim Splitter Flow Split Ratio = mBSCRTSEx1 B / mBSCCEx B




mBSCCEx = B (mBSCRTSEx1 B + mBSCRTSEx2 B )

SC Trim Splitter Flow Split Ratio is an input specified in the Design Criteria

mBSCCE B = mass flow rate of the SC Cooler Exit Stream

mBSCRTSEx1 B = mass flow rate of the SC Rcy Trim Splitter Ex1 Stream

(this is the one that subsequently goes through the SC TRIM exchanger)

mBSCRTSEx2 B = mass flow rate of the SC Rcy Trim Splitter Ex2 Stream

Sizing SelectionThis section outlines the workflow of the sizing selection feature available inAspen Icarus Process Evaluator. Sizing selection is a mechanism that lets you

pre-define and/or define sizing rules for project components. Specifically, youcan set rules on equipment models or specific project components to be sizedwith one or more custom models.

Project Sizing SelectionTypically, you load data from a simulation and then choose to map thesimulator unit operations. In the mapping screen that appears, there is acheck box to Review Sizing Selection. If selected (the default is based onthe Tools | Options | Preferences | Process | Sizing selection on theitem-size menu), the sizing selection appears.

You select any custom model for sizing the project components listed.

• If an item is selected, the sizing preview screen appears during a size orre-size performed on one or more project component(s).

• If an item is not selected, the mapping preview screen does not appear forediting during these steps, but the sizing selection specifications is appliedto the selected project component(s).




F ig u r e 1 3 : M a p p i n g w i t h o p t i o n t o r e v i e w s i zi n g s e le c t i o n

If selected, you will see the Sizing Selection preview after the mappingpreview screen for a chance to edit how the project components are sized(see Figure 14).

F ig u r e 1 4 : S i z i n g S e le c t i o n p r e v i e w f o r s p e c i f i e d p r o j e c t c om p o n e n t s

You can specify the sizing routines (System Sizing and custom models) foreach project component (created by mapping from a simulator or manualcreation) that will be applied during the size-all step.

If a custom model is specified in the current sizing list for a projectcomponent, the project component will be sized in the order shown in theCurrent Sizing List (see Figure 14). Any custom models listed will be sizedusing the custom model tool automatically without any user-interaction




required. After sizing is complete, the system returns to a ready-state foryou to perform additional project tasks.

For Global Sizing Selection information, see page XX449H219XX.

Specifying AdditionalComponentsIcarus project components can be added to areas mapped from a simulatorreport. However, these project components must initially be added in a user-added area. You can later rearrange the components in Project Explorer’sProject view, drag components from a user-added area to an area mappedfrom the simulator report.

Follow the instructions for adding a project component on page XX450H182XX.

If the component you add is process equipment, Aspen Process Economic

Analyzer adds an icon representing the new equipment item in the upper left-hand corner of the Process Flow Diagram (PFD). The next section, Working

with Process Flow Diagrams, includes instructions (see Editing Connectivity onpage XX451H175452H175) for connecting an added component to a stream in PFD view.

Working with Process FlowDiagramsProcess Flow Diagrams (PFD) provide graphical representations of Icarusprocess equipment mapped from simulator blocks and the interconnecting

streams. You can edit the layout and connectivity of the mapped items fromPFD view. You can also add streams. Aspen Process Economic Analyzerprovides intelligent port selection, so that when drawing a stream you see thecandidate ports highlighted in green as the mouse is moved over them.

To access PFD view:

1 On the View menu, click Process Flow Diagram.




2 Use the Drag-and-Find feature to locate any equipment item on the PFD.

3 Drag an equipment item from Project Explorer ( Project view) and drop iton the PFD.

The icon in the PFD that corresponds to the selected equipment will bepositioned in the upper left-hand corner (regardless of magnification).

Editing the Layout

To change the position of an item:

• Use your mouse to drag the item to its new position.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer reroutes any streams connected to theitem.

To change the route of a stream:

• Click the stream; then drag the stream to straighten it or to create anelbow-bend.

Note: If you eventually select Reroute All Streams on the Run menu,Aspen Process Economic Analyzer chooses the most logical routes for allstreams.

Process Flow Diagram View Menu

Note: The View menu contains some options that are displayed only whenthe Block Flow Diagram is active.




Use this to

Toolbar View or hide the toolbar. Seepage XX453H36 XX for descriptions of toolbarbuttons.

Status Bar View or hide the status bar. Seepage

XX454H

26XX

for a description of thestatus bar.

Project Explorer View or hide Project Explorer. Seepage XX455H26 XX for a description ofProject Explorer.

Palette View or hide the Palette. Seepage XX456H32 XX for a description of the

Palette.Properties Window View or hide the Properties

window. See pageXX457H

32XX

for adescription of the Properties window.

Workbook Mode Turn Workbook Mode on andoff. See page

XX458H

28XX

for anexplanation of Workbook Mode.

Capital Costs View Launch Aspen Icarus Reporter for




interactive reports (on-screen,HTML, or Excel) or Icarus Editorfor evaluation reports (.ccp). TheProject Evaluation needs to havealready been run. See page

XX459H

405XX

and page XX460H430XX for details.

Investment Analysis View Display Investment Analysisspreadsheets. See ReviewingInvestment Analysis on page

XX461H

439XX

for instructions.

Block Flow Diagram Display Block Flow Diagram ofthe loaded simulator data.

Process Flow Diagram Display Process Flow Diagram. This command is not active untilyou have mapped the simulatoritems.

Streams List Display a read-only list of allsimulator-derived streamproperties in a spreadsheet. Youcan customize some of thefeatures of the spreadsheet(which stream properties todisplay, whether to display namesof the properties, and the displaystyle of the property values) byediting the stream list templatefile:

...\Economic EvaluationV7.0\Data\ICS\strlist.fil

Grid Settings Access Grid Properties dialogbox, where you can set the gridincrements and select to view orhide grid lines.

Snap to Grid Move blocks in incrementscorresponding to the grid lineswhen dragging to new location.

Show Page Bounds View or hide page separationlines. When displayed, you cansee where page breaks will bewhen printing.

Ports Visible View or hide ports.

Zoom Access Zoom tool. This is thesame as in the Block FlowDiagram (see page

XX462H

148XX

).

Add Stream Access the Develop Streams

dialog box. See Adding AStream, page XX463H177XX, for details.

Draw Disconnected Stream Access the Disconnected Streamsdialog box. See “Drawing aDisconnected Stream,” page

XX464H

179XX

,for details.

Edit Connectivity Activate the Edit Connectivityfeature. See “EditingConnectivity,” page XX465H175XX, for




details.

Setting Grid Properties

You can select to display grids of any increments. In addition, you can selectthe color of the grids and whether to be in Snap to Grid mode.

To set grid properties:

1 On the View menu, click Grid Settings.

The Grid Properties dialog box appears.

2 Set the Across and Down grid increments in the Increments section.Specify in the Units section whether the specified increments are ininches or centimeters.

3 Select the Snap to Grid check box to turn on Snap to Grid mode. Whenyou drag a block in this mode, the block’s bounding outline moves inincrements corresponding to the grid.

4 Click Color to select a grid color.

5 Finally, in the Visibility section, click whether to show or hide the grid.

6 Click OK to apply the settings.

Editing Connectivity

The Edit Connectivity feature lets you make changes to the layout of items inthe PFD. Because this involves connecting and disconnecting streams toports, the Ports Visible option should be on, as it is by default.

If the ports are not visible, click the Ports Visible button .

Connecting a Stream to Different Inlet PortTo connect a stream to a different inlet port:


• On the toolbar, click the Edit Connectivity button




-or-

• On the View menu, click Edit Connectivity.

2 Place the cursor over the end of the stream you want to connect to adifferent inlet port.

The cursor becomes an arrow.

3 Click the end of the stream.

The cursor now appears as a crosshairs.

4 Move the cursor to another inlet port.

When the cursor is in close proximity to a component, the component'savailable inlet ports display green.

5 Click the new inlet port.

Connecting an Added Project Component to a Stream

Project components that you add to the project appear in the upper left-handcorner of the PFD and are not connected to any streams.

To connect an added project component to a stream:


• On the toolbar, click the Edit Connectivity button

-or-

• On the View menu, click Edit Connectivity.

2 Place the cursor over the added project component that you wish to insertinto an existing stream.

The cursor becomes a hand.




3 Click the component.

A bounding outline, representing the component, appears around the cursor.

4 Move the cursor over a stream. Click when you have placed the cursorover the desired stream.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer disconnects the Sink end of the streamfrom the inlet port on the current component, then automatically re-connectsit to the inlet port on the inserted component.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer also creates a new stream, which appearswhite and has properties relative to the initial stream. Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer connects the Source end of this new stream to the outletport of the inserted item and the Sink and to the inlet port of the original.

The added item can now be sized manually or using the Size Item option,which either automatically sizes the item or, if interactive sizing is available,accesses the Sizing Expert. The Sizing Expert, explained in Chapter 6, willutilize the newly connected streams.

Adding a Stream

From PFD view, you can create a new stream and specify its connectivity. Theprocess of developing streams is explained in detail under Developing

Streams, page XX466H114XX.




To add a stream:


• On the toolbar, click the Add Stream button .

-or-

• On the View menu, click Add Stream.



• To create a stream from scratch, click Create and proceed to Step 3.

-or-• To create a stream based on an existing stream, in the Base Stream

section, click the existing stream; and then click a Basis:

o Absolute If the Basis Mode is Absolute, the data from the basestream is copied to the new stream at the time the new stream iscreated. If the data of the base stream is altered at any time afterthis point, the data of the new stream remains unchanged.

o Relative If the Basis Mode is Relative, the new stream’s data isdynamically linked to that of the stream on which it’s based. Thismeans that alterations to the data of the base stream immediatelyaffect the new stream.

3 Click Create.





4 Type a name in the Stream Name field; then click OK.

The Develop Streams specifications dialog box appears.

5 Make any desired modifications; then click OK.

6 Move the cursor, which appears as a square, to an outlet port.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides intelligent port selection,highlighting the candidate ports in green.

7 Click when you have placed the cursor over the desired outlet port.8 Move the cursor, which now appears as crosshairs, to an inlet port.

9 Click when you have placed the cursor over the desired inlet port.

Drawing a Disconnected Stream

To draw a disconnected stream:





• On the toolbar, click the Draw Disconnected Stream button .

-or-

• On the View menu, click Draw Disconnected Stream.

The Disconnected Streams dialog box appears.

2 Click a stream; then click OK.

3 Draw the stream as described in the previous instructions for Adding a

Stream.

Working with Streams

Right-clicking on a stream accesses a pop-up menu with the followingcommands.

Use this to

Modify Access the Develop Stream dialog box listing the stream’s

specifications, which you can modify.Disconnect Erase the stream from the screen and store it, so that you

can select it when using the Draw Disconnected Streamfeature (see page XX467H179 XX).

Reconnect Source Reconnect the stream to a new outlet port.

Reconnect Sink Reconnect the stream to a new inlet port.

Delete Delete the stream.



5 Defining Project Components 181

5 Defining ProjectComponents

When developing an Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project, you can addproject components in Project view to user-defined areas (areas not mapped

from the simulation report). Once added, you can drag them to differentareas. Components are categorized as follows:

Note: See ICARUS Reference Guide for information on individual components.

Category To define

Process Equipment Equipment for gas, liquids and solidshandling and off-site/packagedsystems.

Plant Bulks Material commodities that service asection of the plant or the whole plant.Plant bulks are divided into categories:

Piping, Civil, Steel, Instrumentation,Electrical, Insulation and Paint.

Site Development Modifications that must be done to thesite. Site development items aredivided into categories: Demolition,Drainage, Earthwork, Fencing,Landscaping, Roads-Slabs-Paving,Piling and Railroads.

Buildings Civil structures directly involved in theprocess or for off-site use.

Quoted Equipment A way to enter special equipment not

found in Process Equipment above.

Unit Cost Library Items from a Unit Cost Library. SeeChapter 7.

Equipment ModelLibrary

Items from an Equipment ModelLibrary. See Chapter 7.




Adding an Area

To add an area:

1 In Project Explorer’s Project view, right-click on the Main Project folder.

2 Click Add Area on the pop-up menu.

The Area Information dialog box appears.

3 Define the area, including name, type, and dimensions.

The Area Type determines how equipment will be installed in the area. SeeChapter 36 of Icarus Reference for information.

4 Click OK.

Project Explorer now displays the new area.

Adding a Project ComponentAspen Process Economic Analyzer provides two methods for adding a projectcomponent:




Drag-and-drop

Drag a component from the Palette to an area on Project Explorer’s Projectview and enter an item description. This adds the component to the areawithout displaying the Component Specifications form; the specifications areleft to be entered at your convenience.

Pop-up menu

Right-click on an area and click Add Project Component from the pop-upmenu, then select a component from the Project Component Selection dialogbox and enter an item description. This adds the component and also displaysthe Component Specifications form, where you can complete the componentdefinition right away.

Method 1: Dragging a Component from thePalette

To add a component using the drag-and-drop method:1 With the Palette (Components view) and Project Explorer (Project view)

displayed, drag a component from the components list to an area on theProject Explorer.

Note: The Recent Items folder in the Components view stores the last 10project component selections.

2 To drag, click the component and hold down the mouse button.

3 Move the cursor until over the area where you want to place thecomponent.

4 Release the mouse button.




The New Component Information dialog box appears.

5 Enter an item description (required) and User Tag Number (optional), thenclick OK.

The component is added. Project Explorer displays a block for the componentunder the selected area. The List view displays general information. You maynotice a question mark (?) in the Status column on the List view. Thisindicates that there are still specifications that need to be entered for the

component. To enter the specifications, follow the instructions under EnteringComponent Specifications on page XX468H186XX.

Method 2: Using the Pop-Up Menu

To add a component using the pop-up menu:

1 In Project Explorer, Project view, right-click on a non-simulator area andclick Add Project Component on the pop-up menu.




The Project Component Selection dialog box appears.

2 Enter the Project Component Name.

3 Highlight the category to which the desired equipment belongs (processequipment, plant bulks, site development, buildings, quoted equipment)and click OK.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a list of sub-categories.

4 Continue to narrow down the selection to a specific component. Clck OK.

5 The component is added to the area.

The Component Specifications form is automatically displayed. You caneither complete the definition of the equipment item now or later.




Entering ComponentSpecificationsAfter adding a component, you still need to enter at least some component

specifications to complete the component’s definition. Many componentspecifications have default values used when no value is entered, but mostcomponent specifications require further input. If a component added still hasany specifications requiring input, a question mark (?) appears in the statuscolumn of the List view for that component.

You do not have to enter specifications immediately upon adding acomponent; you may wish to wait until more information about a projectbecomes available.

As more information about a project becomes available, you may also wish tomodify previously entered component specifications. The followinginstructions apply as well to modifying previously entered specifications.

To enter or modify component specifications:

If the Component Specifications form is not already displayed in the MainWindow, display the form by right-clicking on the component and clickingModify Item on the pop-up menu. You can right-click on the component ineither Project Explorer (Project view) or List view (Area level)

Double-clicking on the component will also display the Specifications form.

Color coding

• Red Border: An entry must be made in the field. All specifications formshave at least one required entry field.

• Green Borders and Thick Gray Borders: An entry must be made in eitherthe field with the thick gray border or in the two fields with the greenborders. The field with the thick gray borders and the fields with the green




borders are mutually exclusive. In the form pictured to the right, eitherthe pump size must be selected or the fluid head and liquid flow rate mustbe entered. The Properties Window notes this in the Description.

Enter the specifications.

Note: While on either the component or installation bulks specifications form,you can quickly determine the net effect of all your changes by clicking the

Evaluate button and reviewing the resulting report. See page XX469HXXXX470HXXXX471H462XX formore information

Fields with red borders are required. If there’s a combination of two fieldswith green borders and one with a thick gray border, an entry must be madeeither in the two fields with the green borders or in the field with the thickgray border.

To define installation bulks for the component:

1 Click the Options drop-down and select the type of bulks to define.

See “Defining Installation Bulks” on pageXX472H

188XX

for a complete description ofinstallation bulks.

After defining the component and installation bulks, save the specificationsform by clicking OK.




Defining Installation BulksInstallation bulks are items directly associated with the component beingdefined and are used to complete the installation of the item, for example, afoundation for a vessel. The difference between an installation bulk and a

plant bulk is that an installation bulk is associated with a component, whereasa plant bulk services the whole plant or mill.

Installation bulks may be defined when entering or modifying equipment orplant bulk specifications. Most components are automatically outfitted withinstallation bulks, so this feature is typically used to adjust, modify, or deleteselected bulks. However, because quoted equipment is not automaticallyoutfitted with installation bulks, this feature also serves as the method fordefining all installation bulks required for quoted equipment.

To access installation bulk specifications:

1 Display the C omponent Specifications form.

2 Click the down-arrow on the Options button .

3 Click the type of installation bulks you want to view or define.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the specifications form for the

selected installation bulk items. See the subsections that follow fordescriptions of the different types of installation bulks.

4 When you are done defining the installation bulk, save your changes ineither of two ways, depending on what you intend to do next:

o If you want to continue modifying this component’s installationbulks or component specifications, click Apply to save thechanges. You can now select either Project Component oranother type of installation bulks from the Options menu.




o If you are done making changes to the installation bulks and tothe component specifications, click OK to save the changes andclose the specifications.

Note: You can select in Preferences to have Aspen Process Economic Analyzerreturn you to the main Component Specifications form after you click OK (see

pageXX473H

48XX

).

Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments

Using Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments, you can specify percent adjustments ofsystem-calculated values as follows:

Category Percent adjustment for

Equipment Material cost (COA 100-299)

Setting Man-hours (COA 100-299)

Piping Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 300-399)

Civil Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 400-499)Steel Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 500-599)

Instrumentation Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 600-699)

Electrical Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 700-799)

Insulation Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 800-899)

Paint Material costs and/or man-hours. (COA 900-999)

These adjustments compound material and man-hour indexing applied to thesame COA’s. User-entered material costs and man-hours (entered usingeither Quoted Equipment or Mat’l/Man-hours % Additions) are not affected bythese adjustments.

A special options section at the bottom of this form allows you to specify

non-default installations for the item, including demolition (i.e.,dismantlement) of the component and its installation bulks.

For example, to demolish a component item:

1 Click Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments on the Options menu of theComponent Specifications form.

2 Scroll down to the Special Options section and, on the Installation

Options list, click DEML.




Note: Clicking the demolition ( DEML) option causes the following changesto the component:

• Material costs are set to zero.

• Man-hours and labor costs are charged to demolition COAs (for example,

109, 309, 409, and so on)

• Piping and civil man-hours are down-adjusted:

o Shop fab man-hours are removed from piping man-hours.

o Civil formwork/bracing man-hours are removed.

3 Go back through the Mat’l/Man-hour Adjustments form and make theproper adjustments to account for the relative difficulty of demolitionversus new build.

For example, if you know unsetting the component is 15% easier than initiallysetting it, then enter 85% in the Setting labor adjustment field.

4 Save your changes in either of two ways, depending on what you intendto do next:

o If you want to continue modifying this component’s installationbulk or component specifications, click Apply to save thechanges to the Mat’l Man-hour Adjustments. You can now selecteither Project Component or another installation bulk from theOptions menu.

o If you are done making changes to the installation bulks and tothe component specifications, click OK to save the changes andclose the specifications window.




Note: You can select in Preferences to have Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer return you to the main Component Specifications form after youclick OK (see page XX474H48XX).

Mat’l/Man-hours Additions

Using Mat’l/Man-hours Additions, you can add lump sum material costs and/orman-hours to a specified COA. All additions are reported “as is.” Additions areneither indexed nor adjusted by Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments. Up to 20additions can be defined per component .

Pipe – General Specs

Use Pipe – General Specs to define the rules for developing all installationpiping on the selected component. You can use many fields to define generalpiping specifications, such as: Material

• Pressure

• Temperature• Installation - above or below grade

• Fluid or electric tracing

• Flange class and type

• Stress relief

• Insulation type

• Insulation jacket type

• Paint treatment

Pipe – Item Details

Use Pipe – Item Details to specify individual runs of piping and associatedfittings, tracing, paint and insulation. The line is developed using the rulesdefined in Pipe – General Specs unless they are re-defined with Pipe – ItemDetails. Up to 40 lines may be defined/adjusted for each component.

Note: To reduce the time required to retrieve data when multiple items havebeen added, select in Preferences to not display all items. If Display P&IInstallation Items is unmarked on the Preferences General tab view, selectingPipe – Item Details will display a dialog box from which you can select theitem you wish to edit or select to add a new item. See page XX475H47XX forinstructions on entering Preferences.

The component starts with piping depicted in the Piping and InstrumentationDrawings manual. You can also display the component’s piping andinstrumentation drawing by clicking the P&ID button on the ComponentSpecifications form.

It displays the piping you are adjusting on the Pipe Details Installation

Bulk form.




You can revise the pipe volumetric model for a component line-by-line.Specifications on the Pipe – Item Details Installation Bulk form override theproject-, area- and component-level specifications that otherwise determinethe design of all lines of pipe. For example, area dimensions determine alllengths of lines generated by volumetric models except those lines for whichyou enter a specific length.

The Piping Volumetric Model field offers the following options:

“blank” - Specified pipe only, no volum. model

This option should rarely be used. It is a rapid way to discard the completepiping model for this item; however, in addition to discarding all of theautomatically generated lines of pipe, this also discards all the associateddrains/vents and pipe-associated instrumentation. The system now generatesonly piping, drains/vents and on-/in-line instrumentation for those lines thatyou subsequently define. Once you have used this option, the other optionsbelow cannot be used because the model is already discarded. If yousubsequently re-create a line that the volumetric model would haveautomatically created, the associated on-/in-line instrumentation isautomatically “re-created.”

A - Add line to pipe volumetric model

This option is used to add a new line of pipe to a component. The number ofthe new line must be higher than any other automatically created or user-defined line. For example, if a component generates lines 1 to 6, then anadded line may have the number 7 to 40. The area dimensions will have noeffect on the length of these lines. It is not necessary to add line numbers in




numeric order; however, they will be generated and reported in numericorder. To associate instrumentation with a new line, specify that a sensor orcontrol element location is this line number. Line 40 is reserved fordrains/vents.

C - Change lines on pipe volumetric modelThis is a commonly used option. It is used to modify automatically generatedlines of pipe; user-specified lines are not changed. The line is generatedexactly at it would have been in the absence of your specifications, except forthe items which you change. You may use this to change only the metallurgy,diameter or length of a run, or only the valves and fittings (including settingthe quantity to 0) or any combination of these.

D - Delete line on pipe volumetric model

This option deletes a single line of automatically generated pipe and itsassociated drains/vents and instrumentation.

R - Replace line on pipe volumetric model

This option replaces the automatically generated line completely with theexact line that you specify. If you do not define something for this line, youdo not get it. For example, if you specify a line of fixed length containing novalves or fittings, then you only get the straight-run of pipe.

To make more than one specification for Pipe – Item Details:

• Click Add.

This adds an item specs column to this form.

To delete any unwanted or unused column(s):

Click any cell in that column (or drag for a range of columns). Click Delete.

Note: Incompletely specified columns must be either completed or deletedbefore saving.

DuctDuct installation bulk items specify individual runs of process ductwork andassociated fittings and insulation. Up to 5 duct lines may be specified for eachcomponent. Use the same methods described for multiple lines of pipe.




Civil

Civil installation bulk items specify bulk excavation and up to three differentfoundation types/sizes. The available foundation types are listed in the IcarusReference.

From the specified foundation types and volumes, Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer calculates:

• Excavation and backfill

• Form work (plywood/backup lumber with reuse)

• Rebar

• Sand mat (or ring wall foundation types only)

• Grout

• Anchor bolts/embedments

Steel

The Steel installation bulk specifies the following:• Ladders

• Stairs

• Platforms

In addition, up to three different steel items may be specified.

Instrumentation

Instrument installation bulk items specify individual instrumentation loops orparts of loops with associated sensors, transmitters and signal cabling. Up to50 loops may be defined for each component.

Note: To reduce the time required to retrieve data when multiple instrumentitems have been added, select in Preferences to not display all items. IfDisplay P&I Installation Items is unmarked on the Preferences General tabview, selecting Instrumentation will display a dialog box from which you canselect the item you wish to edit or select to add a new item. See page XX476H47XX forinstructions on accessing and entering Preferences.

The component starts with instrumentation depicted in the Piping and

Instrumentation Drawings manual. You can also display the component’s

piping and instrumentation drawing by clicking the P&ID button on

the Component Specifications form. It displays the instrumentation you areadjusting on the Instrumentation Installation Bulk form.

You can revise the instrument volumetric model for a component loop-by-loop. Specifications entered on the Instrumentation Installation Bulk formoverride the project-, area- and component-level specifications that otherwisedetermine the design of all instrument loops.




The Instrument Volumetric Model field offers the following options:

• blank - Specified loop only, no volum. model

This option should rarely be used, It is a rapid way to discard the completeinstrument model for this item. The system now generates instrumentationfor those loops that you subsequently define. To define new loops, youcontinue to use this “blank” option for each successive loop. Once you haveused this option, the other options below cannot be used because the modelis already discarded.

• A - Add loop to instr. volum. model

This option is used to add a new loop to a component. The number of the new

loop must be higher than any other automatically created or user-definedloop. It is not necessary to add loop numbers in numeric order; however,they will be generated and reported in numeric order. For example, if acomponent generates loops 1 to 6, then an added loop may have the number7 to 50.

• D - Delete loop on instr. volum. model

This option deletes a single loop, including sensor, transmitter, cable, controlcenter connections and final control element.

• R - Replace loop on instr. volum. model

This option replaces the automatically-generated loop completely with theexact loop that you specify. If you do not define something for this loop, or

you selectively delete a part, you do not get it. For example, if you specify asensor and transmitter only, then you only get the signal generated and sentto the control center.

• “+” - Append to previous loop w/same no.

This option is used to append extra sensors or control valves to theimmediately preceding, user-defined loop (you must also correctly specify theloop number of the preceding loop). It may not be used to append items toautomatically generated loops; to do this, you should first use the replace




option to redefine the loop, then use the “+” option. Whether you areappending a sensor or control element, you should make entries for both thesensor and control valve locations.

To define more than one adjustment, use the same methods described earlierfor Pipe – Item Details (page XX477H193XX).

Instrument Loop Adjustment

On the Instrumentation Installation Bulk form, there are eight LoopModification fields, which allow you to remove different elements of theinstrument loop from the project. Select “-” from the drop-down menu toremove an element.

Two of the elements, sensor and control valve, can also be specified asquoted (“Q”) or vendor-provided (“V”) equipment. When either “Q” or “V” isselected, the system includes installation manhours for the element but notmaterial costs.

Deleting the process connection removes all of the instrument piping.

The indicating signal and control signal runs are reported together, so

removing one would decrease the amount of cable and supports by half.The following diagram shows how the eight adjustable loop elements fit intothe loop design:




Notes:

(A) Junction boxes can be found under PLANT BULKS, INSTRUMENTATION,JUNC-BOX.

(B) Multi-core runs can be found under PLANT BULKS,INSTRUMENTATION, ELECTRONIC SIGNAL WIRE. You can specify it with orwithout the junction box.

(C) Control centers can be found under PLANT BULKS,INSTRUMENTATION, MULTIFUNCTION CONTROLLERS (electronic) or PLANTBULKS, INSTRUMENTATION, INSTRUMENT PANEL – ANALOG (pneumatic).

Electrical

The Electrical installation bulk specifies local equipment lighting, controlwiring and power/cable and motor starters for up to three different types ofelectrical loads.

Insulation

The Insulation installation bulk specifies insulation and fireproofing forcomponent and installation bulk steel. For components, the insulation type, jacket type, thickness and area may be specified. For component and steelfireproofing, type, rating and area may be specified.




Paint

The Paint installation bulk specifies surface preparation and painting ofcomponent and installation bulk steel. Paint for pipe is specified under piping.Entry field specifications include:

• Size of area to be painted

• Number of prime and final coats

• Percent of painted area to be sandblasted

• Galvanizing (for steel)

Defining Area SpecificationsYou can define mechanical design and cost basis specifications for the newlyadded area. You can define or modify area specifications in two ways:

• using the Project view

• using the Spreadsheet view

Method 1: Defining area specifications

using Project View

To define area specifications using Project view:

1 Right-click on the area in Project Explorer’s Project view and then clickModify on the pop-up menu.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Area Specifications dialog box.




2 Select the specification category you want to define:

Select To do this

Area Title Info Change the area title.

Area Equipment, Piping,Civil, Steel,Instrumentation,Electrical, Insulation andPaint

Define standards and procedures applying to this area only.Overrides specifications entered at the project level for thisarea only.

Area Specs Define area’s type, dimensions, and average high/lowambient temperatures.

Area Modules Define module type (default is SKID: flat base structuralmodule); beam, column, and bracing options; structurecosts; shipping costs; and impact loads.

Material Index Info Adjust area’s system-generated material costs by apercentage. Overrides specifications entered at the projectlevel for this area only.

Man Hour Index Info Adjust area’s system-generated man-hours by apercentage. Overrides specifications entered at the project

level for this area only.3 Click Modify to access the selected area specifications.

The Area Equipment Specs dialog box appears.

4 Enter area specifications and click OK.




Method 2: Defining area specifications

using Spreadsheet View

To define or modify area specifications using Spreadsheet

view:1 On the main menu bar, click View | Spreadsheet View | Areas.

The Areas spreadsheet view appears.

2 On the Areas spreadsheet view, click Options.

3 On the menu that appears, select the specification category you want todefine/modify.

Select To do this

Area Title Info Change the area title.

Area Equipment, Piping,Civil, Steel,

Instrumentation,Electrical, Insulation andPaint

Define standards and procedures applying to this area only.Overrides specifications entered at the project level for this

area only.

Area Specs Define area’s type, dimensions, and average high/lowambient temperatures.

Area Modules Define module type (default is SKID: flat base structuralmodule); beam, column, and bracing options; structurecosts; shipping costs; and impact loads.

Material Index Info Adjust area’s system-generated material costs by apercentage. Overrides specifications entered at the projectlevel for this area only.

Man Hour Index Info Adjust area’s system-generated man-hours by apercentage. Overrides specifications entered at the project

level for this area only.4 On the spreadsheet, make your modifications.

5 When you are satisfied with your modifications, click Apply.

6 Click OK.

Your modifications are made in the project.

Note: You cannot use this feature if a component specs form is open thatwould let you edit data that would also be editable in the spreadsheet view.

Importing Areas andComponentsUsing a drag-and-drop operation, you can import entire areas or individualcomponents from other project scenarios. Select in Preferences whether toalso include installation bulks and/or connected streams (see page XX478H49XX). Bydefault, installation bulks are included and connected streams are not.

To import an area or component:




1 Have Project Explorer’s Project view open, since you will drag thecomponent or area there.

2 In the Palette’s Projects view, double-click on the project scenario fromwhich you wish to import. This displays the project areas in the scenario.

3 Expand an area folder to display the components in it.

Note: You can only display the areas and components of a scenario that hasthe same units of measure as the current scenario. If units of measure aredifferent, a message will appear in the Status bar notifying you of this whenyou double-click on the scenario.

To import a component:

• Drag the component to the desired area in Project Explorer, Project view.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer adds the component to the area.

To import an area and its components:

• Drag the area to Main Project in Project Explorer.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer adds the area and its components.

To import all the components in an area to an existing

area in the current project scenario:

• Drag the area from the Palette to the desired area in Project Explorer.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer adds the components to the area withoutcreating a new area.

Importing an Entire ScenarioAs well as allowing you to import individual areas or components, AspenProcess Economic Analyzer lets you import an entire scenario using a drag-and-drop operation. This imports all the areas and components in the selectedscenario. You can select in Preferences whether to also include installation




bulks and/or connected streams (see page XX479H49XX). By default, installation bulksare included and connected streams are not.

To import an entire scenario:

1 Have Project Explorer’s Project view open, since you will drag the scenario

there.2 Click the scenario in the Palette’s Projects view.

3 Drag the scenario from the Palette to Project Explorer’s Project view.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a confirmation window.

4 Click Yes.

The areas and components of the selected scenario are imported.

Note: You can only import scenarios that have the same units of measure asthe current scenario. If the units of measure are not the same, a dialog boxwill inform you of this when you try to import.

Copying ComponentsThe Copy command copies a selected component and all of its associatedinstallation bulks. This is useful if you want to add a component which issimilar to an existing item. The item can be copied and modified with less

effort than creating a new item.

Remember to change the Item Description when copying components todistinguish the copy from the original.

To copy and paste a component:

1 Right-click on the component in either Project Explorer or the List view (atarea level, so that components are listed), and then click Copy on thepop-up menu.




2 You can also copy multiple components at once: select the desiredcomponents on the List view, right-click on one of the components, andclick Copy on the pop-up menu.

3 Right-click on the area to which you want to add the component(s) andclick Paste on the pop-up menu.

The component is added to the area.

Note: If the area contains a component with the same name as the one beingpasted, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer changes the new component’sname so that “#1#” appears at the beginning.

Cut and Paste

If you want to delete (cut) a component from one area and add (paste) it inanother area, use the same procedure as above, except click Cut instead ofCopy on the pop-up menu.

Drag and DropYou can also move a component from one area to another by dragging it.

Modifying ComponentsYou can modify the following components using Spreadsheet View:

• Vessels

• Towers

• Heat Exchangers

• Pumps

To modify a component using Spreadsheet View:

1 On the main menu bar, click View | Spreadsheet View | <the type of

component to modify>.

The <the type of component to modify> spreadsheet view appears.

2 On the <the type of component to modify>spreadsheet view, clickOptions.

3 On the menu that appears, click the option you want to modify.

4 On the spreadsheet, make your modifications.

5 When you are satisfied with your modifications, click Apply.6 Click OK.

Your modifications are made in the project.

Note: You cannot use this feature if a component specs form is open thatwould let you edit data that would also be editable in the spreadsheet view.




Copying AreasUse Area Copy and Paste to create or modify an area specification that isidentical to an existing area.

To copy and paste an area:1 Right-click on an existing area.

2 On the menu that appears, click Copy.

3 Right-click on the project node where you want to copy the area.

4 On the menu that appears, click Paste.

5 In the dialog box that appears, type a name for the new area (forexample, area1).

The new area is added identical (except in name) to the area you copied.

Deleting ComponentsThe Delete command removes a component and all associated installationbulks from the project.

To delete a component:

1 Right-click the component in either Project Explorer or the List view; thenclick Delete on the pop-up menu.

A confirmation dialog box appears.

Note: You can select in Preferences not to have this prompt appear (see pageXX480H47XX).

2 Click Yes to delete the component or click No to retain the component.

3 You can also delete multiple components at one time: select thecomponents on the List view, right-click one of the components; thenclick Delete on the pop-up menu.

Re-numbering Components

After deleting components, you may wish to re-number the remainingcomponents so that the numbering contains no gaps and reflects the order inwhich components were added.

For example, if you add components A, B, C , D, and E in that order, theautomatically generated Order Numbers would be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 , respectively




(the Order Number appears on the List view). If you then delete componentsB and C and re-number, components A, D, and E would have Order Numbers1, 2, 3, respectively. The order in which they were created would stilldetermine the Order Numbers.

To re-number components:

• On the Run menu, click Re-number and then click Project Components onthe sub-menu.

Deleting AreasThe Delete Area command removes the selected area and all of itscomponents.

To delete an area:

1 Right-click on the area in Project Explorer.

2 On the menu that appears, click Delete Area.


Note: You can select in Preferences not to have this prompt appear (seepage XX481H47XX).

3 Click Yes to delete the area.

-or-

Click No to retain the area.

Re-Numbering Areas

Areas have reference numbers that are internally stored and then used by theEvaluation Engine. They are not visible in the current version of AspenProcess Economic Analyzer. Just as with components, re-numbering isintended to close gaps in the numbering after deletion.

To re-number areas:1 On the Run menu, click Re-number.

2 On the menu that appears, click Project Areas.




Using the Custom Model ToolAspen Process Economic Analyzer’s Custom Model tool lets you basecomponent specifications on formulas or fixed data stored in Excel. Use thetool to send a component’s specification values, connection stream values,

and specified bulk information (pipe-item details, material and man-houradjustments) to an Aspen-designed Excel workbook, where you can enternew specification values based on your own data or formulas. Then, use thetool to send the new data back to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.

For instance, you could use the Custom Model tool to calculate a pump driverpower based on a flow rate and pump head or to calculate project componentcosts using your own custom method in Excel.

The specifications rules remain stored in Excel, so that you can change thespecifications in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and then revert back to theExcel specifications by re-running the tool (if the values are fixed). Once thetool has been used with a project component, Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer associates the customized project component with the last Excel

spreadsheet used. Running the tool at the project level updates allcomponents for which the tool has already been run.

The tool provides template files for mixers and pumps, as well as a generaltemplate to use as the starting point for creating files for other components.However, for components other than pumps and mixers, you must first copythe general template file (or use Save As) and enter the slot names for thecomponent specifications you wish to input, as explained on page 482H210.

To use the Custom Model tool on a project component:

Note: Before using this tool, you must select the Activate Custom Modeloption on the Process tab in Preferences. See page 483H47 for information onaccessing Preferences.

1 In Project Explorer, Project view, right-click the pump or mixercomponent that you wish to customize.




2 On the menu that appears, click Custom Model.

The User Custom Model dialog box appears. It displays the name of theproject, scenario, and project component selected for the operation. It alsodisplays available Microsoft Excel (.xls) template files.

3 Click the Excel template file that you have created for the selected projectcomponent.

4 Click Run.




Excel displays the workbook, with tabs for:

• Input

• Custom Rules

• Output

The Input worksheet displays the original Icarus system values from Aspen

Process Economic Analyzer.• Item information is provided at the top of the worksheet. The item

information is from the Component Specifications form.

• Stream information, if available, is shown toward the bottom.

• Below the stream information is information on the installation bulks forMaterial and Man-hour Adjustments and Pipe Item Detail.

The Custom Rules worksheet is provided for storing any data that you maywish to use in the output formulas.




Input specs have been placed on the Custom Rules along with samplealterations for the following:

• Mixer with three inlet streams and one exit stream

• Pump with connection streams, material and man-hour adjustments

• Pipe item details

The Output worksheet displays the same component specification slots as onthe Input worksheet. However, you can customize the values on the Output worksheet.

The values are in the same column-row position as on the Input worksheet,so that you can easily reference the Input data when entering formulas.

You send the entries on the Output worksheet to Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer by clicking Apply or OK on the Custom Model tool.




The following include customized values based on the sample alterations onthe Custom Rules worksheet:

• Mixer with three inlet streams and one exit stream

• Pump with connection streams, material and man-hour adjustments

• Pipe item details

These customizations have been entered solely for example purposes.5 Enter new specifications on the Output worksheet. For example, if you

want to double the Input flow rate value provided on Row 10, Column C,enter the following formula:

=I nput ! C10*2

6 Go to the Custom Model tool; then click OK to send the output to AspenProcess Economic Analyzer and close the tool.

When you display the specifications form of the component, you will see thevalues from the Output worksheet.

Creating a Template

To create a template for a component:

1 Open GeneralModelTemplate.xls; then save it as another file. Thefolder in which you store Custom Model files is specified on the Locations tab in Preferences ( APICustomModelDir). The default is:

AspenTech\ Economi c Eval uat i on V7. 0\ Progr am\ API Cust om Model s

2 Starting on Row 6, Column B for item information, enter the slot namesfor the specifications that you want to have sent from Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer when the file is run for a component.

Slot names for every equipment and plant bulk item are provided in IcarusTechnology Object Definitions ( API.pdf ). For example, to have the tool send




Shell Design Temperature to Excel when the file is run for Fixed Tube

Heat Exchangers, you would need to enter CPDesignTemperatureShell.

3 For connection stream information, enter slot names starting on Row 43,Column B.

4 For material and man-hour adjustments, enter slot names starting on row70, column B.

5 For the pipe-item details, enter slot names starting on row 101, column B.

Running the Custom Model Tool atProject-Level for Batch Update

The batch update process for the Custom Model can be done one of two ways.

• The first method is for a batch update of custom model operationsperformed on project components that are already linked to a custommodel template.

• The second method is for a batch update of all selected components.

After using the Custom Model tool for any number of components, you cancontinue to experiment with different specifications and easily revert back tothe custom specifications by running the tool at the project level. Simplyright-click Main Project or Project Area in Project Explorer’s Project view;then click Custom Model.

If more than one project component has been selected for the custom model(for example, multi-selection, area selection, project selection), a messagebox will appear asking you to specify the mode of operation.

If you click Yes, you will be able to specify a custom model template and allof the selected project components will be processed with the one chosentemplate.

If you click No, only project components with a link to a custom modeltemplate will be processed with their associated template.




Note: the output will be based on the values in the Output workbook in

Excel. If the Output workbook contains formulas based on input, changes ininput since originally running the Custom Model will affect the output whenthe Custom Model is re-run.

This re-runs all custom models stored in the Custom Model tool.



6 Sizing Project Components 213

6 Sizing Project Components

Overview

Note: To see the list of the Equipment and Slots of those Equipment whichwill be affected by mapping when you do Map Based On Last Session, see Appendix A. The slots listed on the table in Appendix A WILL CHANGE.

Sizing for Project Components Mapped

from Simulator Items

Operating conditions for the project components mapped from simulatormodels are obtained from the information loaded into Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer from the simulator report. Any Design Data in thesimulator report is also loaded and used during sizing. The information

consists of a unit operation model and the streams connected to it. You can size a mapped project component in either of two ways:

• Right-click the component in Project Explorer and click Size Item on thepop-up menu.

• Click the Size button on the Component Specifications form:




Interactive Sizing Expert

For the following components, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides theInteractive Sizing form that allows you to adjust sizing specifications. TheInteractive Sizing form appears when you size the component.

Heat Exchangers DHE FIXED-T-S

DHE FLOAT-HEAD

DHE U-TUBE

DRB KETTLE

DRB THERMOSIPH

DRB U-TUBE

Compressors DCP CENTRIF

DCP GEN-SERV

DGC CENTRIF

DGC CENTRIF-IG

DGC RECIP-MOTR

EGC RECIP-GAS

DCP ANSI

DCP ANSI-PLAST

DCP API 610

DCP API 610-IL

DCP CANNED

DCP TURBINE

DCP PULP STOCK

DCP NAG DRIVE

Pumps DCP ANSIDCP ANSI-PLAST

DCP API 610

DCP API 610-IL

DCP CANNED

DCP TURBINE

DCP PULP STOCK

DCP NAG DRIVE

Vessels DHT HORIZ-DRUM

DVT CYLINDER

DVT SPHERE

DVT SPHEROID

DVT STORAGE

If interactive sizing is not available, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer sizesthe item automatically using the simulator data.




Sizing for Project Components Not Mapped

from Simulator Items

Project components not mapped from simulator items can be sized if they areconnected to streams. See “Creating Streams to Connect to Components” on

pageXX484H216485H

216 for instructions on creating inlet and outlet streams. If thecomponent is one of those for which interactive sizing is available (see list onpage 486H214), the Interactive Sizing form is displayed during sizing. See “Usingthe Interactive Sizing Form” for instructions on connecting a component tostreams during sizing.

If sizing is not available for a component, the Size option as unavailable.

Resizing Project Components

If the process conditions associated with a component change, then use theRe-Size command on the project component pop-up menu to update allequipment sizing information.

The Re-Size command will clear all the previous sizing results and then sizethe equipment based on the current process conditions (those that you haveentered and those available from the currently loaded simulator file).Therefore, if the component being re-sized is one of those for whichinteractive sizing is available, the Interactive Sizing form that appears isblank.

If you would like to keep some of your component specifications (i.e., nothave them replaced by those calculated by the Sizing Expert), do not use theRe-size command. Instead, use the Size command or the Size button toaccess the Interactive Sizing form with current specifications retained, ratherthan cleared. Then, clear all fields except those you want to retain and click

OK to execute sizing. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer will re-calculate onlythe blank fields.




Creating Streams to Connect toEquipment ItemsFor most components, the interactive Sizing Expert requires selection of an

inlet stream (that is, a stream carrying fluid to the equipment item) and anoutlet stream (that is, a stream carrying fluid from the equipment item).

The set of instructions below show how to create streams to connect to anitem. In the example, inlet and outlet streams are created to carry 49 DEF Fwater to a heat exchanger and an outlet stream is created to carry 200 DEG Fwater from the heat exchanger. In the example used in the set of instructionsfollowing these, a heat exchanger is sized to heat water from 40 DEG F to 200DEG F, using the streams created in the first examples.

To create an inlet stream and an outlet stream:

1 In Project Explorer’s Project Basis view, right-click Streams; then clickEdit.


2 On the Develop Streams dialog box, click the Create tab.




3 In the Streams tree structure, click User. Leave the Basis as Absolute,since you are creating a completely new process stream.

4 Click Create.

The Create Stream dialog box T appears.

T

5 On the Create Stream dialog box, enter a stream name, such asProcess-IN.

6 Click OK.

7 On the Develop Stream specifications form, specify:o a primary fluid component

o temperature

o pressure

o liquid mass flow

Example:

• In the Primary Fluid Component field, click and click Water.

• In the Temperature (DEG F) field, enter 40.

• In the Pressure (PSIA) field, enter 90.

• In the Liquid Mass Flow (LB/H) field, enter 50,000.

8 Click Apply.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer fills in the rest of the fields in the LiquidInformation section.




9 Click OK to return to the Develop Streams dialog box, where you nowneed to create an outlet stream.

10 In the tree structure, click User. Notice that the inlet stream that you justcreated is now displayed under User.

11 Click that stream and, in the Basis group, click Relative. The new outlet

stream will be based upon the inlet stream.12 On the Create Stream dialog box, enter a stream name, such as

Process-OUT.




13 Click OK.

The Develop Stream specifications form appears. Specifications that appeargray are the same as those of the base stream. Any modifications made willappear black.

14 Enter an outlet stream temperature that corresponds to temperature towhich the heat exchanger will be heating the fluid. In the example above,the temperature has been entered as 200 DEG F and the pressure hasbeen entered as 80 PSIA. The other specifications are the same as thebase stream’s.

15 Click OK to apply the changes and return to the Develop Streams dialog

box, which you can now close.

Using the Interactive SizingFormWith the necessary streams created, you are ready to perform sizing.




To size an equipment item:

1 Add an equipment item for which interactive sizing is available and displaythe Component Specifications form. If you are following the example, adda floating head shell and tube exchanger. (See page XX487H182XX for instructionson adding components.)

It is not necessary to enter any values on the specifications form beforestarting the Sizing Expert. However, all applicable sizing parameters that areentered in the component specifications form will be carried overautomatically to the sizing expert and used in calculations.

2 Click the Size button.

The Interactive Sizing form appears.

Note: In order for the Sizing Expert to run, you must select process fluidstreams (one at Inlet and one at Outlet conditions) for at least one side (hotor cold side).




Any other data you provide (for example,, Duty, Overall heat transfercoefficient, LMTD, and so on) helps the Expert do its job better, but is notnecessary.

3 Click on the Hot Inlet Stream field and then click to access adrop-down list that includes all utility resources and user-created streams.

Note: “fluid” refers to liquid or gas.

4 If you are h e a t i n g a fluid, as in the example, select a utility resource touse as the heating source. The tables on the following page providedefinitions of the utility resources.

To heat a fluid from 40 DEG F to 200 DEG F, as in the example, the utilitySteam @100PSI-Aspen Process Economic Analyzer UTILITY is appropriate.




-or-

If you are c o o l i n g a fluid, select the stream carrying the fluid to becooled.

Utility Resources

If you specify a utility resource as a stream, the Sizing Expert will estimatethe actual utility rate required for the heat transfer and use this rate to createutility streams as though they were user-specified. The utility stream namesare prefixed by “ICU” and are present under the Utility category in theDevelop Streams dialog box. These utility streams differ from utility resourcesin that they have an actual flow rate whereas a resource is a “reservoir” thatcan provide utility streams at any required flow rate.

Default Utility Resources Available for I-P Projects

Inlettemperature

(DEG F)

Exittemperature

(DEG F)

OperatingPressure

(PSIA)Utilitytype

Steam @100PSI 327 327 100 Heatsource



Low Temp Heating Oil 600 550 25 Heatsource

High Temp Heating Oil 725 675 25 Heatsource

Refrigerant – Freon 12 -21 -21 15.5 Heat sink

Refrigerant – Ethylene -150 -150 15.5 Heat sink

Refrigerant – Ethane -130 -130 15.5 Heat sink

Refrigerant –Propylene

-50 -50 15.5 Heat sink

Refrigerant – Propane -40 -40 15.5 Heat sink

Cooling Water 95 75 50 Heat sink

Default Utility Resources Available for METRIC Projects

Inlettemperature

(DEG C)

Exittemperature

(DEG C)

OperatingPressure

(KPA)Utilitytype

Steam @2760KPA 229.2 229.2 2760 Heatsource

Steam @1135KPA 184 184 1135 Heatsource




Default Utility Resources Available for METRIC Projects

Inlettemperature

(DEG C)

Exittemperature

(DEG C)

OperatingPressure

(KPA)

Utility

type

Steam @690KPA 164 164 690 Heatsource

Low Temp Heating Oil 315 287 2523 Heatsource

High Temp Heating Oil 385 357 2523 Heatsource

Refrigerant – Freon 12 -29.8 -29.8 105 Heat sink

Refrigerant – Ethylene -101 -101 105 Heat sink

Refrigerant – Ethane -90 -90 105 Heat sink

Refrigerant –

Propylene

-45 -45 105 Heat sink

Refrigerant – Propane -40 -40 105 Heat sink

Cooling Water 35 24 105 Heat sink




5 Click on the Hot Outlet Stream field and then click to access thedrop-down list of utility resources and user-created streams.

6 If you are h e a t i n g a fluid, select again the utility to use as the heatingsource.

-or-

If you are c o o l i n g a fluid, select the stream carrying the cooled fluid fromthe exchanger.

7 Click on the Cold Inlet Stream field and then click to access thedrop-down list of utility resources and user-created streams.

8 If you are heating a fluid, select the stream carrying the fluid to beheated.

9 A If you are following the example, select the Process-IN stream that youcreated in the previous set of instructions (see “Creating Streams,” pagesXX488H216XX through XX489H219XX).

B If you are cooling a fluid, select a heat sink utility to use as a coolingmedium.

Click on the Cold Outlet Stream field and then click to access thedrop-down list of utility resources and user-created streams.

If you areheating

a fluid, select the stream carrying the heated fluid from theexchanger.

If you are following the example, select the Process-OUT stream thatyou created in the previous set of instructions (see “Creating Streams,” pagesXX490H216XX through XX491H219XX).

If you are cooling a fluid, select again the heat sink utility to use as thecooling medium.

Click Apply. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer fills in the other fields on theInteractive Sizing form.




Note: results are not transferred to the Component Specifications form untilyou click OK and the sizing is successfully completed (i.e., without generating

error messages).10 Click OK.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides a message informing you of theoverdesign factor.

11 Click OK to accept this message.

The values obtained from Interactive Sizing now appear on the Component

Specifications form.




12 Click OK to save.

You can now run an item evaluation and see the values generated by theSizing Expert in the item report.

Global Sizing SelectionA user can define and/or select a sizing selection library to pre-define thesizing selection for a project scenario. For each type of component, the user

can specify custom models that will be applied in the sizing phase. Theserules can also be modified on a component by component basis when workingon a specific project scenario. For example, if a user wants to have all “DCPCENTRIF” based equipment models within a project scenario sizing with aspecific custom model, he/she can edit or create a Sizing Selection library(see figure 1) to be used. These libraries must be edited/created outside of aproject.




Figure 1: Library tab in palette

To edit the library:

1 Double-click the library name (for example, my sizing).

The Sizing Selection dialog box appears.

2 To view or edit the sizing selection, click on the equipment model. Allequipment models default to “System Sizing” (see figure 2).

Figure 2: Sizing Selection dialog box




3 To add or remove a custom model to the sizing selection list, click NewSizing; then click your choice on the list of available custom models (seeFigure 3).

Figure 3: Add new sizing with custom model

The current sizing list for the equipment model is order dependent (see figure4).

Figure 4: Current Sizing List with System sizing and two custom models

Once this library has been specified, it must be selected in the project (seefigure 5).

Figure 5: Selecting the Sizing Selection library for a project scenario




Sizing AreasThe Area sizing feature in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer develops lengthand width of an area from the equipment in the area. When actual areadimensions are not available, you can get a better estimate of area length

and width from the system when these parameters are not specified in thearea specs form.

The system calculated area length and width is used in the design of all areabulks. You can use the system calculated area parameters as the area specs.

To have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer calculate thearea:

1 Open the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project.

2 Modify an area spec by right-clicking the area; then, on the menu thatappears, clicking Modify.

3 Click Specification | Area Specs; then, on the menu that appears, click

Modify.4 Clear the values for Area length and Area width.

5 Click OK; then click Close.

6 Evaluate the project.

In the report, the system-calculated length and width for each area appear in:

• AREA BULK REPORT

• AREA DATA SHEET

To specify the area yourself:



3 Click Specification | Area Specs; then, on the menu that appears, clickModify.

4 Enter values for Area length and Area width.

5 Click Area Piping; then enter data for the piping envelope.

6 Click Area Electrical; then enter data for Distance equipment to

panel/DB.

7 Click OK; then click Close.


In the report, the system-calculated length and width for each area appear in:


• AREA DATA SHEET

To Develop Area Utility Piping and Pipe Racks – systemcalculated area length and width:






3 Click Specification | Area Piping; then, on the menu that appears, clickModify.

4 Clear the data in the Utility length parameter (0) and Utility stations

(-) fields.

5 Click OK.

6 Click Area Steel; then, on the menu that appears, click Modify.

7 Clear the data in the Pipe rack length (0) field; then click OK.

8 Close the Area Specification menu.


Some areas generate utility headers, utility stations. and pipe rack bulks. Thisinformation appears in:


Sizing Requirements,Calculations, and DefaultsCertain types of components have minimum input requirements for sizing.Those requirements are provided in the following sections, along with

explanations of how the sizing is calculated for different component types.

Air Coolers

Minimum Input Requirements• Inlet Stream

• Exit Stream

Sizing Procedure

The air cooler thermal and detailed mechanical design equations are givenbelow:

For thermal design:

Q = U*A*MTD

MTD = f*LMTD

For mechanical design:

A = pi*D_tube*N_tubeRows*N_tubesPerRow* Tube_length




where:

Q = Heat Duty

U = Heat transfer coefficient

A = Bare tube surface area

MTD = Mean Temperature differenceLMTD = Log mean temperature difference, based on

purely countercurrent flow

f = Temperature correction factor

N_bays = Number of bays

N_tube_rows = Number of tube rows

N_tubesPerRow = Number of tubes per row (takes into account thepresence of a fan shaft)

Tube_length = Length of tubes

The process fluid properties (temperature, pressure, and specific heat

capacity) are assumed to be constant throughout the air cooler and areestimated as the mean of the inlet and outlet stream properties. The requiredheat duty is calculated from the inlet and outlet process stream conditions if itis not specified.

The process fluid stream temperatures, inlet and exit, are used along with thetemperatures specified for the air stream (Design Criteria specifications) tocalculate the LMTD. The temperature correction factor is then used tocalculate the MTD.

If the process fluid temperatures and air temperatures are appropriate,meaning that there is no temperature crossover and the temperatureapproach at the ends is reasonable, then the surface area required for thegiven heat duty is estimated using the thermal design equation. The air flowrate needed to realize this heat duty is then calculated using the specifiedambient and outlet air conditions.

An iterative algorithm has been developed to size the air cooler. The sizingroutine calculates the heat duty that can be realized using the specified tubebundle geometry (bay width, number of tube rows, and tube length). Itassumes defaults for parameters that you have not specified. If the computedheat duty is larger than the heat duty actually required, the iterativeprocedure terminates. The tube bundle arrangement used represents thespecification of the air cooler selected. If the calculated heat duty does notmeet the required heat duty then a bigger air cooler is chosen (i.e. parametervalues are increased) and the above procedure is repeated. The iterativeprocedure terminates either when a tube bundle geometry that can meet theheat duty requirements is found, or when even the largest available air coolerdoes not meet the process requirements.

Air-side heat transfer coefficients are calculated using the relations that takeinto account the tube bundle geometry.

The work of Young, Briggs, and Robinson, as summarized in [6] is being usedto evaluate the heat transfer and pressure drop of air across the tube bundle. The pressure drop thus calculated is used in estimating the fan powerrequired. The number of fans required is calculated based on the aspect ratio




(tube length/bay width). For any aspect ratio of up to 1.5, only one fan isselected.

DefaultsTube pitch = 2.5 INCHES

Tube thickness = 0.125 INCHES

Bay width = 4 ft to 20 ft

Tube rows = 3 to 6

Maximum Tubelength

= 3*Bay width

Inlet air temperature (from Design Criteria specifications)

Outlet air temperature (from Design Criteria specifications)

Agitated Tanks

Minimum Input Requirements• Inlet stream

• Exit stream

Sizing Procedure

The capacity of the agitated tank is determined by the following equation:

C = Q * (T_r / 60.0)

where:

C = Capacity , CF

Q = Liquid volumetric flowrate, CFH

T_r = Liquid residence time, MINUTES

The diameter of the agitated tank is determined using L/D and geometry:

C = (π /4) * D^2 * L

where:

D = Diameter of vessel, FEETL = Fluid height, FEET

Vessel height is obtained by the following:

H = L + h_d

where:




H = Vessel height, FEET

h_d = Vapor disengagement height, FEET

Design parameters are based on the current Design Criteria specifications ifavailable:

Length/Diameter Ratio:Default

= 3

Vapor disengagement height:Default

= 1 FEET

Agitator type: Default = ANCHOR

Driver type: Default = STD

Impeller type: Default = T6FB

Operating pressure is obtained from the simulator report. If the report doesnot have a value, then the pressure of the inlet stream having the maximumvalue is chosen as the operating pressure.

The operating pressure is used to obtain the L/D ratio (if user specification isabsent).

I f P <= 250 PSI A, t hen L/ D = 3I f 250 < P <= 500 PSI A, t hen L/ D = 4I f P > 500 PSI A, t hen L/ D = 5

where:

P = Pressure, PSI

L = Fluid height, FEET

D = Diameter of vessel, FEET

The project component must have at least one process stream connected tothe inlet and exit. Also, since the sizing procedure is based on the liquidholding period, at least one of the streams should have liquid phase.

The design pressure and temperature are based on the operating pressureand temperature as modified by your entries on the Design Criteriaspecifications form.

Compressors

Minimum Input Requirements• Inlet and Exit stream information

• Driver Power (for Reciprocating Compressors)




Sizing Procedure

The capacity requirement for the compressor is calculated from the inletstream information. The inlet stream flow rate and density are used toestimate the total volumetric flow rate through the compressor.

The compression ratio (exit to inlet pressure) is obtained from the operating

pressures of the inlet and exit stream.

The compressibility factor (inlet and exit) is based on user-specifiedinformation, if available, or estimated by the sizing expert based on thePrimary Fluid Component.

The Icarus Evaluation Engine estimates the driver power if it is neither user-specified nor provided in the simulator report. The engine currently uses amechanical efficiency of 100% to arrive at the brake horsepower. The brakehorsepower, thus calculated, is compared against a table of availablestandard motor sizes. If the calculated brake horsepower is not found in thetable, then the motor with the next higher horsepower is selected.

If the driver horsepower is either user-specified or provided in the simulator

report, the engine uses this value. However for pricing the compressor, thetable of available standard motor sizes is referred. If the specified horsepoweris not found in the table, then the price of the motor with the next higherhorsepower is used.

In the case of simulator inputs, different simulators provide information thatmay be slightly different. For instance, in the case of AspenPlus, thecompressor calculations take into account any mechanical efficiency specifiedduring the simulation run. So the “brake horsepower” reported in the case ofAspenPlus already takes into account the mechanical efficiency. However,other simulators, such as SimSci (“Actual Work”); HYSIM and HYSYS (“EnergyRequired”), and ChemCAD ( “Actual Power”); do not account for mechanicalefficiency. Keep this in mind and be aware of what has been accounted for in

the simulation side when using simulator information as inputs.

Defaults

Minimum inlet pressure for air compressors is 14.696 PSIA

Crushers

Minimum Input Requirement• Inlet and Exit stream information

• Final product size.

Sizing Procedure

The sizing expert estimates the solid flow rate from the inlet streaminformation. The crushing ratio (feed to product size) is set at 4.

Work index is the total energy in KWH/TONS, needed to reduce the feed to asize so that 80% of the product will pass through a 100 micron screen. The




sizing expert in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer assumes a default value of13.81 for the material work index.

The total driver power required for the crusher is calculated using materialwork index and the value of the product size.

The following equation is used to estimate the driver power:

P = 1.46 (T_m) (W_i) ( 1/(d_p ^ 0.5) - 1/(d_r ^0.5))

where:

P = Driver power, HP

T_m = Crusher capacity, TPM

W_i = Material work index

d_p = Product size, FEET

d_r = Feed size, FEET

Defaults• Material Work Index: 13.8 KWh/ton

• Size Reduction Ratio: 4

Crystallizers

Minimum Information Required

Inlet and Exit Stream information

Additional Information

Final Product size

Sizing Procedure

The sizing program calculates the crystallizer capacity based on the inlet andexit stream information.

Default value of 0.83 MM is used as final product size if the user-specifiedvalue is not available from the simulator report.

In addition, the following defaults values are used for the design parameters:

Growthrate

= 0.36 MM/H

The residence time in hours for a batch crystallizer is determined by thefollowing relation:

Residence time = d_p / (3 * R_g

where:




d_p = Product size, MM

R_g = Growth rate, MM/H

Based on the minimum and maximum values for the required fields in thecomponent specification form, the number of additional crystallizers are

estimated.

Dryers

Minimum Input Requirement

Inlet and Exit stream information

Sizing Procedure

The sizing program calculates the dryer capacity based on the totalevaporation rate for the drying process. For tray and drum dryers, an averagedepth of 2.25 FEET is used to determine the total dryer requirements. Forvacuum and jacketed rotary vacuum dryers, the dryer capacity is determinedby obtaining value of the drying time and the average percentage utilizationof the dryer capacity.

The system defaults are as follows:

Dryingtime

= 0.75 HOUR

Averagepercentageutilization

= 25

The number of additional items required for the given drying operation isdetermined from the knowledge-based engine in Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer, which analyzes minimum and maximum values for the requiredfields in the specification form.

Dust Collectors

Minimum Input Requirement


Sizing Procedure

The sizing program estimates the vapor volume flowing through the dustcollector using the exit stream information available from the simulatorreport.

In case of cyclones, the sizing program assumes a default linear velocity of150 FPS. The height to width ratio is fixed at 2.5.




Using the above defaults, the volumetric rate through the separator isobtained using Zenz correlation represented by the following equation:

Q = 2.5 (D ^ 2) V / 16

where:

Q = Vapor volumetric rate, CFS

D = Cyclone separator diameter, FEET

V = Linear velocity, FPS

In case of baghouse dust collectors, the sizing program uses Nylon as thedefault filter cloth material to determine the air to media ratio which thendetermines the diameter of the separator.

Air to media ratio is the flow rate of air (at 70 DEG F) in CFM. The defaultratio results in a pressure drop of 0.5 INCHES of water when passed through1 SF of clean fabric.

The sizing program uses a default air to media ratio of 10 CFM.The minimum and maximum values of the required field(s) shown in thecomponent specification form are used to determine the number of identicalequipment items.

Filters

Minimum Input Requirement• Inlet stream

• Exit stream

Sizing Procedure

The sizing program calculates the total amount of filtration product rate basedon the exit stream information. Based on the type of filter selected, theaverage dimension of the filter equipment is selected and the filter size isthen optimized for the given operation such that the dimensions selected forthe equipment are within the minimum and maximum values as specified bythe knowledge-based engine.

In case of batch filtration, a default batch time of 0.25 HOUR is used. In caseof plate and frame filters, default value of cake thickness of 0.3 FEET is used.

In the case of continuous operation, the cycle time default is 0.08 HOUR.Based on the actual capacity requirement and the maximum and minimumsizes provided by the knowledge-based engine, the number of identical itemsis determined.




Heat Exchangers

The heat exchanger sizing program estimates the heat transfer area requiredfor the given operating conditions. The model also performs detail estimationof the number of tubes, tube length, and other internal components of theheat exchanger based on either user-defined specifications (from the process

simulator report or the Design Criteria specifications form) or system defaults.

Minimum Input Requirements

Inlet and Exit Process Stream Information

Sizing Procedure

The process stream(s) are classified into various categories. The Primary FluidComponent class that you specify for the process fluid(s) flowing through theheat exchanger is used to estimate the following design parameters:

• Latent heats (vaporization and condensation)

• Fouling resistance

• Specific heat capacity of the fluid

• Liquid film resistance

• Overall heat transfer coefficient

Duty requirement for the heat exchanger is either directly obtained from thesimulator report or estimated based on the inlet and exit process streaminformation for the process model. In case the fluid undergoes phase change,a boiling point temperature, Tb, is estimated that would lie between the inletand exit stream temperature. The estimated Tb is then used in the calculationof the sensible and latent heats based on the Primary Fluid Component. Thesensible heat of any solids present in the stream is also accounted for in the

duty calculation.

In estimating the design pressure on shell and tube heat exchangers, the2/3P

rdP Rule is applied if it has been selected on the Design Criteria

specifications form (see page XX492H86XX).

If only the process fluid conditions are specified by the simulator model, theheat exchanger sizing program determines the appropriate utility from the listof utilities that you specify using the Utility Specifications accessed fromProject Basis view (see page XX493H98XX). If multiple utilities are available for heattransfer, then the sizing expert uses the utility fluid with a temperatureapproach closest to the process fluid. This minimizes the heat transfer losses.However, a minimum of 1 degree Fahrenheit difference in the final

temperature of the process fluid and the utility fluid must exist for the utilityfluid to be selected for the process. If an appropriate utility fluid is notavailable for the heat transfer process, the heat exchanger sizing program willterminate without estimating the heat exchanger size requirements.

The mean temperature difference (MTD) is estimated based on the fluidtemperature for both the shell and the tube side. It also depends on the flowconfiguration for shell and tube heat exchangers, which is specified by thenumber of shell and tube passes. For reasons of compactness of equipment,the paths of both fluids may require several reversals in direction. Mean




temperature differences in such cases can be obtained by applying a factor(called the F-factor) to the terminal temperature difference. The logarithmicmean temperature difference (based on purely counter current flow) ismultiplied by the F-factor to obtain the mean temperature difference.

If the temperatures are not properly entered then appropriate warningmessages are displayed. In such cases it recommended that you check theinlet and outlet temperatures of the shell and tube side streams and verifythat they are realistic.

The overall heat transfer coefficient is either directly obtained from thesimulator report or evaluated based on the shell and tube fluid properties(film resistance, fouling tendency present for the various processes in thesystem database).

The heat exchanger sizing program determines the position of the fluids inthe shell and tube heat exchanger. The position depends on both the processand utility fluid class.

If duty is provided by the simulator report, then you can override the valueonly through interactive sizing.

The final heat transfer area is obtained by multiplying the heat transfer area,calculated based on the duty required, with the Heat Exchanger MinimumOverdesign Factor. If you do not specify an overdesign factor then the defaultvalue is used from the Design Criteria specifications.

If the duty generates a surface area less than minimum required for practicaldesign, the item report will give the appropriate warning message.

FLOAT HEAD or U-TUBE heat exchangers have an even number of tubepasses. If you enter an odd number for the number of tube passes for any ofthese heat exchanger types, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer generateswarning messages.

The shell and tube design pressure and temperature are based on themaximum operating conditions of the fluid flowing through the shell and tuberespectively. The Design Criteria specifications form allows you to changethem according to individual project requirements.

Heat Exchanger Internals

The final heat transfer area is determined by the actual number of tubeschosen for the equipment. The least surface area of the combination ofnumbered tubes and shells is changed for final design.

A default tube length of 20 FEET is used for calculating the number of tubes.

System default values for tube diameter, tube thickness, tube pitch and baffledistances are used if user specifications are not available.

General Information

The utility requirement is estimated only when the system determines theutility fluid. If both shell and tube side fluid stream information is specified inthe simulator report, then the system assumes that both of the fluid streamsare process streams and that no utility fluid is expended.




Presently, the model defaults are used for determining the material ofconstruction.

For shell and tube heat exchangers, if the heat transfer surface areacalculated by the sizing program is greater than the largest heat exchangerdesigned by the design and cost engine, then the heat exchanger is dividedinto multiple shells with identical configurations. The capital cost estimation isthen calculated based on the complete heat exchanger.

Note: When mapping a rigorous heat exchanger model (HXRIG) fromSimSci, the number of shells in parallel is used to determine the number ofshells in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. For Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer, the maximum number of shells in series is 1.

Double Pipe Heat Exchanger

The sizing program in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer estimates the totalsurface area required for the given duty. During the capital cost estimation,detailed design for the heat exchanger is developed based on the values for

tube length and number of tubes per shell obtained from the simulator reportor from the user.

Fin Tube Heat Exchanger

The sizing program estimates the total surface area required for the givenduty. During the capital cost estimation, detailed design for the heatexchanger is developed based on the tube length and number of fins per tubeobtained either from the simulator report or from the user.

Spiral Plate Heat Exchanger

The sizing program estimates the total surface area required for the givenduty. During the capital cost estimation, detailed design for the heatexchanger is developed based on the tube length and number of fins per tubeobtained either from the simulator report or from the user.

Pumps

Minimum Input Requirements


Sizing Procedure

The sizing program calculates the total capacity requirements for the selectedpump based on the total flow rate of the inlet fluid stream(s) obtained fromthe simulator.




Flow Rate/Capacity

Pump flow rate is obtained from the simulator information. If the informationdoes not exist, then pump flow rate is calculated based on the stream flowrates. The stream is assumed to be completely liquid phase and no check ismade for presence of vapor phase.

The pump flow rate obtained from the simulator information is multiplied bythe pump overdesign factor, also referred as the capacity over-design factor,present in the Design Criteria specifications file.

Pump % Efficiency

Pump efficiency is directly obtained from the simulator. If the value is notpresent in the simulator report, then the default value of 70% is used.

Pump Overdesign

You can modify the pump overdesign factor either on the Design Criteriaspecifications form or the Interactive Sizing form. Modifying the overdesignfactor using the Design Criteria specifications form (page XX494H86XX) will applies thenew factor to all the pumps in the project. Modifying the overdesign factor fora pump using the Interactive Sizing form (page XX495H219XX) applies the factor only tothat particular pump. This allows you to either specify the factor for all pumpsor specify the factor individually for each pump.

Driver Power

If you specify a driver power in the component specification form then thisvalue is used. If the user does not provide the value then it is calculated bythe cost engine. The Icarus Evaluation Engine calculates the hydraulic

horsepower based on the capacity, viscosity and head, and then uses thepump efficiency to estimate the brake horsepower. The brake horsepower iscompared against a set of standard available motor sizes to estimate thepump driver power.

If multiple inlet streams are present, the minimum value of pressure is usedfor determining the operating pressure of the equipment.

Defaults (if they are not obtained from thesimulators):• Operating pressure: 14.696 PSIA

• Operating temperature: 77 DEG F

Calculating Pump Head

The total head developed by the pump is composed of the difference betweenthe static, pressure, and velocity heads. Additionally, friction at the suctionand discharge sides would also contribute to some head loss. The pump headis calculated using the following relation:

Head, = h_d – h_s




FEET

where:

H = total pump head, FEET

h_d = discharge head, FEET

h_s = suction head, FEET

Assumptions:

• No friction losses at the entrance and exit.

• No static head on suction and discharge sides.

• Velocity heads are not included in estimating the suction and dischargeheads.

Head in feet is estimated by the following relations:

Head,FEET

= (Pressure, PSIA) * (2.31)/(Fluid specific gravity)

The specific gravity of the fluid is based on inlet streams conditions. Thedischarge pressure for the pump is based on the maximum value for the exitstream(s). The suction pressure is based on the minimum value for the inletstreams(s).

Screens

Minimum Input Requirement• Inlet stream information

• Screen opening size (or average product size)

Sizing Procedure

The sizing program determines the capacity of the screen based on the inletflow rate estimated from the stream information.

The screen opening size is used to determine the final product size.

The feed material for the vibrating screen is obtained from the Design Criteriaspecifications. The following choices are available:

• Sand and Gravel

• Limestone/Crushed Stones• Coal

• Cinders

• Coke

• Wood

The material type affects the screen unit capacity which is defined as theamount of solid (in tons per hour) flowing through one square foot of screen




cloth based on material, having 6 to 8% moisture, screen cloth having 50%or more open area; 85% screen efficiency.

Based on the material selected and the screen opening size, the screen unitcapacity is chosen. Further, the sizing program assumes that five layers ofparticles are present on the screen. The surface area required for thevibrating screen is obtained.

Based on the maximum and minimum values specified by the knowledge basefor the screen capacity, additional items required by the operations aredetermined.

Towers

Minimum Input Requirements• Stage temperature, pressure, flowrates

• Number of stages

• Inlet stream• Exit stream

Sizing Procedure

The distillation column sizing module can be used to size the following Icarusprocess equipment:

• DDT TRAYED

• DDT PACKED

• TW TRAYED

• TW PACKED

• DC HE TW

The following simulator models can be used to generate the necessaryprocess information required for successfully executing the application:

Simulator Models used

AspenPlus ABSBR, DISTWU, DISTL, RADFRAC

HYSIM/HYSYS COLUMN

Pro/II COLUMN, IO, SURE, CHEMDIST, SHORTCUT

Loading Column Model from Simulator

In Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, the rigorous column unit operationsloaded from the simulator report (i.e., COLUMN UNITS model in PRO/II) aredeveloped in great detail, including all pieces attached to the main columnunit.

Typically, the simulator model develops stage information for the main towerand duties for an associated condenser and reboiler. These duties are usedalong with the specified fluid conditions available from the stage informationtables to generate all of the input specifications required for the equipment.




Sidestrippers and pumparounds are separated from the main tower ifnecessary during the loading process after all the relevant information iscollected for the models. Once the report is loaded, these units are treated asseparate simulator models which can be mapped and sized independently ofthe main tower design.

Sidestrippers

Sidestrippers attached to tower models are separated from the main towermodel during the loading process. Sidestrippers load information from thesame tables in the report from which the main tower information is discerned.

For example, the typical information loaded for sidestrippers in Pro/II are:SIDESTRIPPER ABC

COLUMN SUMMARY

—————— NET FLOW RATES —————— HEATERTRAY TEMP PRESSURE LIQUID VAPOR FEED PRODUCT DUTIES

DEG C KPA KG-MOL/HR M*KJ/HR

————— ————— ———————— —————— —————— ————— ——————— ———————

1/ 10 200.3 600.50 22. 20.0L 8.5V

2/ 11 202.2 601.53 7.8 5.0V 20.1L

SIDESTRIPPER ABC

TYPE STREAM PHASE FROM TO LIQUID FLOW RATES HEAT RATESTRAY TRAY FRAC KG-MOL/HR M*KJ/HR

————— —————— —————— ————— ——— —————— —————————— ———————————

FEED ABCDRW LIQUID 10 1.0000 23.00 1.3216FEED ABCSTM VAPOR 11 .0000 5.55 .2785

PROD ABCSRVP VAPOR 10 8.46 .5325PROD ABCPRD LIQUID 11 20.09 1.0678

Information is obtained for the sidestrippers in the same manner as for themain tower unit (Refer to information for obtaining process data for maintower unit).

Pumparounds

The inlet and outlet fluid conditions for pumparounds are obtained from thestage information to which the unit is connected. Additionally, the dutyassociated with each pumparound is loaded into the unit. This unit is thenseparated during the loading process and is treated as an independentsimulator model which can be mapped and sized on its own.

For example, the information required by pumparound units in PRO/II areobtained from the following part of the column report:

COLUMN SUMMARY

————— NET FLOW RATES ————— HEATERTRAY TEMP PRESSURE LIQUID VAPOR FEED PRODUCT DUTIES

DEG F PSIG LB-MOL/HR MM BTU/HR

———— ————— ———————— —————— ————— ————— ——————— —————————...

40R 355.9 33.00 5618.9 4301.4L 94.6551

PUMPAROUNDS

TRAY TEMP, DEG F LIQUID FRACTION ——————————— RATES ———————————

FROM TO FROM TO FROM TO LB-MOL/HR M LB/HR STD BBL/HR —— —— —————— ————— —————— ————— ————————— ———————— ——————————40 40 355.9 416.1 1.0000 .4108 7273.09 995.238 3569.48




Mapping the Tower Model

Typically, column models in simulators do not include the ancillary equipmentattached to the main tower. For example, a tower unit may really consist of

the following equipment:

• Main tower

• Overhead condenser

• Condenser accumulator

• Overhead split

• Reflux pump

• Overhead pump

• Overhead product sub-cooler

• Reboiler

• Bottoms split

• Bottoms product pump• Bottoms product heat exchanger

Both overhead and bottoms split are process stream splitters and thereforedo not represent any project component. In Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer, during mapping and sizing process, they are typically mapped as aquoted cost item with zero cost.

In addition, the equipment design could involve splitting the units into morethan one actual piece for reasons of economy. For example, in manyapplications, condensers are split into a precooler (which is typically an aircooler but also can be any other type of heat exchanger) and a trim cooler(typically a shell and tube heat exchanger).

Tower models (such as RADFRAC model in AspenPlus, COLUMN UNIT inPRO/II and COLUMN in HYSIM/HYSYS) can be mapped into any of thefollowing ten Aspen Process Economic Analyzer configurations:

• Standard - Single or Standard - Total

o Tower

o Condenser

o Condenser accumulator

o Overhead split

o Reflux pump

o Bottoms split

o Reboiler.• Full - Single

o Tower

o Condenser


o Overhead split

o Reflux pump

o Overhead pump




o Overhead product heat exchanger

o Bottoms split

o Reboiler

o Bottoms product pump

o Bottoms product heat exchanger

• Standard - Split or Standard – Split Totalo Tower

o Precooler

o Trimcooler


o Overhead split

o Reflux pump

o Bottoms split

o Reboiler

• Full - Split

o Towero Precooler

o Trimcoooler


o Overhead split

o Reflux pump

o Overhead pump


o Bottoms split

o Reboiler

o Bottoms product pumpo Bottoms product heat exchanger

• Standard - Total w/Circ.

o Tower

o Condenser


o Overhead split

o Reflux pump

o Bottoms split

o Reboiler

o Circulation pump• Full - Single w/Circ.

o Tower

o Condenser


o Overhead split

o Reflux pump




o Overhead pump


o Bottoms split

o Reboiler


o Bottoms product heat exchangero Circulation pump

• Standard – Split Total w/Circ.

o Tower

o Precooler

o Trimcooler


o Overhead split

o Reflux pump

o Bottoms split

o Reboilero Circulation pump

• Full - Split w/Circ.

o Tower

o Precooler

o Trimcoooler


o Overhead split

o Reflux pump

o Overhead pump

o Overhead product heat exchangero Bottoms split

o Reboiler


o Bottoms product heat exchanger

o Circulation pump

Refer to Tower Configurations in Chapter 4 for detailed flow diagrams.

These configurations should be regarded as the “maximum” model with allpotentialities satisfied The components actually developed depend upon theprocess conditions. For example, if the main tower model does not have a

condenser and a reboiler, then only the tower model is mapped.If the overhead product is cooler than the temperature of the fluid from thecondenser outlet, then an overhead exchanger is mapped.

A bottoms product exchanger is mapped only when the bottoms productstream has a different temperature from the temperature of the bottom stageof the tower.

In the case of split models, where the condenser duty is split into precoolerand trimcooler duties, the ratio of the duty split is obtained from the Design




Criteria specifications form. The overhead vapor stream flowing to theprecooler is assumed to be at dew point if the condensation temperature isnot provided.

Loading Tower Input Information

From the tower results in the report, the tables consisting of stagetemperatures, stage pressures, stage molar vapor flow rates and stage molarliquid flow rates are loaded in the mapping process.

For example, in the case of AspenPlus, the following tables in the RADFRAC block are loaded by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer in the mappingprocess:

Table 1: Stage temperature and Stage Pressures are loaded (Column 1 and2)

ENTHALPY STAGE TEMP. PRESSURE BTU/LBMOL HEAT DUTY

F PSI LIQUID VAPOR BTU/HR

1 149.27 20.000 -0.12156E+06 -42602. -.23509+082 223.45 22.000 -0.11895E+06 -87138.3 227.79 22.100 -0.11909E+06 -92519.4 230.39 22.200 -0.11918E+06 -95701.5 232.06 22.300 -0.11925E+06 -97662.6 233.25 22.400 -0.11931E+06 -98970.7 234.18 22.500 -0.11935E+06 -99924.8 234.98 22.600 -0.11939E+06 -0.10068E+069 235.72 22.700 -0.11942E+06 -0.10135E+06

10 236.74 22.800 -0.11941E+06 -0.10196E+06 45802+08

Table 2: Stage molar liquid flowrates and Stage molar vapor flowratesare loaded. (Column 1 and 2)

STAGE FLOW RATE FEED RATE PRODUCT RATELBMOL/HR LBMOL/HR LBMOL/HR

LIQUID VAPOR LIQUID VAPOR MIXED LIQUID VAPOR 1 1239. 430.0 .57657-01 430.00002 0.2571E+05 1669. .24001+053 0.2586E+05 2140.4 0.2595E+05 2286.5 0.2602E+05 2380.6 0.2606E+05 2444.7 0.2610E+05 2493.8 0.2614E+05 2532.9 0.2617E+05 2568.10 0.2357E+05 2604. .23571+05

Inlet and exit streams (and their stage numbers) are loaded in the mapping

step.

For example, in the case of a RADFRAC model for AspenPlus, the followingportion of the report is loaded in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer:

INLETS7 STAGE 2

OUTLETS - 8 STAGE 1

9 STAGE 10

When sizing information is present in the report, the mapping program loadsall the relevant information present in the sizing sections.




For example, in the case of a RADFRAC model for AspenPlus, the followingportion of the sizing report is loaded in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer forevery section:

Case : Tray tower sizing section

STARTING STAGE NUMBER 2

ENDING STAGE NUMBER 29

TRAY SPECIFICATIONS — — — — — — — — —TRAY TYPE SIEVETRAY SPACING METER 0.60960

***** SIZING RESULTS @ STAGE WITH MAXIMUM DIAMETER *****

COLUMN DIAMETER METER 4.00228

Case : Packed tower sizing section

STARTING STAGE NUMBER 2ENDING STAGE NUMBER 9

PACKING SPECIFICATIONS — — — — — — — — — — —PACKING TYPE BERL-SADDLEHETP FT 2.00000PACKING HEIGHT FT 16.0000

Determining Tower Process Conditions• Operating Temperature

The maximum temperature value for all the stages (given by column 1) isused as the operating temperature for the tower.

• Operating Pressure

The maximum pressure value for all the stages (given by column 2) isused as the operating pressure for the tower.

• Minimum Operating Pressure

The minimum pressure value for all the stages (given by column 2) isused as the minimum operating pressure for the tower.

• Design Pressure

The maximum value from the stage pressure profile is used for calculatingthe design pressure of the tower (that is, after applying the user-defined-design value from the design criteria file). When stage pressures are notavailable, the maximum value of pressure from all the inlet streams isused.

• Design TemperatureThe maximum value from the stage temperature profile is used forcalculating the design temperature of the tower (that is, after applying theuser-defined design value from the design criteria file). When stagetemperatures are not available, the maximum value of temperature fromall the inlet streams is used.

• Number of Stages




The number of theoretical stages is provided by the number of rows inTable 1. The final number is determined by taking into account condenserand reboiler (if they are provided). Also, the number of stages is affectedby the reboiler type depending on whether the reboiler simulated in thereport is kettle or thermosiphon.

For example, in the case of RADFRAC model for AspenPlus, consider the

following table:STAGE TEMP. PRESSURE BTU/LBMOL HEAT DUTY

F PSI LIQUID VAPOR BTU/HR

1 149.27 20.000 -0.12156E+06 -42602. -.23509+082 223.45 22.000 -0.11895E+06 -87138.3 227.79 22.100 -0.11909E+06 -92519.4 230.39 22.200 -0.11918E+06 -95701.5 232.06 22.300 -0.11925E+06 -97662.6 233.25 22.400 -0.11931E+06 -98970.7 234.18 22.500 -0.11935E+06 -99924.8 234.98 22.600 -0.11939E+06 -0.10068E+069 235.72 22.700 -0.11942E+06 -0.10135E+06

10 236.74 22.800 -0.11941E+06 -0.10196E+06 .45802+08

If the reboiler is kettle, then the number of theoretical stages is eight.

If the reboiler is thermosiphon (reboiler type is obtained from simulator),

then the number of theoretical stages is nine.

• Liquid Density

Density of liquid flowing inside the column is estimated from the density of

the inlet streams and the exit streams. If liquid density cannot be obtained

from the streams, the density of water is used as default.

• Vapor Density

Density of vapor flowing inside the column is estimated from the density

of the inlet streams and the exit streams. If vapor density cannot beobtained from the streams, the vapor density is estimated based on gaslaw. The vapor density is estimated at the minimum operating pressureand operating temperature.

• Average Molecular Weight of Vapor Inside Tower

Average vapor molecular weight is estimated from the inlet and exitstreams. The lowest molecular weight of the streams is assigned as thevapor molecular weight.

• Average Molecular Weight of Liquid Inside Tower

Average liquid molecular weight is the maximum molecular weight for theinlet and exit streams.

Sizing Procedure

The sizing procedure varies depending on the type of internals desired andthe simulator model used for the operation. The procedure described belowgives a description of the actual steps used by the sizing module to estimatethe sizes for the different types of trayed and packed towers.




Trayed Tower Sizing

General Procedure (Followed for all tray internals):

1 The type (class) of the fluid in the column is used to estimate some of theproperties in designing the tray internals, such as surface tension,foaming tendency, deration factor if they are not specified in the

simulation output report or on the Design Criteria specifications form.

You can specify the overall column tray efficiency in the Tray Efficiency boxon the Design Criteria specifications form. If the value is not provided,then it is estimated using Lockett’s modification of the O’ConnellCorrelation. This correlation is based on tests on actual plant columns andhas been the standard of the industry.

The tray efficiency is used to calculate the actual number of stages requiredfor the separation.

EOC

= 0.492 ( μL α) -0.245

where:

EOC = efficiency, O’Connell Correlationμ

L = viscosity of liquid, CPOISE

α = relative volatility of key component

A default value of 1.5 is used for the relative volatility of key components thatyou can modify on the Design Criteria specifications form. The liquid viscosityis either directly obtained from the report or estimated from the fluidclassification.

• Once the internal height of the column is estimated (based on the actualnumber of trays), additional height for vapor disengagement and liquidreturn is based on your Design Criteria specifications.

• In general, the number of stages provided by the simulator report

represent the theoretical number of stages. However, if detailed design ofthe tower has been done by the simulator using tray efficiency, then thenumber of trays are actual trays. If Aspen Process Economic Analyzerfinds that the number of trays are actual, then it uses the value toestimate the height and does not add any additional tray efficiency.

Using Tower Sizing Information

When a simulator report provides sizing information, Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer tries to use as much of the information as possible in the finaldesign. When multiple sections are present in the report, the informationused by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer depends on the equipment towhich the model is mapped.

Single Diameter Trayed Tower (TW TRAYED)

If multiple sections are present with different diameters and tray spacings,then the largest values of the diameters and tray spacings are used for theactual design of the tower.




Double Diameter Trayed Tower (DTT TRAYED)

For double diameter trayed tower, the two largest diameters in the sectionalreport are used in the design. Once the tower is divided into two sections(based on diameter), the value of the tray spacing for each section is basedon the stage numbers present in each section. The largest values of trayspacing for each section are used to estimate the tower height.

For example, for AspenPlus, assume the following sizing information isobtained from the report after completing the loading process.

Section 1:

Diameter = 5 FEET

Tray Spacing = 24 INCHES

Stages = 2 to 4

Section 2:

Diameter = 6 FEET


Stages = 5 to 7

Section 3:

Diameter = 8 FEET


Stages = 8 to 10

The sizing program will design a double diameter tower with the following

dimensions:Top SectionDiameter

= 6 FEET

Top Section TraySpacing

= 30 INCHES

Top Section Stages = 2 to 7

Bottom SectionDiameter

= 8 FEET

Bottom SectionTray Spacing

= 18 INCHES

Bottom SectionStages

= 8 to 10

The program estimates the cross sectional area for each stage. Then, themaximum value is used to design the single diameter tower. In case of doublediameter tower, the program estimates the diameter for the bottom sectionand the top section based on the cross sectional area estimated for eachstage.




Sieve Tray Design

The capacity factor, CSB, is evaluated based on the correlation developed forentrainment flooding by Kister and Haas. Jeronimo et. al correlation is used toestimate the clear liquid height in the spray regime. Strictly, the Jeronimo andSwistowski correlation predicts the clear liquid height at the transition from

the froth to the spray regime. However, empirical evidence has shown thatclear liquid height in the spray regime is much the same as clear liquid heightat that transition.

The CSB estimated at the flooding point is used to evaluate the flooding vaporvelocity.

The bubbling area is calculated based on flood velocity, the derating factorand the safety factor. (Column default design is 90% of flood.)

Downcomer liquid velocity is based on the foaming tendency of the fluid andtray spacing. Foaming tendency can be specified on the Design Criteriaspecifications form.

The downcomer cross-sectional area is based on the downcomer velocity and

the maximum liquid flow inside the tower.

The total tower cross-sectional area is calculated by adding the bubbling areaand the downcomer area.

The diameter of the tower is obtained from the cross-sectional area byrounding the area up to the next half foot. The minimum diameter for thetower is 1.5 FEET.

Valve Tray Design

Valve tray sizing is based on the V-type Ballast trays produced by Glitsch. Thesystem factors are estimated based on the fluid classification performed on

the fluid flowing through the column. The tray diameter is evaluated for eithersingle pass trays or two pass trays. It is based on 24 INCHES tray spacingand 80% of flood.

Bibliography

“Distillation Design”, by Henry Z. Kister.

“Applied Process Design For Chemical And Petrochemical Plant”, Volumes 1and 3, by Ernest E. Ludvig.

“Standard Handbook of Engineering Calculations”, by Tyler G. Hicks

“Chemical Engineers HandBook”, by Perry and Chilton, 6th Edition.

Bubble-Cap Tray Design

The allowable vapor velocity and the corresponding diameter for bubble-captrays have been represented by the Jersey Critical formula whichcorresponds to the work by Souder and Brown for column flooding.

( ) 21

/0956.0v Lv

K W D ρ ρ =




where:

D = Diameter, FEET

W Bv B = vapor flow rate, LB/H

ρ BLB = liquid density, LB/CF

ρ Bv B = vapor density, LB/CF

The factor K depends on the tray spacing as follows: Tray Spacing, INCHES 18 24 30 30+K 3.4 4.2 4.7 5.0

Packed Tower Design

Packed tower design is accomplished for both random and structuredpackings. The various types of packings supported by the system aredescribed in the Icarus Reference.

Kister and Gill flood point correlation is used to estimate pressure drop at theflood point as a function of packing factor alone.

ΔΡFL = .155 (F

p0.7)

where:

ΔΡFL = Pressure drop at flood point

Fp Packing factor

Note: You can provide the value for the packing factor on the Design Criteriaspecifications form. The system defaults are used for each of the differenttypes of packings if you do not enter a value.

Once this pressure drop is known, the flood velocity is calculated using thelatest version of GPDC (Generalized Pressure Drop Correlation) charts forboth random and structured packings.

HETP Prediction

You can provide the HETP value on the Design Criteria specifications form. Ifthe value is not specified, rules of thumb prediction reported in literature areused to predict the packed tower efficiency.

For random packing columns, the following rules are used for estimating HETP

(FEET):HETP = 1.5 d

p

d p = Packing diameter, INCHES

HETP > DT for D

T < 2 FEET

For estimating the structured packing efficiency, the following rule of thumb isused:

HETP,INCHES

= 1200 /ap + 4




ap = Packing surface area per unit volume, SF/CF

System Defaults

The following system default values may be modified on the Design Criteriaspecifications form and Component Specifications form:

Trayed Tower Defaults

Tray Type = Sieve

Tray Spacing = 24 inches

Flooding Factor = 80 %

Foaming Tendency = Moderate

Packed Tower Defaults

Packing Type = Random

Packing Material = 1.0PPR

Specific area per unitvolume for thepacking

= 0.75 SF/CF

General Defaults

Top vapordisengagementheight

= 4 FEET

Bottom sump height = 6 FEET

SimSci’s SHORTCUT Column Operation

In case of SHORTCUT column operation, the simulator provides only theminimum reflux ratio for the distillation process. To design the tower, theratio of the operating reflux ratio and minimum reflux ratio has to beprovided. The system uses the default value of 2.0 for the ratio. The ratio canbe changed on the Design Criteria specifications form. If the simulatorreport does not contain information (number of trays) for the operating refluxratio, the tower sizing program returns to the system without performingsizing for the tower.

Vessels

Horizontal Vessels

The following graphic shows a typical horizontal vessel.




The following design variables are specified on the Design Criteriaspecifications form:

• Residence Time

• Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio



• Average Liquid Particle Diameter

• Design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity

• Separation Factor

• Vapor area /cross sectional area

• Separation Factor Multiplier• Minimum Boot Length (used in Horizontal Vessel Design)

• Minimum Boot diameter

• Boot Leg Liquid Velocity

Design Requirements

The maximum number of exit streams is three; two of the streams can beliquid.

Calculating Diameter

Vessel diameter is based on the maximum allowable vapor velocity inside theseparator, to reduce the liquid entrainment in the vapor.

The following two methods are available in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer(chosen from the Design Criteria specifications) to obtain vapor velocity.

• Liquid Entrainment Method

• Particle size separation method.




Calculating Vapor Velocity

Liquid Entrainment Method

The maximum allowable vapor velocity, to reduce liquid entrainment isobtained as a function of liquid and vapor density and the Separation Factor,

which itself is a polynomial function of vapor and liquid density and vapor andliquid flowrates. The polynomial equation was based on 5% of liquid entrainedin the vapor and is valid for the range (defined below) of 0.006 to 5.0. AspenProcess Economic Analyzer allows you to override the computed value ofSeparation Factor.

W = l_mfr/v_mfr * sqrt (v_rho/l_rho)

X = ln (SF)

k_v = EXP(A + BX + CX^2 + DX^3 + EX^4)

K = k_v * k_vm

v_m = K * sqrt ((l_rho - v_rho)/v_rho)

where:l_mfr = Light Liquid Mass Flow rate

v_mfr = Vapor Mass Flow rate

l_rho = Light Liquid Density

v_rho = Vapor Density

K = System Factor

SF = Separation Factor

k_v = Polynomial Function of SF

k_vm = Separation Factor Multiplier

A = -1.877478097

B = -0.8145804597

C = -0.1870744085D = -0.0145228667

E = -0.0010148518

The above relation for Separation Factor is valid for a “W”(SF) between 0.006and 5.0. If “W” falls outside the range, the sizing program gives a warningmessage and the limiting value of W is used to estimate Separation Factor.

For example, if calculated value of W is 0.001, then the value used in thecorrelation is 0.006. If the calculated value of W is 10.0, then the value usedin the correlation is 6.0.

Particle Size Separation Method

This method estimates the disengagement velocity of liquid bubble in thevapor space. The maximum allowable vapor velocity is determined as apercentage of the disengagement velocity.

Liquid drops falling in gases appear to be spherical up to a Reynolds numberof 100. Large drops (greater than 0.3125 INCHES) will deform, with aresulting increase in drag, and in some cases shatter.




For estimating vapor velocity, the liquid bubbles are assumed to remain inspherical shape.

The terminal settling velocity can be obtained for different flow conditions.

For laminar flow (K < 3):

v = g * (rho_l - rho_v) *(dp^ 2)/ (18.0 * mu_v)

and for turbulent region:

v = 1.74 (g * dp * (rho_l - rho_v) / rho_v)^0.5

where:

K = dp * (g * rho_v * (rho_l - rho_v)/ (mu_v^2) )^0.33

v = disengagement velocity

g = gravitational constan

rho_l = liquid density

rho_v = vapor density

dp = liquid bubble diameter

mu_v = gas viscosity (assumed to be 0.05 LB/FT/H)

The design velocity is then estimated by the following equation:

v_m = v * f

where:

v_m = disengagement velocity

f = design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity

v = disengagement

Calculating vessel cross-sectional area

Vapor cross sectional area is estimated based on the vapor velocity and thevapor volumetric flow. The vapor cross sectional area is divided by the ratio ofvapor area/cross sectional area to get the total required cross sectional area.

v_csa = v_vol/v_m

t_csa = v_csa/r_vc

where:v_csa = Vapor area

v_vol = Vapor volumetric flow

r_vc = Vapor area/cross sectional area

t_csa = Vessel cross sectional area

Estimate Vessel diameter based on vapor flow:




D_v = sqrt ((t_csa * 4) /π)

where:

D_v = Vessel Diameter based on vapor flow

= 3.14

Estimate vessel diameter based on liquid holdup volume and user-specifiedvalue of L/D ratio.

The maximum value of diameter calculated using vapor velocity and liquidholdup is used for final design.

Calculating Length

Vessel liquid holdup volume is obtained based on the light liquid flowrate andthe residence time. The vessel length is then calculated as given below:

l_vol = l_vfr * r_tL = (l_vol * 4) / (π * D^2 * (1 - r_vc))

where:

l_vol = Liquid holdup volume

L = Length

l_vfr = Light liquid volumetric flowrate

r_t = Residence time

r_vc = r_vc

Checking L/D Ratio

For all liquid vessels L/D is calculated as follows:

If P <= 250 PSIA, then L/D= 3

If 250 < P <= 500 PSIA, then L/D = 4

If P > 500 PSIA, then L/D= 5

After estimating the length (L) and diameter (D) of the vessel, the ratio ofL/D is compared with the Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio specified onthe Design Criteria specifications form.

Estimating Boot Dimensions

Boot dimensions will be estimated only if the exit streams contain a heavierliquid phase. Boot diameter is based on the heavier liquid phase volume andboot liquid velocity.

Boot volume (bt_vol) = hl_vfr * r_t

Boot cross section area(bt_csa)

= bt_vol / hl_vel




Boot diameter (d) = sqrt (4.0 * bt_csa /π)

Boot length (l) = (bt_vol * 4)/(π * d^2)

where:

hl_vfr = heavy liquid volumetric flow rate

hl_vel = heavy liquid velocity

l = boot length

d = boot diameter

Vertical Vessels

The following graphic shows a typical vertical vessel.

The following design variables are specified on the Design Criteriaspecifications form:

• Residence Time




• Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio



• Average liquid particle diameter

• Design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity

• Separation Factor• Minimum Disengagement Height

• Minimum height above the mist eliminator

• Height of Mist Eliminator

Vessel diameter is calculated in the same manner as for horizontal vessels.The default value of Separation Factor Multiplier is available in the DesignCriteria specifications.

Calculating Vessel Height

Vessel liquid holdup volume is based on the light liquid flowrate and the

residence time. The liquid height in the vessel is then calculated and theadditional height is added to obtain the overall vessel height.

l_vol = l_vfr * r_t

l_ht = (l_vol * 4) / (π * D^2)

h = LLLTap_ht + l_ht+ HLLTap_ht + d_ht + me_ht + mea_ht

where:

l_vol = liquid holdup volume

l_vfr = light liquid volumetric flowrate

r_t = residence time

l_ht=

liquid height based on residence timeLLLTap_ht = minimum height between low liquid level tap and

tangent line (design criteria)

ddHLLTap_ht = height between inlet nozzle and high liquid leveltap (desig criteria)

d_ht = disengagement height

me_ht = mist eliminator height

mea_ht = Height above the mist eliminator

If the calculated l_ht is less than the minimum height between the taps,specified in the design criteria, then the minimum height is used.

Checking L/D ratio

For all liquid

After estimating the length (L) and diameter (D) of the vessel, the ratio ofL/D is compared with the Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio specified onthe Design Criteria specifications form.



7 Piping and Instrumentation Models 263

7 Piping and InstrumentationModels

Interconnecting VolumetricP&ID LinesConnect pipelines between components in a Aspen Capital Cost Estimatorproject, estimate the project, and create piping line list report for connectedlines with the same line tag.

Open an Aspen Capital Cost Estimatorproject

Open a new or existing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project, add equipmentcomponents to the new project.




Run Interconnect Piping Lines

To run interconnect piping lines:

1 On the main tool bar, click Run.

2 Click Interconnect Piping Lines to launch the GUI as shown below:

The GUI displays five lists. All equipment and its associated pipelines in theproject are displayed in two groups:

• Connect From

• Connect To

The first two lists display equipment and piping lines in the Connect From group.

The third list displays all connected lines.

The fourth and fifth lists display piping lines and equipment in the Connect

To group.




3 On the list in the Connect From and Connect To groups, click thedesired equipment item.

The line lists will then display only the lines corresponding to the selectedequipments. When the mouse hovers over an equipment or a line, the tooltipin the list provides additional information related to this item. The relatedadditional information is also displayed in the bottom text area when clickingon an equipment or a line.

Connecting Piping Lines

To connect two lines:

1 Select the Auto Generate Line Tag check box, or, in the Line Tag field,type a unique line tag.

2 In the Connect From line list, click a piping line.

3 In the Connect To line list, click the desired line.

4 Click Connect.




5 Repeat Steps 1-4 above to connect all the desired lines between theequipment items.

Note: Use Filter to display all disconnected equipment or all disconnectedlines.

Disconnecting Piping Lines

To disconnect all existing pipeline connections betweenall equipments:

• Click Disconnect All.

All connected lines will be removed from middle list and will be displayed in

the respective line list.

To disconnect a specific line between the two equipments:

• In the middle list, click a line item; then click Disconnect.




Renaming a Line Tag

To rename a line tag:

1 On the Connecting list, click the desired item.

2 In Line Tag field, edit the line tag.

3 Click Rename Line Tag.




Saving All Connections and (optionally)

Updating the Project

To save all the connections and update the project:

• Click the Update Project.

To save all the connections without updating the project:

• Click the Save Mapping & Exit.

All connections on the GUI are saved, but the project is not updated.

Getting the Connected Line List Report

To get the connected line list report:

1 Evaluate the above project.

2 Click View | Capital Cost View.

The Select Report Type to View dialog box appears.

3 On the Select Report Type to View dialog box, click Interactive

Reports; then click OK

The reporter is active.

4 Click Excel reports.

5 Click Other reports | Discipline | Pipe:

o Connected Line List -or-

o Model Line List

as shown below:

6 Click Run Report.




The report is shown below:

Connected Line List

Model Line List

Mapping Streams to PipingLinesNote: For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator with Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer Overlay project, see the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer userguide ( AspenProcessEconAnalyzerV7_0-Usr.pdf ).

In an existing or new Aspen Process Economic Analyzer (or Aspen CapitalCost Estimator with Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Overlay) project, you

can assign stream physical properties to lines in order to size the linediameter.

To Map Streams to Lines:

1 Open an existing Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Aspen Capital CostEstimator (with Aspen Process Economic Analyzer overlay) project, orcreate a new project.

2 On the main menu, click Run | Map Stream to Lines to launch the GUI.




The GUI displays four lists. All the streams are displayed in the STREAM listbox. All equipments and their associated pipelines in the project are displayedin the last two list boxes. The middle list displays all mapped streams andlines.

3 On the Equipment list, click an equipment item.

The line list will then display only the lines corresponding to the selected

equipment. When the mouse hovers over an equipment or a line or a stream,the tooltip in the list provides additional information related to this item. Therelated additional information is also displayed in the bottom text area whenclicking on an equipment item, a line, or a stream.




Mapping Streams to Piping Lines

To map a stream to a pipeline:

1 On the STREAM list, click a stream.

2 On the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator | Line list, click a piping line.

3 Click Map.

Mapped streams and lines are displayed in the middle list.

4 Repeat steps 1-3 above to map all the desired streams and lines.

Note: Use Filter to display all unmapped equipment and all unmapped linesif needed.

Un-mapping Streams to Piping Lines

To Un-map all existing mapped streams and lines:

• Click Un-map all.




To Un-map a specific stream and line:

1 On the Mapping list, click a mapped item.

The Map button becomes Un-Map.

2 Click Un-Map.

The selected items are removed from the middle list and go back to theirrespective lists.

Using the Auto-Map Option

You can set the Auto-Map option in two ways:

• On the Preference tab

• From the Mapping GUI

To use the Auto-Map Option using the Preference tab:

The Auto Map button will be unavailable in the mapping GUI if on the Tools| Options | Preferences | Process tab the Auto Map Streams to Lines check box is selected.

The Pre-auto-mapped streams-lines will be displayed in the middle list box ofthe Map Stream to lines GUI.




To make the Auto Map button available:

• On the Tools | Options | Preferences | Process tab, clear the Auto

Map Streams to Lines check box.

To use the Auto-Map Option from the Mapping GUI:

• On the Map Stream to Lines dialog box, click Auto Map to automaticallymap streams to lines.

To save all the stream mappings to lines and update theproject:

• Click Update Project.




To save all the stream mappings to lines without updatingthe project:

• Click Save Mapping & Exit.



8 Developing and Using Cost Libraries 276

8 Developing and Using CostLibraries

The Libraries view on the Palette arranges libraries in a tree-structure. Mostof the libraries listed access project specifications (explained in Chapter 3).

The Cost Libraries are unique, however, in that they comprise collections ofparticular cost items that you can add as project components. The costlibraries are customizable; you can add items to the libraries provided, as wellas add your own libraries.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer includes two types of cost libraries:Equipment Model Library (EML) and Unit Cost Library (UCL). Each library typemay include one or more library files, which in turn may contain one or morelibrary items, each representing a particular type of cost item.

Equipment Model Library (EML)

The EML is intended to store custom equipment items, for which you createcomponent specification forms. In a project, you can add an item from theEML as a component and fill out the form that you earlier created.

The library can store a generic equipment item that comes in discrete sizes,such as an extruder, or an equipment item that follows a continuouscost-capacity relationship such as linear, semi-log or log-log.

Unit Cost Library (UCL)

The UCL is intended to store and retrieve direct costs and installationman-hours, which are based on a simple unit of measure (for example, thecost of a material item or installation man-hours per unit of area, per unit oflength, per item, etc.). Costs can also be stored in a library for indirect itemssuch as project management man-hours per month, crane rental (plant hire)on a daily, weekly, monthly basis, etc.




For one-of-a-kind cost items not worth storing in a library, the unit costlibrary may be used to create a dummy item for recall and modification in aproject. The dummy item is stored in the library with as little data as possible.This can be retrieved and modified in as much detail as required wheneveryou need a one-time cost added into a project.

Developing and Using anEquipment Model Library (EML)

Creating an EML

The instructions in this sub-section show you how to create an EML. Theinstructions in the sub-sections that follow this one, which show you how toadd an item to an EML and then add the item to a project, use a singleexample that can be added either to an Inch-Pound EML that you created or

to one of the two Inch-Pound EML’s provided.

To create an EML:

1 With no project open, go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view.

2 Expand Cost Libraries in the tree-structure, and then expand EquipmentModel Library.

The libraries are divided into Inch-Pound and Metric.

3 To create a library for use in projects with an Inch-Pound units of measurebasis, as in the example used in these instructions, right-click Inch-Pound; then click New on the pop-up menu.

The New Equipment Model Library dialog box appears.




4 Enter a file name (required) for the EML and a brief description (optional),then click OK.

An empty Library dialog box appears.

You can now add items to the new library.

Adding an Item to an EML

The instructions below for defining and using an EML item follow a singleexample from item creation through the addition of the item to a project.

Using the example provided will define the item in such a way that itautomatically generates a foundation and/or electrical power supply bulks.

To add an item to an EML:

Note: If you just added a library, the Library dialog box is displayed, andyou can skip to Step 2. If not, follow these steps:

1 Go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view.




2 Expand Cost Libraries, Equipment Libraries, and either Inch-Pound orMetric. (If following the example provided, select Inch-Pound.)

3 Right-click on the library to which you want to add an item, and then clickModify on the pop-up menu.

4 Click Add on the Library dialog box.

5 Enter a Reference ID for the item in the Add Item dialog box.

The one- to six-character alphanumeric Reference ID uniquely identifiesthe library item being added. The ID is used to sort and search for libraryitems. The first character must be a letter.

6 Click OK.7 Enter the descriptive data for a the item in the Develop Equipment Model

Library form. If following the example, enter the data exactly as shownbelow. Be sure to correctly enter the sizing parameters, CAPFLOW andPWRDRVR; Aspen Process Economic Analyzer knows to use GPM (or L/Sfor METRIC) and HP, respectively, for these parameters.

Sizing method: the datais in the form of either acontinuous curve(linear, log-log orsemi-log) or a set ofdiscrete tabular values.When an equipmentmodel library item isretrieved into a project,the specified size forthe project componentis used to develop theappropriate cost,man-hours and weightfrom the library data.




8 Click OK to save your specifications.

The new item appears on the Library dialog box, which you can now close.

Adding an EML Item to a Project Scenario

To add an EML item to a project scenario:

1 Open the project to which you want to add the EML item. For the purposesof this example, you can use either an existing or newly created US/I-Pbased project.

2 In Project Explorer (Project view), right-click on the area in which to addthe EML item, and then click Add Project Component on the pop-up menu.

3 On the Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box, specify a projectcomponent name for the item.

4 Click Equipment Model Library and click OK.

5 On the Select an Equipment Model Library File dialog box, click theEML to which you added the item; then Click OK.

6 On the Select an Equipment Model Library Item dialog box, select theitem you added; then click OK.




7 Enter your specifications for the item at the Component Specificationsform, as shown below. Note that the Size parameters CAPFLOW andPWRDRVR are included on the form.

8 Click OK to apply and save the specifications.

The item will now be included in project evaluations.

Developing and Using a UnitCost Library (UCL)The instructions below use as an example a library of asbestos abatement(ASBABT) costs and man-hours. This example has been selected becauseenvironmental remediation data is difficult to model, since costs and




man-hours tend to vary greatly based on site conditions and project types.Items of a unique and/or variable nature are ideal for storing in a UCL.

The instructions take this example through the following stages: librarycreation, adding items to the library, adding a library item to a project as acomponent, and forming an assembly in the project out of multiple UCLitems.

Creating a Unit Cost Library

To create a unit cost library:

1 With no project open, go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view.

2 Expand Cost Libraries in the tree-structure, and then expand Unit CostLibrary.

The libraries are divided into Inch-Pound and Metric.

3 To create a library for use in projects with an Inch-Pound units of measurebasis, as in the ASBABT example used in these instructions, right-click onInch-Pound and click New on the pop-up menu.

4 In the New Unit Cost Library dialog box, enter a file name (required) forthe UCL and a brief description (optional).




5 Click OK to create the new UCL.

An empty Library dialog box appears.

You can now add items to the new UCL.

Adding an Item to a UCL

To add items to a UCL:

1 If you just added a library, the Library dialog box is displayed, and youmay skip to Step 2. If not, follow these steps:

a. Go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view.b. Expand Cost Libraries, Unit Cost Libraries, and either Inch-Pound orMetric.

c. Right-click on the library to which you want to add an item, and thenclick Modify on the pop-up menu.

2 Click Add on the Library dialog box.

3 Enter a Reference ID for the item in the Add Item dialog box.




The one- to six-character alphanumeric Reference ID uniquely identifies thelibrary item being added. The ID is used to sort and search for library items.The first character must be a letter.

4 Click OK.

5 In the Develop Unit Cost Library form, enter information for the new item.

Note: Costs for the item will be allocated to the specified Code of Account(COA). See ICARUS Reference, Chapter 34, for COA definitions.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer uses the Material Cost Per Unit and LaborCost Per Unit to cost the item in an estimate. If Labor Hours Per Unit isspecified and Labor Cost Per Unit is left blank, Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer will calculate the labor cost using the project wage rates at the timeof the estimate.

The Unit of Measure can be designated for “each” or by any appropriate unit(i.e., “1000 SF” ). Be sure to sufficiently describe the item so that you knowwhat the unit costs include when the item is retrieved at some future date.The quantity is entered when the library item is retrieved into a project.

The Date and Source are for your reference and are not transferred into anestimate.

6 When done entering specifications for the item, click OK.

To add a set of items as in the ASBABT example, repeat the process (Steps2-4) to add the following items in addition to the one shown in the previousgraphic.

Reference No. Item Description Code of

Account Mat’l Cost PerUnit

Labor CostPer Unit

Unit ofMeasure

Date ofquotation




AAB200 PolyethyleneSheeting

800 .021 .004 SF 04APR01

AAB201 Duct Tape ( 300’ roll ) 800 3.50 ROLL 04APR01

AAB202 Adhesive Spray (60’ /can)

800 6.00 CAN 04APR01

AAB300 Decontami- nation Shower

800 300.00 2 EACH 04APR01

AAB301 Neg Air PressureSystem

800 300.00 2 EACH 04APR01

AAB400 Lighting FixtureRemoval

800 .01 EACH 04APR01

After the above are added, the Library dialog box will appear as shownbelow.

7 When done adding items to the UCL, click Close on the Library dialog box.

Adding a UCL Item to a ProjectTo add a single UCL item to a project:

1 Open the project to which you want to add the UCL item. To add an itemfrom the ASBABT library developed as an example in the previousinstructions, you can open either an existing or newly created US/I-P

based project.2 In Project Explorer (Project view), right-click on the area in which to add

the UCL item, and then click Add Project Component on the pop-up menu.

3 On the Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box, specify a projectcomponent name for the item.




4 Select Unit Cost Library and click OK.

5 On the Select a Unit Cost Library File dialog box, select the UCL towhich you added the item and click OK.

6 On the Select a Unit Cost Library Item dialog box, select the item youadded and click OK.




7 On the Component Specifications form, click the Option drop-downbutton and click Unit Cost Items.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer retrieves the unit cost data you set up inLibraries.

Creating an Assembly of UCL Items

This section shows how to add several items from the library to form anassembly. In the example, the items from the ASBABT library are added toform an Asbestos Abatement Area Preparation Assembly.

To create an assembly of UCL items in a project:

1 In Project Explorer (Project view), right-click on the area in which to addthe UCL item, and then click Add Project Component on the pop-up menu.




2 On the Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box, enter as theproject component name a description of the assembly.

3 Click Unit Cost Library and click OK.

4 At the Select a Unit Cost Library File dialog box, select the UCLcontaining the first item to add to the assembly and click OK.

5 At the Select a Unit Cost Library Item dialog box, select the first itemto add to the assembly and click OK.




6 On the Component Specifications form, click the Option drop-downbutton and select Unit Cost Items.

7 Click Add.

8 On the Select a Unit Cost Library File dialog box, select the UCLcontaining the next item to add to the assembly and click OK.

9 On the Select a Unit Cost Library Item dialog box, select the next itemto add to the assembly and click OK.




10 Repeat the process of adding items until the form contains columns for allthe items in the assembly.

11 After entering quantities for the items click OK.

The assembly is listed as one project component on the Project Explorer(Project view) and the List view.

You can now run an evaluation on the item (see page 496H462 for instructions).An Item Report would summarize total costs and man-hours, as well as listeach assembly item’s costs and man-hours.




Working with Cost LibrariesEquipment model and unit cost libraries share the functions described in thissection.

Copying a Library ItemWhen adding a library item similar to one that already exists, it is easier tocopy the existing library item and modify the necessary specifications.

To copy a library item:

1 Highlight a library item in the Library dialog box and click Copy.

2 Enter a Reference ID for the new item.

The one- to six-character alphanumeric Reference ID uniquely identifiesthe library item being added. The ID is used to sort and search for libraryitems. The first character must be a letter.

3 Click OK. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer adds the new item with all thesame data as the original — only the Reference ID has changed.

Deleting a Library Item

When a library item is no longer useful, it can be removed from the libraryfile.

To delete a library item:

1 Highlight a library item in the Library dialog box and click Delete.

A dialog box appears to confirm the delete.

2 Click Yes to delete the selected library item.

-or-

Click No to retain the library item in the library file.

Escalating Library Costs

Library items contain costs which change over time due to inflation.Escalating library costs bring the library costs up to date.

To escalate library costs:

1 Click Escalate on the Library dialog box.




The Escalate Costs dialog box appears.

2 Enter the escalation specifications.

In this field type

New Base Date: The date of escalation or the dateat which the prices are current.

Material Escalation: Amount by which to escalatematerial costs.

Labor Escalation: Amount by which to escalatelabor costs. Since equipmentmodel libraries only includesetting man-hours, not laborcosts, this field only appearswhen escalating unit costlibraries.

3 Click OK to escalate all the library items in the library file.

Importing a Cost Library

You can import UCL files, which have the extension “.LIB”, and EML files,which have the extension “.EML”, from elsewhere on your computer ornetwork.

To import a cost library:

1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click on the appropriate Units ofMeasure basis (Inch-Pound or Metric), and then click Import on thepop-up menu.




2 In the Select a File for Import window, locate the file and then clickOpen.

The file is now included in the Palette and its items can be added as AspenProcess Economic Analyzer project components.

Duplicating a Cost Library

To duplicate a cost library:

1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click on the library you wish toduplicate, and then click Duplicate on the pop-up menu.

2 Enter a file name and description (optional) for the new library.




Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Library dialog box for the newLibrary, which contains the same items as the original. You can add, modify,or delete the items without affecting the original.

Deleting a Cost Library

To delete a cost library:

• In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click on the library to be deleted,and then click Delete on the pop-up menu.



9 Changing Plant Capacity and Location 295

9 Changing Plant Capacityand Location

Two modules within Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, Analyzer Scale-upModule (ASM) and Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM) let you evaluate

alternate plant capacities and locations.

Analyzer Scale-up Module (ASM) When you change plant capacity,Analyzer re-sizes each project component to your desired plant capacity.Unique expert system rules, based on engineering principles, provide thebasis for revising the size of every project component in the process facilitythat is implicated in stream flows, as well as the size of other plant facilitycomponents in the plant layout, including process and utility componentsinside battery limits (ISBL) and outside battery limits (OSBL), associatedinstallation bulks, piping, cable runs, buildings, structures, pipe racks, andsite improvements. Quoted costs and installation hours, and in someinstances, numbers of identical items (for example, the number of trees alonga fenceline) are also subject to change on changing production capacity.

Changing Plant CapacityChanging the production capacity affects not only every stream flow, but thesize, and in some cases, the number of project components. The AnalyzerScale-up Module (ASM) automatically examines each element of a project,applies a set of scale-up rules unique to that element and recreates the entireplant description according to the new production capacity.

ASM contains rules for each of the hundreds of Aspen Icarus projectcomponents. Rules are based on engineering principles for elements that are

directly linked to production capacity. For other elements that are footprintoriented such as building and structures, rules based on heuristics areapplied.

When the scaled project is evaluated, design quantities that are developed forthe newly sized components are designed to meet the needs of a project.Further, revisions to P&IDs and similar user adjustments contained in thebaseline project are also treated in the same way. The idea is to design ascaled project as it is intended to be built. This methodology eliminates the




need for applying a factor to the baseline plant cost to scale it up or down.Given a new capacity, ASM recreates the entire plant.

The ASM process is automatic and rapid. ASM revises sizes of components tomeet a revised capacity and the project evaluation engines do the difficult,time-consuming evaluation work. Users find ASM performs its re-sizingoperation results to be similar to engineering design methods with the addedbenefit of much reduced time and resources. Further, equal confidence can beapplied to evaluation results before and after using ASM as rules arediscipline-based and the before and after evaluation processes are identical.

To change plant capacity:

1 Open your baseline project and save it under a new scenario name thatreflects the new capacity. This will ensure that your baseline projectremains intact, separate and apart from your about-to-be scaled project.

2 On the Run menu, click Decision Analyzer or click the “A” button on thetoolbar.

The Decision Analyzer dialog box appears.

3 Select the Change Plant Capacity by (5-600%) check box.

4 Enter the desired percentage adjustment or select it using the Up/Downarrow buttons. For example, if you need to revise the capacity by a value




beyond 600% to 700%, scale your project twice. For this, the Evaluate

Project check box should be cleared. Then you can split the desired700% into two parts: first use 350%, and on completion, scale it again at200%.

5 Click OK to initiate the Analyzer Scale-up Module.

6 Upon completion, save the scaled project.

Analyzer Scale-Up Module

(ASM)

How ASM Works

Scale-up of a project to a new production capacity is a two-step process.

1. The Aspen Scale-up Module is invoked. The ASM processor

(a) analyzes each specification in your project

(b) applies the appropriate scale-up rule

(c) revises the specification to a new value

(d) moves on to the next specification

You can follow the progress of this phase by noting the item names in the

display at the bottom of your screen.

2. The project is evaluated. This phase performs the designs, develops quantities,

hours, costs, etc., and prepares the basic set of reports for your project at thenew capacity. On completion of this step, you can proceed to prepare special

reports and perform other analyses on your newly scaled project.

Save the project after the scale-up operation.

Scale-Up Rule Set

Analyzer contains rules for hundreds of components and cost elements thatare based on:

• engineering design principles for scale-up of all process equipment,stream flows, quoted costs and hours, and so on.

• heuristics for plant items that are based on footprint and plot planThe current rule set in some instances modifies the number of items ratherthan change sizes, as in the simple example of trees along a fence line, wherethe number of trees would be revised rather than the size of each tree. In thecurrent rule set, there is no automatic provision for changing the number ofproject components.




Limiting Conditions

It is possible that on extreme capacity scale-ups, sizes of certain equipmentor bulk items may surpass a system limiting value. In this case, an errorcondition would be issued. The user would then examine the scaled model forthe particular item(s) and revise the size and number of out-of-range items

accordingly, as an item in an error condition would be excluded from theestimate.

Scale-up Candidates

ASM rules apply to the following types of project information:

1 Area specs: distances, dimensions, cost per unit weight

2 Project Component specs: specific rules based on item type andspecification, typically size dimension, capacity, power and occasionallynumber of items

Note: Several sanitary process equipment items associated with batch foodprocessing are not scaled.

3 Installation specs: quoted costs, hours and numeric dimension specs forpiping, duct, civil, steel, electrical, insulation, paint. Text-based sizes suchas pipe schedule, wire size, etc. are symbolic and are not scaled.

4 Project Component Quoted Cost and Hours: While ASM has rules forquoted cost and hours, the ASM rule may not be the best for your type ofitem. Here, it’s better to apply a % Adjustment to the system’s estimatedcost in an amount that will bring the estimated cost up to your quotedvalue. Then, on scaling, the new reported cost will be calculated byapplying your % Adjustment to the estimated cost. Based on the scaledsizes.

o Quoted hours: based on item type

o Quoted weight: based on item typeo Stream flow rate: scaled to the new capacity

Scale-Up for Configuration Analysis

Often, sections of a proposed facility may be required to consist of paralleltrains, joining up to meet downstream units. Situations such as these are besthandled by creating models of these sections at a standard capacity and thenscaling desired sections to say 50% capacity. You would then import thevarious sections into an overall model, with multiple trains being imported asmany times as required. The resulting model would then be evaluated forcapital investment and process economics.

Analyzer Relocation Module(ARM)The Analyzer Relocation Module lets you evaluate the impact of worldwidelocation on capital cost and a variety of other econometrics. Specifically, you




can “relocate” a project from one base location to any one of 89 worldwidelocations. You can choose to retain the location of your engineering workforceor choose any one of 89 worldwide locations.

When you need to evaluate a project that you might engineer and/orconstruct in a different city or country location, ARM will quickly andautomatically revise your project parameters with those contained in itslocation knowledge base. The ARM knowledge base includes key location-dependent data and rules to convert your project from its starting baselocation to your selected location using location dependent values for designparameters, engineering and construction work forces, cost of materials, andengineering, material and construction indirects. You can use ARM incombination with the Analyzer Scale-up Module (ASM) and AnalyzerEconomics Module (AEM) all in the same run or separately from the othermodules.

Relocation Terminology• Baseline project: initial case, before executing ARM.

• Relocated project: after ARM processing of the baseline project.

• Relocation: a process of evaluating an initially formulated project(baseline project) to a new location (relocated project).

• Locations: a general location, characterized by a city and country name,which is used to represent a particular EPC function. The function may ormay not be physically sited in that city.

• Engineering location: city and country name used to characterize theengineering workforce assigned to the project.

• Plant location: city and country name used to characterize the plant site.

WorkflowThe figure below shows the general work process. ARM specs, contained inthe ARM rule set are applied to the user’s model. A description of theelements in the table is provided in the section following the Workflow.




How the Analyzer Plant Relocation Module (ARM) Works

URelocation ReportsFor NewEngineering andPlant Location

UBaseline ReportsFor BaseEngineering andPlant Location

Relocated

Project Baseline

Project

ARM Specs

ProjectSpecs

ProjectContingency

ConstructionHours

ConstructionRates

ConstructionCost

ConstructionIndirects

ConstructionFee

ConstructionContingency

EngineeringHours

EngineeringRates

EngineeringCost

EngineeringIndirects

EngineeringContingency

MaterialCost

MaterialsContingency

MaterialsIndirects

MaterialQuantities

Analyzer Project

RelocationModule

(ARM)




1 Since ARM processing is automatic, it is wise to first save your baseproject under a new scenario name in advance of running ARM. Use ascenario name that refers to the planned new capacity. This will ensurethat your baseline project remains intact for further evaluations.

2 On the Run menu, click Decision Analyzer or click the “A” button on thebutton bar:

Figure 1. Button Bar

This will

display the Decision Analyzer dialog box, Figure 2.

Note: ARM shares space with ASM and AEM and Evaluate Project on thefour-part Decision Analyzer dialog box.

3 Select the check box Change Plant Location to.

4 Click the Plant Location from its pull-down list.

5 Click the Engineering Location from its pull-down list.6 Use the remaining check boxes to select options to:

o Enable escalation for Aspen Process Economic Analyzerprojects.

o Retain your defined construction start date and duration. Ifunchecked, a new date will be developed on relocation.

Note: The last line on the Decision Analyzer dialog box displays three piecesof information:

• plant location

• currency name

• currency symbol, in parenthesesThis information is a reminder to users of the Analyzer Economics Module(AEM) who are interested in reporting costs in currency different from theplant location currency. For this, two entry slots are provided for an exchangerate and symbol. If AEM is not invoked, values so entered will not affect thereporting aspects of relocation aspects. In Figure 2, the user elected to runAEM. This would take place immediately after ARM completed the relocationprocess, described as follows.

Figure 2. Decision Analyzer Dialog Box – Illustration for a plant to beengineered in Rotterdam and constructed in Singapore. The currency of theplant location is displayed in the last wire-frame.




F ig u r e 2 . D e c is i o n A n a l y z e r D i a l o g B o x

Relocating the Project7 Having completed the choices, click OK to run the project. If you click

Cancel, all choices will be ignored and control will return to the explorerview.

With your OK, Decision Analyzer’s relocation module will automaticallyconvert your base location project to the selected engineering and plantlocation. Your project will then contain the results of the relocation, which youcan review and modify. To do this, select the Project Basis view and click onthe desired basis category. Open the associated form, review the data and

modify, as you desire. When pleased with the results, SAVE the project,making sure that it is saved under a scenario name that describes therelocation and most important, that your baseline project is not disturbed bythe SAVE. You can then evaluate the project and review the results. A finalSAVE will save the results.




ARM Knowledge Base

The ARM knowledge base consists of approximately ten thousand location-specific data values plus rules that govern the way the location data will beapplied to your baseline project. The ARM knowledge base is derived from avariety of qualified sources including:

• Aspen Richardson international construction data: raw data from thissource (also used to prepare the Aspen Richardson International CostFactor Manual) were analyzed and mapped into Icarus technology formatsfor use in ARM

• Proprietary sources

• Practicing professionals, EPC and owner customers and associates

• Surveys

• Technical publications that specialize in international construction costs

• Government sources: seismic, climate data and other location data

• Financial sources: exchange rates, etc.

• Aspen Icarus models: to blend and fill in sparse data areas

Five Bodies of Data

The ARM knowledge base consists of five bodies of data:

• Location specs

• Project specs

• Engineering specs

• Construction specs

• Material Cost specs

Highlights of each component follow.

Location Specs

ARM is formulated for 89 locations in 33 currencies. Locations listed belowinclude the four Icarus country base locations. The locations are similar tothose in the Aspen Richardson International Cost Factor Manual list.

Locations are organized and sorted by continental region, country and city.For Canadian and US locations, names include state, province or territory.Conventional short forms of country and city names are used for simplicity.

• Regions - The number of locations for each region is listed in Table 1.

• City Locations outside the US are listed in Table 2

• US locations are listed in Table 3.

TABLE 1. List of Locations in Each RegionAfrica 3

Asia 15

Australia 3

Canada 6

Central America 2




Europe 12

Middle East 6

South America 5

United States 37

All Locations 89

Non-US Locations 52

TABLE 2. List of Non-US Locations

Region City, Country Near

Africa El Hassania, Morocco Casablanca

Ibadan, Nigeria

Johannesburg, South Africa

Asia Beijing, China

Guangzhou, China

Shanghai, China

Bhopal, India New Delhi

Mumbai (Bombay), India

Jakarta, Indonesia

Kobe, Japan

Tokyo, Japan

Kuantan, Malaysia Kuala Lumpur

Manila, Philippines

Singapore, Singapore

Seoul, South Korea

Taipei, Taiwan

Samutprakam, Thailand BangkokBinh Duong, Vietnam Hanoi

Australia Melbourne, Australia

Perth, Australia

Sydney, Australia

Central America Guatemala City, Guatemala

Mexico City, Mexico

Canada Calgary, Canada

Montreal, Canada

Toronto, Canada

Vancouver, Canada

Windsor, Canada

Winnipeg, Canada

Europe Brussels, Belgium

Paris, France

Frankfurt, Germany

Dublin, Ireland

Milan, Italy




Amsterdam, Netherlands

Rotterdam, Netherlands

Warsaw, Poland

Moscow, Russia

Barcelona, Spain

London, United KingdomManchester, United Kingdom

Middle East Cairo, Egypt

Kuwait City, Kuwait

Dammam, Saudi Arabia Al Jubail

Jeddah, Saudi Arabia

Gebze, Turkey Istanbul

Abu Dhabi, UAE

South America Buenos Aires, Argentina

Rio de Janeiro, Brazil

Medellin, Colombia

Lima, Peru

Caracas, Venezuela

TABLE 3. List of US City LocationsAnchorage, AK

Atlanta, GA

Baltimore, MD

Boston, MA

Cape Girardeau, MO

Cayey, PR

Charlotte, NCChicago, IL

Cincinnati, OH

Dallas, TX

Denver, CO

Fairbanks, AK

Green Bay, WI

Houston, TX

Huntsville, AL

Indianapolis, IN

Kansas City, MO

Knoxville, TN

Las Vegas, NV

Los Angeles, CA

Louisville, KY

New Orleans, LA

New York, NY

Newark, NJ




Oakland, CA

Philadelphia, PA

Phoenix, AZ

Portland, ME

Portland, OR

Sacramento, CASan Francisco, CA

Seattle, WA

Sherman, TX

Spartanburg, SC

St Louis, MO

Syracuse, NY

Wilkes-Barre, PA

Project DataThe ARM knowledge base contains a comprehensive set of values for projectlevel data. These should be considered as a starting point in the evaluation ofa project. Concerned users should replace the ARM knowledge base values intheir relocated project with more representative values obtained fromcompany surveys of the intended site.

• Currency: Exchange rate (FEX), as of the first day of the basis year, withexchange rate and currency units scaled to meet Icarus currency formats.Scaled currency units are provided at three levels: 3-character symbol, 8-character name and 24-character description. Values are listed in Table 4.

o Currency: 33 currencies are defined; some ARM locationsshare the same currency

o Exchange rate, for each location. The ARM knowledge baseworks with exchange rates relative to the currency of each ofthe four country bases (US, UK, JP, EU). The currency tablecontains the rates as of the listed date.

o Exchange rates are scaled in size to conform with Icarusexchange rate formats (0.01 to 99.9 in value)

o Scaled currency symbols, names and descriptions are definedto conform to Icarus format; these contain symbols such as Kto represent thousands and M to represent millions of scaledcurrency units, as indicated in Table 4.

TABLE 4. List of Currencies

CountryCurrencyDescription

CurrencyName

CurrencySymbol

ExchangeRate, perUSD (1Jan 2006)

Argentina Argentine Peso Peso-A P 3.0459

Australia Australian Dollar Dollar-A A$ 1.3644

Brazil Brazilian Real Real R 2.3517




Canada Canadian Dollar Dollar-C C$ 1.1641

ChinaChinese YuanRenminbi Renminbi R 8.0755

Colombia K Colombian Peso K Peso K-P 2.28393

Egypt Egyptian Pound Pound-E PDE 5.786

European Union Euro Euro EUR 0.8446Guatemala Guatemalan Quetzal Quetzal Q 7.615

India Indian Rupee Rupee R 45.195

Indonesia K Indonesian Rupiah K Rupiah K-R 9.85222

Japan K Japanese Yen K Yen K-Y 0.117681

Kuwait Kuwaiti Dinar Dinar DK 0.2921

Malaysia Malaysian Ringgit Ringgit R 3.7837

Mexico Mexican Peso Peso-MX P 10.66485

Morocco Moroccan Dirham Dirham-M D 9.3661

Nigeria K Nigerian Naira K Naira K-N 0.1305

Peru Peruvian Nuevo Sol NuevoSol NS 3.422

Philippines Philippine Peso Peso-P P 53.14

Poland Polish Zloty Zloty Z 3.255

Russia Russian Rouble Rouble RBL 28.75

Saudi Arabia Saudi Riyal Riyal R 3.7503

Singapore Singapore Dollar Dollar-S S$ 1.6642

South Africa South African Rand Rand ZAR 6.3359

South KoreaK South-KoreanWon K Won K-W 1.0287

Taiwan Taiwan Dollar Dollar-T T$ 33.147

Thailand Thai Baht Baht B 41.0767

Turkey Turkish New Lira New Lira NL 1.34979

United ArabEmirate

Utd. Arab Emir.Dirham Dirham-U D 3.6732

United Kingdom British Pound Pound-UK PDS 0.5802

United States US Dollar DollarUS USD 1

VenezuelaK VenezuelanBolivar K Boliv K-B 2.15

Vietnam K Vietnamese Dong K Dong K-D 15.904

Current European Union Locations:

• Belgium

• France• Germany

• Ireland

• Italy

• Netherlands

• Spain




Note: Certain combinations of location currencies and country basecurrencies may result in exchange rates that exceed the format bounds forexchange rate. In such cases, ARM will automatically scale the exchange rateratio and revise the currency units, usually with a prefix of "K" to indicatethousands of the above-listed currency unit. Example: The exchange rate forPlant location: India, at 45.145 per USD and Country Base: Japan at 0.1177

is 385.85 R/K Yen, which is beyond the exchange rate bound: the resultingratio will be scaled by 1000 to 0.38585 KRupee/K Yen, and costs will bereported in KRupee (KR)

• Equipment: design code (ASME, BS5500, DIN, JIS depending upon theplant location)

• Civil and Steel: seismic acceleration, soil, footing depth, low/high ambienttemperatures, wind velocity, hand excavation

• Electrical: power supply frequency

• Equipment Rental: a Construction Technology Level ( CTL) parameter(L, M, and H) is assigned to each location. Locations assigned as H-leveldraw from the entire system slate of equipment rental items. S-levellocations select from a smaller slate than M-level locations.

• Use of gin poles vs. heavy cranes: each location is assigned a value forthe heavy lift option

Engineering Work Force

The ARM knowledge base contains a comprehensive set of engineeringworkforce values, which should be considered as a starting point in theevaluation of a project. Concerned users should replace the ARM knowledgebase values in their relocated project with more representative valuesobtained from company surveys of the intended site.

The following are provided by ARM for each engineering work force location:

• Hourly rates for each of 77 disciplines in the engineering workforce slate.Hourly rates are provided in the currency of the engineering location.During the processing of a project, these rates are converted, forconsistent cost reporting, to the currency of the plant location using theexchange rate ratio:

Discipline Rate in Plant Location Currency =

Discipline Rate in the Engineering Location Currency x Plant LocationExchange Rate / Engineering Location Exchange Rate

• Engineering workforce productivity – one value is provided for eachengineering location, relative to the engineering productivity at thecountry base location

• Engineering Indirect Costs – values are provided for each location for eachof the eight phases of engineering:

o Expense rates

o Payroll burdens

o Office indirects

The eight phases of engineering are:

o Basic Engineering

o Detail Engineering




o Procurement

o Engineering Management

o Home Office Construction Services

o Field Office Supervision

o Construction Management

o Start-up, Commissioning• Engineering confidence level, associated with the sources of the ARM

knowledge base data, used to compute a value of engineeringcontingency. Engineering contingency is computed as the root-meansquare value of the user engineering contingency and engineeringconfidence level. For example, if the user contingency before relocationUC =18% and the ARM location confidence value LC = 10%, then thecomputed contingency after relocation is:

= √ (UC P

2P + LC P

2P) = √ (18 P

2P+10P

2 )P= 20.6%

Construction

The ARM knowledge base contains a comprehensive set of constructionworkforce values, which should be considered as a starting point in theevaluation of a project. Concerned users should replace the ARM knowledgebase values in their relocated project with more representative valuesobtained from company surveys of the intended site.

The following are provided by ARM for each construction work force location:

• Field Craft rates – hourly rates (“nearly all-in”) for each of 28 field craftsin the construction work force slate and a foreman differential for eachlocation. By “nearly all-in”, we mean that each craft rate is a uniquecomposite of the following rate contributions:

o Craft Worker Base Hourly Wage Rate

o Health, Welfare, Pensiono Fringe Benefits

o Hourly Indirect Rate for:

Temporary Construction

Consumables and Small Tools

FICA Unemployment Workers Compensation Insurance

Multi-level construction

Craft rates in the ARM knowledge base do not include indirectconstruction costs for the following categories as these would bedetermined during project evaluation:

o Construction Equipment Rental, including Fuel, Oil, Lubrication,Maintenance (FOLM)

o Field Supervision

o Contractor Home Office Costs

• Construction workforce productivity – one value is provided for each plantlocation, relative to the construction productivity at the country baselocation




• Field indirect costs, including construction equipment rental (see ProjectData, below), field supervision, home office costs

• Work week: hours, number of shifts, overtime

• Construction equipment rental: slate of items (see Project Data, below)

• Extent of hand excavation vs. machine excavation

• Construction confidence level, associated with the sources of the ARMknowledge base data, used to compute a value of constructioncontingency. Contingency is computed as the root-mean square value ofthe user construction contingency and construction confidence level. Forexample, if the user contingency before relocation UC =18% and the ARMlocation confidence value LC = 10%, then the computed contingency afterrelocation is:

= √ (UC P

2P + LC P

2P) = √ (18 P

2P+10P

2 )P= 20.6%

Material Costs

• Location Indexing

The ARM knowledge base contains a set of location indexes which willadjust country base material costs to the plant location. Two sets areprovided:

o The first deals with equipment costs.

o The second applies to bulk materials.

Use of the supplied location indexes should be considered as a startingpoint in the evaluation of a project. Concerned users should replace theARM knowledge base values in their relocated project with morerepresentative values obtained from company surveys of the intendedsite.

The location indexes make use of Aspen Richardson values for the average

split of local vs. imported materials. Costs of local and imported materialsare figured by applying location values for freight, taxes, VAT, and otherexpenses. Location indexes are stored for each of the four-country basesand are used to characterize material costs by account code (100 to 299for equipment, 300 to 999 for bulk materials.)

o Unit cost of rebar, ready-mix concrete, in the currency of theplant location

o Material cost confidence level, associated with the sources ofthe ARM knowledge base data, used to compute a value ofmaterial cost contingency. Contingency is computed as theroot-mean square value of the user material contingency andmaterial cost confidence level. For example, if the user

contingency before relocation UC =18% and the ARM locationconfidence value LC = 10%, then the computed contingencyafter relocation is

= √ (UC P

2P + LC P

2P) = √ (18 P

2P+10P

2 )P= 20.6%



10 Analyzer Utility Modules 311

10 Analyzer Utility Modules

Introduction

Analyzer Utility Modules (AUM) – Design

and Scope Generators for Utility Systems

One of the difficulties with process economic analyses, both capital cost andpayback determination, is the lack of scope definition for non-process oroutside boundary limit (OSBL) portions of the project. With AUM modulescreating utility systems in harmony with the process sections of a project,more accurate, realistic and confident business assessments can be made forcost and economics.

Each AUM module works in the same way. It extracts information on thespecific utility needs of each project component and area in your project. You

can then interactively revise default values for design preferences andconfiguration, evaluate messages, review reports of design results. Oncompletion, a press of a Load button will automatically transfer to yourproject, a list of selected, sized, designed project components assembledwithin a unique date- and time-stamped utility area. Should a prior utilityarea of the same type be present in your project, you can chose to delete theold one and replace it with new scope.

All of this takes place in times measured in minutes rather than traditionaldays and weeks. Of course, evaluation time depends on the size of theproject. For front end engineering design work, AUM modules can be revisitedin each cycle of scope change to ensure the project needs are properlysatisfied by each utility system.

A Control Panel, a task bar button and numerous hypertext links provide foreasy navigation and rapid access to a status report, specs for preferences andconfigurations, reports, an a guide. Messages are provided to assure dataintegrity; an error condition will disallow loading of results into your project.




AUM_CW: Cooling Water Utility Selection,

Sizing, and Design Module

The cooling water utility module requires Aspen Process Economic Analyzer orAspen Process Economic Analyzer plus Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to

identify cooling water resource streams and their flow conditions. Up to fourcooling water systems can be configured for a project, each with its own setof sized components: cooling towers, circulation pumps, chemical injectionpumps, supply and return distribution piping, valves, and fittings.

You can interactively define design conditions such as ambient airtemperatures, size limits to distribution piping, equipment types, and assignindividual areas to each cooling water system. Redundancy capabilitiesinclude stand-alone pumps, two 50% capacity pumps, stand-by spares.Distribution piping includes expansion loops for long runs and circuits includemain lines, branch lines, area headers, and risers and laterals for 3D-typeareas. Each line type has its own “iso” for valve and fitting type. Line sizesand pump heads are pressure drop based.

AUM_Air: Instrument and Plant Air UtilitySelection, Sizing, and Design Module

The air utility module can be accessed by either Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer or Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. AUM_ Air gathers airrequirements from your project in two ways:

• Instrument air: From a count of air operated control valves and controllersand instrument air flow required for each based on control valve size

• Plant air: From an air usage model based on a common air tool usage set,with area utility stations derived from area size and equipment count

within an areaUp to four air plant units (APU) can be configured for a project, each with itsown set of sized components:

• air intake filters/screens

• ductwork

• compressors

• interstage coolers

• air receivers

• pre-filters

• air dryers

• after-filters

• piping distribution network

You can interactively define design premises such as ambient air conditions,equipment types, equipment redundancy, etc. and assign individual areas tobe served by each air plant unit. Redundancy capabilities include stand-alonecompressors, start-up compressors, receivers, dryers. Redundancy choicesinclude one at 100% capacity, two at 50% capacity, stand-by spares.Distribution piping includes two sets, each sized for the required flow ofinstrument air and plant air. Piping isos for line segments include expansion




loops for long runs, valves and fittings, Line segments are defined for mainfeeders, main manifolds, main lines branch lines, area feeders, area headersand for 3D–type areas, risers and laterals. Each line type has its own “iso” forvalve and fitting type. Line sizes are pressure drop based.

Analyzer Utility Module (AUM)Cooling Water (AUM_Water)

Introduction to Analyzer Utility Module

(AUM) Cooling Water

Cooling Water Selection, Sizing, Design Model

This section is divided into four parts:1 Overview

• Analyzer Utility Module (AUM)

• Cooling Water Design Model

o Value in Time and Effort

o The Key Steps

2 Working with the Cooling Water Model

• Preparation Workflow

• The Workflow Cycle

• Accessing The Cooling Water Model

o Interactive Session Workflow – the Design Phaseo Overview

o Details of the Work Process

o The Initial Design

• Interactive Session Workflow – The Design Phase

o Overview

o Details of the Work Process

o The Initial Design

3 Working with the Cooling Water Model Worksheets

• Introduction

o Worksheets

o Button actions

• Cooling Water Design Model Worksheets

• Worksheet Details

o Status Worksheet

o Preferences Worksheet

How to Revise Default Values




Design Preference Categories

o Circuits Worksheet

Initial Configuration

Step 1: Assignment of Areas to Circuits

How Area Assignments are Used for Circuit Design

Step 2: Assignment of Spacing Between Areas Status messages and Values Used for Circuit Design

4 Basis for the Cooling Water Design Model

o General Flow sheet for cooling water service

o Cooling Water Model Circuitry

o Cooling water distribution network

o Naming conventions

Project cooling water area

Areas Requiring Cooling Water

Plant bulk pipe item descriptions

Distribution Piping Line types

o Sequencing of Areas on the Main Line

o Cooling Water ”Footprint Model”

o Pipe, Valves and Fittings Count

o Line Sizing and Pressure Drop Calculations

Projects with a prior cooling water utility model area

Cooling towers- terminology and the defining streamtemperatures

1. Overview

Analyzer Utility Module (AUM) Water

One of the difficulties with economic analysis, both capital cost and paybackdetermination, is the lack of scope definition for non-process utility or outsideboundary limit portions of the project. The Analyzer Utility Module, AUM, wascreated as the “home” for a series of automated utility design models toaddress this difficulty. The Cooling Water Selection, Design and Sizing Modelis the first utility design model in AUM and its functionality and method of useis described in detail in this chapter.

Cooling Water Design ModelThe Cooling Water Design Model is an automated, interactive and rapid designmodule that is contained in Aspen Decision Analyzer and works with stream-based projects. The cooling water model identifies heat exchanger equipmentor any other type of project component that requires cooling water by itsconnection to a cooling water utility resource stream.




To access the Cooling Water Design Model:

1 Starting with an open project that contains utility streams as part of itsdefinition, click Run, then click Utility Model. Or, simply click the U button to access utility models.

2 Click Cooling Water.

At this point built-in design and processing procedures do all the hard workunder your control and guidance and a few minutes later, your project will beaugmented with a new cooling water utility area that contains designedcooling water circuitry and associated project components. You can use themodel results using its set of adjustable design parameters or revise any anddefault values within prescribed limits to suit your needs.

In the discussions to follow, the term early design metrics is used toindicate values prepared by the cooling water model during an interactivedesign session. These are presented for guidance in advance of final designvalues that would be prepared on completing a project evaluation run.

Note: Worksheet names are shown in italic bold face to distinguish the

names from text.

Value in Time and Effort

The cooling water design model does all the hard work – design, selection,reporting, loading the design results – in minutes rather than traditional hoursand days. It is a powerful resource in the development of a typical Front EndEngineering Design:

• Early process technology evaluation stage - focus is on Inside BatteryLimits (ISBL) components

• With the process technology selected and additional scope, total projectcosts are sought. Outside Battery Limits (OSBL) components arerequired, particularly cooling water utility service.

The cooling water design model

• Automatically selects, designs, and adds sized utility system componentsto the project scope definition

• Can be revisited in each cycle of scope change.

The Key Steps

On initiating the cooling water model, the model automatically analyzes yourproject for cooling water requirements and automatically generates selected,sized and designed cooling water utility service project components – all

based on initial default design preferences and circuitry. Two interactiveworkbooks P r e f e r e n c e s and C i r c u i t r y enable you to revise default values forthe design and selection basis. Studying design alternatives starts with eithera click of an option box or a data entry. Being interactive, the cooling watermodel enables you to cycle from design basis to early design results in amatter of mouse clicks. Each new specification results in a new design and areport of key decision metrics. The list of sized project components isretained until you choose to load the results into your project. Messages and




metrics reports are provided extensively to guide you quickly and knowinglythrough a study of design alternatives.

When you have settled on a design you can load the results into your project.The loading operation begins with a click of a Load button and processing isautomatic. After a minute or so, the loading process will be complete and theProject Basis view will be displayed on your screen. Scope items added toyour project include a uniquely named cooling water area followed by a list ofcooling water utility project components: cooling towers, circulation pumps,chemical injection pumps, working and stand-by spares, and distributionpiping, valves and fittings. Each component is selected, designed and sized inharmony with your design basis and the needs of heat exchange equipment inyour various project areas.

2. Working with the Cooling Water Model

Preparation Workflow

The Cooling Water Design model requires a stream-based project built ineither Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Aspen Decision Analyzer, withcomponents that require cooling water connected to one or more coolingwater utility resources.

The flow rates, water temperatures, duties and components provide the basisfor the design requirements. The cooling water model will first diagnose theproject’s requirements and initiate a design. The user can then revise thedesign basis and review early design metrics for a variety of design scenarios,settle on a design basis and load the design results into the project.

The Workflow Cycle

Figure 2.1 illustrates the cooling water design cycle: from project to designmodel and back to the project with added new scope. Two buttons control theprocess:

• U to select the cooling water model

• Load to load designed results

Using these two actions, you can participate interactively in the designprocess, making design selections, reviewing early metrics, revisingselections, and clearing any error messages.




F ig u r e 2 . 1 . T h e W o r k f l o w Cy c l e , e x t r a c t e d f r o m t h e W e l com e w o r k s h e e t

To initiate a cooling water design model session, three steps are required

1 Save the project under a new scenario name.

2 Evaluate the project

3 Run the Cooling water utility model

Each of these steps is detailed and illustrated in the following sections.

Accessing the Cooling Water Utility Model

1 SAVE AS: Since AUM-Cooling Water processing is automatic, it is wise tofirst save your base project under a new name. This will ensure that yourbase project remains intact for further evaluations.




2 Evaluate the project: Click Run |Decision Analyzer as in Figure 2.2a orclick the A button as in Figure 2.2b. This will provide the Decision Analyzerdialog box, Figure 2.2c. Check Evaluate Project and provide a file name.

F ig u r e 2 . 2 a . T o e v a l u a t e f r o m R u n :

F ig u r e 2 .2 b . T o e v a l u a t e u s i n g t h e A - b u t t o n .

F i g u r e 2 . 2 c . Ch o o s e Ev a l u a t e P r o j e c t .

The reason for this step is to ensure that the project scope and cooling waterrequirements developed during evaluation are current and up to date. It willalso eliminate an error message (Figure 2.2d) that would be displayed whenaccessing the cooling water model no evaluation data were available.

.F ig u r e 2 . 2 d . Er r o r m e s sa g e i f t h e p r o j e c t w a s n o t e v a l u a t e d




3 Select the Cooling Water Model: To do this, choose Run>Utility Model(Figure 2,2a) or press the “U” button on the button bar (Figure 2.3a):

F ig u r e 2 . 3 a . T o o b t a i n u t i l i t y m o d e l s u s i n g t h e U - b u t t o n .

This will bring up the Utility Model dialog box, Figure 2.3b. A blank valueunder Status indicates the project does not contain a prior cooling watermodel area. If a project contained a prior area, the Status field would indicateLoaded.

F ig u r e 2 . 3 b . U t i l i t y m o d e l se l e ct i o n

3b Select Cooling Water: Click OK. This will either initiate an interactiveCooling Water Design session in MS Excel and display a Load option or

display a project-not-evaluated error message (see Step 2 above).

Interactive Session Workflow – the Design Phase

Overview

When the cooling water model is invoked, it:

(a) analyzes for project cooling water requirements

(b) works from Preferences (user-modifiable, default set of designparameter values)

(c) prepares an initial design.Results of the initial design and any subsequent interactive scenario arepresented in a Ca p t u r e worksheet. If the design meets with the user’sapproval, a user click of the parked Load button will load the design resultsinto the project, at which time the project can be re-evaluated.

The P r e f e r e n c e s and C i r c u i t s worksheets allow the user to modify thedefault design basis. Each spec change will result in a new design. Hyperlinksprovide rapid access from one sheet to another and sections in a sheet. The




Con t r o l Ce n t e r toolbar button opens the Con t r o l Ce n t e r worksheet, whichhas hyperlinks to other sheets and their major categories. Worksheet tabsare color coded to match hyperlinks at the top of each worksheet.

The following sections provide a detailed description of the work process aswell as detailed descriptions of each worksheet, category and item.

Details of the Work Process

With the click of the OK button in step 3b above, three actions will occur

1 The model first identifies if a prior cooling water model area is present inthe project. If present, the user can choose to Delete the prior area andcontinue with the model or return to the project. If Delete is chosen, theutility model will proceed with the design and delay deletion until it is timeto load the new results.

2 If no prior cooling water utility area is detected, the Welcome screen isdisplayed and remains present during a time when:

a Project requirements are automatically passed to the model

b The model prepares an initial design

c A Load | Cancel | Minimize option is provided (Figure 2.4). To

continue, click the minimize button at the top. This will park thebutton box for access during the design phase. Cancel will end the coolingwater model session and return normal project functions with no changeto the project.

F ig u r e 2 . 4 . L o a d - Ca n c e l - M in i m i z e b u t t o n b o x e s

• a Control Center button bar (figure 2.5) is provided to access theCon t r o l Ce n t e r worksheet from any worksheet

• Seven worksheets are presented in a MS Excel framework:

o Welcome

o Control Center

o Status

o Preferences

o Capture

o Guide

3 The model then displays the Con t r o l Ce n t e r worksheet, which links to allother worksheets and provides an indication of success (green signal) orfailure (red signal) to create an initial design based on default designparameters.




The Initial Design

On initiation, the cooling water model will report the Status of the design onthe Con t r o l C e n t e r (see Figure 2.5) worksheet under Status Report, and ifany, will identify clashes on the Status worksheet and further, on theP r e f e r e n c e s and C i r c u i t s worksheet.

A Status Report message: “Successful. A Load can proceed” indicates all iswell between project requirements, design parameters and designmethodology. At this point, it is wise to review early design metrics byaccessing the Ca p t u r e d R e su l t s worksheet (see Figure 2.6). The user canreturn to P r e f e r e n c e s and C i r c u i t s to study design alternatives. If capturedresults are acceptable, a click of the parked Load button will (1) carry thedesign results into the project, (2) close the worksheets and (3) return to theproject for evaluation of the augmented project.

Should the design basis produce a clash with project requirements, errormessages and flags will be displayed in a top-down succession of worksheets.The first indication is given under Status Report on the Con t r o l Ce n t e r Worksheet. The S t a t u s worksheet is the central reporting agency, where

checks are made and links are provided to source locations in theP r e f e r e n c e s and C i r c u i t s input worksheets.

F ig u r e 2 . 5 . I l l u s t r a t i o n o f t h e Co n t r o l Ce n t e r W o r k s h e e t , w i t h d i sp l a y o f

Co n t r o l C e n t e r t o o l b a r a n d L o a d b u t t o n




F ig u r e 2 .6 . A s e ct i o n o f a R e su l t s Ca p t u r e s h e e t s h o w i n g v a l u e s i n t h e p r o j e c t

u n i t s o f m e a s u r e s e t .

3. Working with the Cooling Water Model

Worksheets

Introduction

Worksheets: Seven worksheets are provided, of which P r e f e r e n c e s andC i r c u i t s are for user input, to revise the design basis:

• W e lc o m e : greetings, workflow graphic

• Con t r o l C e n t e r : navigation

• S t a t u s : message center

• P r e f e r e n c e s : design selections

• C i r c u i t s : circuit definition

• Ca p t u r e : early design metrics

• Gu i d e : help

Button Actions: The Control Center toolbar is always available during amodel session. A click will open the Control Center worksheet and a hyperlinkclick will direct you to a chosen worksheet. When the Control Center toolbar isparked together with the Excel Web toolbar you can quickly search forwardand backward.




You can step from one sheet to another, revise the design basis, reviewstatus and results, decide on an alternate design basis, make revisions,review the results and when ready, click the Load button (see Load-Cancel-Minimize) to inject the results in the project. Or, you can refuse the designusing Cancel. Clicking Load conveys the design results to the project, thecooling water design model’s Excel sheets and return to normal Analyzer

functions. Cancel bypasses the cooling water model and returns to Analyzer.

Cooling Water Design Model Worksheets

The SPECS cooling Model workbook consists of

• Two design basis sheets – this is where you input your selections

o P r e f e r e n c e s : process and mechanical design specs:

Red error flags and messages are displayed for out ofrange or missing data values

Uses click boxes for either/or choices, “B” and “R”switches to select base (default) or revised value anduser value to replace the base value

o C i r c u i t s : assignment of areas to a circuit, spacing of areas ina circuit along the main line:

Assignment uses 1, 2, 3, 4 to assign an area to a circuit

Spacing uses the “B” and “R” switch method and userspacing to replace the base 2Hfootprint model value

• S t a t u s sheet – all messages are summarized here for your review andrepair

o Key status message is highlighted in color (green: Loading canbe performed, red: Errors must be cleared)

o Summarizes other messages, links directly to input locations forrevision

• Cap t u r e Re s u l t s : displays early design metrics for decision making,provides the basis for alternative choices of preferences or circuitry.By “early design metrics” is meant values in advance of those createdduring project evaluation

• Gu i d e : provides instructions, describes data entry, color coding

• Con t r o l Ce n t e r : hypertext links interconnect all sheets and maincategories for rapid navigation

• All sheets: are conveniently color coded, with red flags appearing onerror condition. All error conditions must be cleared before results canbe loaded

• We l c o m e sheet: Welcome, displayed during the initiation process,

contains a workflow graphicOn completion of an error-free interactive session, pressing the LOAD buttonwill automatically load and inject the results into the project. The project willthen contain new scope additions: (1) a uniquely named, time-stampedcooling water area will be used to contain (2) a selected, designed list ofcooling water utility project components. Each item so added by the modelmay be opened, reviewed, revised in the same way as any other projectcomponent.




Worksheet Details

S t a t u s Worksheet

The S t a t u s sheet reports messages and has hypertext links to sourcelocations in the event of a reported error. Major report categories are:

• Overall status

• Existing cooling water area is in the project

• Cooling circuit components – wet bulb temperature, minimumapproach temperature, lowest desired cooling water temperature

• Cooling water resources: naming, excluded streams and reasons, netnumber

• Project components: total, number served by cooling water

• Project areas: total number, those served by cooling water

• Cooling water loads: total flow rate, total heat duty, excess capacity,total flow rate at excess capacity

• Layout distances: number of parameters out of range

• Pumps specs out of range• Piping specs out of range

• Circuit assignments out of range

• Spacing assignments out of range

Figure 3.1 illustrates an extract of a Status sheet

F i g u r e 3 . 1 Ex t r a c t , sam p l e o f a St a t u s Sh e e t

Preferences Worksheet

Units of measure used in the P r e f e r e n c e s worksheet correspond to thosedefined in the project. Error messages are displayed alongside each entry;errors are flagged in red. This sheet uses click boxes and data entry fields for




specifying design preferences. Each preference is provided with aexplanatory text, limit values, user entry field and a default value which isused in the initial design and any subsequent design should the user notprovide an over-ride selection or value.

How to Revise Default Values

This worksheet uses two methods, check boxes and data entries controlled byswitch boxes to revise the supplied set of default (base) design parameters.Throughout data entry discussions, the term used for a model-supplied set ofdata is referred to as default values. For a particular parameter, the model-supplied value is termed a base value, symbolized by the letter B. A valuesupplied by the user is termed a revised value and is symbolized by the letterR. A mouse click will switch between using a base value and a revised value.

See Figure 2.2c (page 497H318) for information on how to use a check box:

• A default value is provided to the left of the check box

• A check box title signifies the alternative to the default value

• The resulting choice is displayed to the right

• A status message is displayed that provides additional information

F ig u r e 3 . 2 Ex t r a c t , sam p l e o f a P r e f e r e n ce s sh e e t s h o w i n g c l i c k b o x m e t h o d

o f s e l e c t i o n

Design Preference Categories:

• Cooling Tower (values in this section affect the circuitry, sizing ofcooling towers and flow-related equipment such as circulation pumps

and distribution piping)(a) Design Capacity, excess capacity

(b) Design Temperature: Summer wet bulb temperature (see3HCooling Tower discussion of wet bulb temperature, approachgradient, range)

(c) Messages relating to cooling water resource requirementsvs. design preferences

(d) Number of Cooling Towers




(e) Multiple Cooling Towers: choose either one tower for allcircuits or one for each circuit

(f) Working “Twin”: choose a single tower at 100% capacity ortwo “(twins), each at 50% capacity

• Layout (these are dimension limit checks that are applied to entries onthe C i r c u i t s worksheet

o Distance

From tower to first branch to an area

Minimum value to first branch to an area (often definedby fire regulations)

From a branch to an area header

Maximum spacing between areas (a limit check)

Status messages related to distance

• Pumps

o Area Pressure Drop: pressure drop for equipment requiringcooling water, applies to all areas

o Working Pumps Limiting value for number of working pumps in a circuit

Pump type: horizontal (CENTRIF or API 610 modeltypes) or vertical (TURBINE model type, at low speedonly)

Pump speed: low or high RPM

Stand-by pumps if four or less pumps in a circuit: yesor no

Stand-by pumps if more than four pumps in a circuit:yes or no

Electrical power to pumps based on voltage choice: LV

(low-voltage), MV (mid-voltage), HV (high-voltage).Limiting values of power per pump motor are displayedbased on project specifications. A voltage choice definesthe maximum power to a motor driver and hence, thenumber of pumps in a circuit. Recall that each changeto a specification results in a completely new design; avoltage selection results in a design value for thenumber of pumps and can produce an error conditionand message if the number of pumps exceeds thelimiting value for number of pumps in a circuit.

Design messages for pumps and piping for each of fourpossible circuits

• Piping: Limiting values for line size, by line type, where line sizes arein the units of measure of the project, either “IN DIAM” or “MM DIAM”

Suction line size for circulation pumps (a flow rate perpump suction line based on selected line size is providedfor information purposes)

Main line segment line size

Branch line size

Area header line size




Risers line size (for 3D area types)

Laterals line size (for 3D area types)Circuits Worksheet

Units of measure used in the C i r c u i t s worksheet correspond to those definedin the project

This worksheet is designed to handle up to one hundred cooling water areas.Areas are listed vertically. The worksheet is divided into five major categoriesin columns of data:

1 Initial Configuration

See Figure 3.3 for the initial configuration

F ig u r e 3 . 3 Ex t r a c t f r o m Ci r c u i t s sh e e t – I n i t i a l Co n f i g u r a t i o n ( l e f t ) , S t e p 1( r i g h t )

The following (see Figure 3.3, left side) are reported for each area beingserved by a recognized cooling water utility resource stream:

• Initial Sort Sequence: sequenced by area, from the area with highestcooling water requirements to the area with the lowest

• Area Name: user-assigned name, carried into the cooling waterdesign model from project area specs

• Area Type: user-assigned area type, carried into the cooling waterdesign model from project area specs

• Area CW Rate: area cooling water (CW) flow rate, the sum of all

recognized cooling water flow rates for equipment in an area asadjusted by the Excess Capacity value in the P r e f e r e n c e s worksheet

• Initial Circuit Number: always 1 as all areas are initially assigned to asingle circuit

• Initial Circuit ID: always “A”

2 Step 1 – Assignment of Areas to Circuits (User entry one of two)

Please refer to Figure 3.3 (right side):




• Enter a Circuit Number 1, 2, 3, or 4: user value is required; if onlyone area requires cooling water, enter 1. If two areas, use 1 for bothor assign 1 to one area and 2 to the other. The design model willsequence the areas. In an error condition, an error message and a redflag will be displayed. Error conditions must be resolved to obtainloadable design results.

• System-Assigned Circuit Id: The model will assign a letter ID (A, B, C,D) to each area based on circuit assignments and total circuit flowrate. If the project contains four or more areas, then it is possible toassign areas to circuit numbers 1 to 4. The model will collect all thearea flow rates in each circuit and sequence the circuits from greatestflow to least in the sequence A, B, C, D. The “A” circuit will have alarger total flow rate than circuit “B”, “B” will be greater than circuit “C” and “D” will have the least flow rate. Similarly, for three areas in aproject, valid circuit numbers range from 1 to 3 and circuit IDs assignto these circuits, based on total flows will be sequenced and labeled A,B and C. A one-area project will be assigned a circuit ID of “A.”

• Status

o Status of all entries: summarizes number or errors to beresolved; if none, “OK” is displayed

o Status for individual entries: message is issued for invalidcircuit numbers and field is flagged in red

3 How Area Assignments are Used for Circuit Design

Please refer to Figure 3.4

F ig u r e 3 . 4 E x t r a c t o f C ir c u i t s s h e e t – d e f i n i n g a r e a s p a c i n g u s i n g t h e B / R

s w i t c h

Each line item in this section represents an area and its properties. Areas aresorted and sequenced in descending total circuit flow rate and then by areaflow rate. Circuits are labeled A, B, C, D with circuit A being the one with thehighest flow rate; B is next etc. An area that was tagged as circuit 2 in step 1may be in a circuit with the lowest flow and would be organized accordinglyand given a Circuit ID letter depending on the other circuit flows.

This section displays the properties and attributes of each area in thesequenced list.




Values displayed for information purposes are:

• New Sort Sequence: displays values vertically in the sequence 1, 2, 3,etc

• 4H

Initial Sort Sequence: displays the initial sort sequence number for thearea

• 5H

ID of Area In Report Group (ArRg): the ArRg ID for the area• Area name: user-assigned project area description

• 6H Area CW Rate: displays the cooling water rate, as adjusted by theP r e f e r e n c e s value for excess capacity

• Area Heat Duty: heat duty requirements for all equipment within thearea identified as requiring a valid cooling water resource

• User circuit number: value entered in Step 1, for reference purposes

• 7H

Circuit ID: letter A, B, C, D assigned by the cooling water model basedon sequencing circuit flow rates

• Position Of Area In Circuit: Only one area can be first in line in acircuit. “First” if the area has the highest flow rate of all areas in the

circuit, otherwise no a blank display. The area with a “First” positionwill take on a default distance from the cooling tower as defined by thePreferences value for that distance.

4 Step 2: Assignment of Spacing Between areas

Each line item in this section corresponds to item 4 above. A line itemrepresents an area and its properties, with areas being sorted and sequencedin descending circuit and area flow rate.

This section enables the user to revise base values for the spacing of areasalong the main line. It uses the “Switch” method to revise a base value asdescribed in the section on Preferences.

• Base Value for Spacing Along Circuit Main Line: This is the run length

of the main segment between the prior and current area as developedby the 8Hfootprint model.

• Enter Switch: B for Base, R to revise. Choose a blank entry or entereither a B (or b) to indicate use of the base value. Use R (or r) toindicate use of a revised value

o Switch value is blank: design will use the base value

o Switch value is B or b: design will use the base value

o Switch value is R or r: indicates a forthcoming user value willrevise the default spacing value. The design will use therevised value if the user value is within range of prescribedlimits.

• Enter Revised Spacing Along The Circuit Main Line: This value will

replace the base value if it meets range limit conditions set forth in thePreferences worksheet. By spacing is meant the distance betweensuccessive areas. As the line items in this section represent areas thatare sorted and sequenced, the spacing for a particular line item is thespacing between the start of the prior area and the start of the currentarea. This spacing is a measure of the area’s main line segment. Seethe section on the 9HCooling Water Footprint Model. Piping runs lengths aretypically longer than spacing as they include pipe to configure fittings,expansion loops, etc.




Enter a value. The resulting action depends on the corresponding switchvalue

o Switch value is blank, B or b: user value is ignored, base valuewill be used

o Switch value is R or r: user value is tested against range limitsand design criteria. If error free, the user value will bedisplayed as the Applied Value. Error conditions will displayinstructional status messages, red flag, and prevent completionof a valid design

5. Status messages and values used for design

o Flag: A red flag is displayed to indicate a line item errorcondition

o Status: B (Base) uses base value, R (Revise) uses revised valueor status message (displays limiting values, error messages)

o Value used for spacing along circuit main line: The value usedin the design

4. Basis for the Cooling Water DesignModel

This section describes the basis of the cooling water design model. It ispresented with numerous graphics to enable a clear understanding of thework being performed by the model when it is analyzing and designingcooling water project components that are in harmony with your designpreferences and the needs of components requiring cooling water.

General Flow Sheet for Cooling Water Service

Figure 4.1 is a schematic diagram of a typical cooling water circuit. In thisfigure, circulation pumps draw cooled cooling water, the cooling water supplystream, from the supply basin at the bottom of a cooling tower and distributeit through piping to heat exchanger located in one or more project areas.Cooling water return streams are combined and sent to a cooling tower whereit is cooled, principally by evaporative cooling. Motor driven fans mounted onthe tower draw (induced draft) or force (forced draft) ambient air into thecooling tower where it contacts the downward flow of cooling water. Thecooled cooling water drops down from the tower into a supply basin, awaitingwithdrawal by the circulation pumps.

Water is added to make up for losses through evaporation, air-born drift andfor blow-down. Water drawn from the system to prevent the build-up of

contaminants is termed “blow-down.”

See below for more on 10Hcooling towers, terminology and defining streamtemperatures

Cooling water in such a circuit tends to accumulates algae, corrosioncontaminants and particles that slough off the distribution system. Watertreatment chemicals are added to alleviate these conditions, with the degreeof such treatment depending on the water supply source and environmentalconditions. Five types of treatment chemicals are typically used in small




quantities to control the water quality. The cooling water model provides eachcooling tower with a diaphragm type of pump and a stand-by for each of thetreatment chemicals. The model uses the following labels to identify thetypes:

• Sulfuric acid (pH control)

• Sodium hypochlorite (pH control)

• Biocide (algae growth control)

• Corrosion inhibitor

• Dispersant (suspended particles control)

F ig u r e 4 . 1 I l l u s t r a t i o n : Co o l i n g W a t e r Fl o w D i a g r a m

Cooling Water Model Circuitry

The cooling water model is designed to support up to four independentcooling water circuits. Each circuit can have its own cooling tower or allcircuits can be defined to share a cooling tower. A circuit consists of pumpsand distribution piping to and from project areas. It is the P&ID specs thatdefine the component’s hook-up piping to the cooling water model’s circuitry.

Summarizing, the cooling water model develops piping runs to a project areaand distributes cooling water to components in the area via an area header orrisers and laterals in the case of 3D area types. Each circuit is provided witha supply and return distribution network; what is supplied must be returned:one supply line implies one return line.

Figure 4.2 is a schematic diagram showing several areas that have equipment

requiring cooling water and one that does not. The cooling water model willnot serve an area that does not have cooling water requirements. If such anarea is to be included, then it is recommended that one or more exchangersconnected with cooling water utility streams be introduced in that area.

The cooling water model allows for a one cooling tower (or two 50% towers)to serve all circuits or individual cooling tower (or two 50% towers) for eachcircuit. Clearly, if only one area requires cooling water, only one circuit canbe defined, up to two circuits for two areas, up to three circuits for three




areas and a maximum of four circuits for four or more areas requiring coolingwater.

F ig u r e 4 . 2 S in g l e , I n d e p e n d e n t Co o l i n g W a t e r C i r cu i t

Figure 4.3, case (a) is a diagram showing a single treed circuit. Figure 4.4,case (b), illustrates multiple treed circuits. The difference between the twocases is (a) one cooling tower for each circuit or (b) one for all circuits. Case

(a) would apply to projects with a single area or for multiple circuits, witheach circuit being served by its own cooling tower.




F ig u r e 4 . 3 ( c a s e a ) . I l l u s t r a t i o n o f o n e co o l i n g t o w e r u s e d t o s er v e a s et o f

a r e a s in a s i n g l e ci r c u i t . T h e m o d e l w i l l p e r m i t u p t o f o u r s i n g l e ci r c u i t s , ea c h

h a v i n g i t s o w n c o o l in g t o w e r a n d c i r cu l a t io n p u m p s .

F ig u r e 4 . 4 ( c a s e b ) . I l l u s t r a t i o n o f o n e c o o l in g t o w e r u s e d t o s e r v e m u l t i p l e

c ir c u i t s . F o r t h i s ca s e , t h e m o d e l w i l l p r o v i d e o n e c o o l i n g t o w e r f o r a l l

c i r c u i t s a n d a s e t o f c i r c u l at i o n p um p s f o r e a c h c i r c u i t .




Cooling Water Distribution Network

This section describes the methodology used in circuit design

• Naming conventions

• Sequencing of areas on the main line

• Cooling water footprint model

• Pipe, valves and fittings count

• Line sizing and pressure drop calculations

Naming Conventions

Project Cooling Water Utility Area: The cooling water design model will createa cooling water model utility area to contain project components for eachcircuit. On loading, the area will be named with a date and time stamp toensure it is unique and can be detected and properly deleted when a newdesign is to take its place.

The naming convention is: “AUMCoolWater ddmmmyy_tttt”, where

• dd is the day number of the session month (1, 2, 3, ….., 31)

• mmm is a three character representation of the session month (jan,feb, mar, apr, may, jun, jul, aug, sep, oct, nov, dec)

• yy is the last two digits of the session year (05 for 2005, etc)

• tttt is the decimal fraction of the session day

Utility project components are time-stamped in a similar manner. As onlyfour digits are used (tttt), it is possible that a load action might span two tttttimes (one ten-thousandth of a day, duration of 8.64 seconds) with nosignificant resulting consequence.

Once a cooling water utility area is loaded in the project, the user may accessany item in the usual way, by using the Project View, clicking on anycomponent and viewing the design parameters in the forms view. Any and all

data in the cooling water utility area may be modified as required.

Areas Requiring Cooling Water: Each area that requires cooling water isidentified by a unique ArRg number that is made up of system–assignednumeric values for Area ID and Report Group. An ArRg value of 201 indicatesArea ID = 2 in Report Group 1. The user-assigned area description, whichmay not be unique in a given project, is printed in reports along with itsunique ArRg value.

Plant Bulk Pipe Item Descriptions: The naming convention above is combinedwith the Area Code and is time stamped when loaded into the project. Forexample, “MainSeg, ArRg 201_T7883” is the item description for main linesupply and return line segment that serves area 2 in report group 1, time

stamped T7883.Distribution Piping Line Types: The distribution network in this cooling watermodel consists of the following named types of lines:

• Main line segment: a portion piping along the main line

o “MS”

o “MainSeg”

o “MainChk” for a main segment that contains a check valve




• Branch segment: a short run of pipe, from the main line to a specificproject area

o “B”

o “Branch”

o “BrChk” for a branch that contains a check valve

• Area header: a line of pipe, valves and fittings that distributes coolingwater along the long dimension of the base of a project area

o “AH”

o “Area Header”

o “ArHdrChk” for an area header that contains a check valve

• Risers – vertical runs of pipe to bring cooling water to each level in a3d structure

o “R”

o “Risers”

o “RiseChk” for a riser that contains a check valve

• Laterals – horizontal runs of pipe that distribute cooling water to each

floor in a 3D structure

o “L”

o “Laterals”

o “LatChk” for a lateral that contains a check valve

• Vents and drains – high-point vents, low-point drains on supply andreturn lines, short runs of small bore pipe

o “VD”

o “VentDrain”

Lines with check valves are of minimal length to satisfy the plant bulk PIPEmode and are separate line items as only one check valve is assigned to a

supply-return line pair.Figures 4.5 and 4.6 illustrate these line types for 2D (PAD, GRADE) and 3Darea types (OPEN, EXOPEN, FLOOR, MODULE)




F ig u r e 4 . 5 Sc h em a t i c o f c o o l i n g w a t e r p i p i n g f o r a 2 D a r e a t y p e ( P A D , GRADE)

F ig u r e 4 .6 S c h em a t i c o f c o o l in g w a t e r p i p i n g f o r a 3 D a r e a t y p e ( O P EN ,

EXOPEN , FLOOR , MODULE )




Sequencing of Areas on the Main Line

Upon identifying which areas that require cooling water and their assignedcircuit, the cooling water model arranges the areas in decreasing coolingwater usage. The largest consuming area is placed at the front of the lineand the smallest consumer is placed at the end. In this way, min line

segments will be larger in diameter at the front of the line and decrease aseach consumer reduces the total flow rate to the next area.

Figure 4.7 illustrates various line types and sequenced areas.

F ig u r e 4 . 7 S ch em a t i c o f Li n e Ty p e s Se r v i n g A r e a s R e q u i r i n g Co o l i n g W a t e r

Cooling Water “Footprint Model”

Upon identifying an area as one that requires cooling water, the footprintmodel develops an area footprint by using (a) the total number ofcomponents in an area, (b) the area type (2D or 3D), (c) the number of leveland (d) a packing density (number of components in a bay) and (e) areaaspect ratio, length:width, of 1.5:1.0.

The result of the footprint model is a set of dimensions for each area requiring

cooling water. These dimensions are used to develop a default value of thespacing between the start of one area along the main line and the next area.The default spacing distances are reported in the Step 2 of the CIRCUITSworksheet and can be over-ridden by the user.

Pipe, Valves and Fittings Count

Each line type is provided with a piping iso model that consists of set of pipe,valves and fittings. Pipe and fitting diameter is determined by volumetric flow




rate and limiting line velocity (suction lines being different from distributionlines). Line length is determined by (a) minimum length of pipe required toeach type of fitting and (b) the long area dimension, which is developed froma cooling-water “11Hfootprint model” for each project area and area type.Fittings are assigned to each line type from a list that includes elbows (EL),tees (TE), reducers (RE), flanges (FL), blind flanges (BL), gate valves (GA),

check valves (CH).

Each line type is based on five configuration components. The total linelength is determined by as the sum of the linear run distance plus pipelengths of pipe to satisfy the make-up of the configuration components. Themake-up of each configuration component is based on line type and consistsof quantities of the following:

• “Main run” component: pipe, of length determined by (a) the footprintmodel, or (b) user preference value

• “Fixed” component: FL, GA, CH fittings, pipe length based on diameterof run

• “Head” component: EL, FL fittings, pipe length based on diameter of

run, to provide directional change• “Branch point” component: TE, RE, FL, BL fittings, for connection tonext line type

• “Vent and drain station” component: TE, FL GA fittings, pipe;frequency of placement is based on linear run distance

• “Expansion loop” component: EL fittings, pipe length based ondiameter of run, frequency of placement is based on linear rundistance

Expansion loops and vent and drain stations are placed along the run basedon line length

The configuration of each line type serving each area is defined as a project

component located in the cooling water area created by the cooling watermodel. Once loaded in the project, any line configuration can be reviewedand modified in the usual manner by opening that project component in itsform.

Line Sizing and Pressure Drop Calculations

The Cooling Water Model has a Preferences worksheet where, in the Pipingsection, limiting sizes of each line type are defined. Once areas are assignedto a circuit, the flows through the circuit are known. Areas are ordered insequence according to their flow requirements, with the largest consumer atthe head of the line. The computations are interactive and a new design willbe computed unnoticed each time a design value is revised. It is wise to

check early design results that are displayed in the Capture worksheet whenrevising design specifications.

Line size and pressure drop computations take place in this general manner:

• Starting point is limiting velocity, as defined in the Icarus ReferenceGuide

• Flow rate combined with limiting velocity results in required flow area

• Maximum line size determines number of parallel lines




• Built-in iso for each line type defines valve and fitting count

• Line length is derived from spacing between areas from circuitry input,minimum spacing between areas and minimum lengths from line

• Total run length is a combination of line length and number of parallelruns

• Pipe friction is based on Fanning type equation• Line-size based fitting resistances are used to determine fitting friction

losses

• A single average value for the pressure drop across cooling waterusage components in any area is defined in the Preference worksheet

• Pressure at junctions, where flows meet, is common to junctionstreams

• Overall circuit pressure drop comes from a stepwise calculation acrossall junctions

• An addition head loss due to cooling tower elevation completes thepressure drop determination

It is possible that the limiting line size for branch and area headers may betoo small for some circuits with large flows. This would result in a cluster oftwo or more parallel lines. To alleviate this condition, consider increasing thelimiting line size.

Projects with a Prior Cooling Water Utility Model Area

The cooling water model will allow a single cooling water utility area of itsmaking in a project. If a project contains a prior area, the model will detectits presence and defer action until the user decides to load a new coolingwater model design. Choosing to load will delete the prior area and the newone will be loaded. Is the choice is not to load, the model worksheets areclosed with a return to the normal view.

Cooling Towers: Terminology and the Defining Stream

Temperatures

Fi g u r e o v e r v ie w _ 4 . 8 s h o w s a c o o l in g t o w e r w i t h a i r a n d co o l in g w a t e r

s t r ea m s a n d t h e i r t e m p e r a t u r e s.

Terms used in the cooling tower industry, illustrated in Figure 4.8, are:




• Cooling tower: a device used to cool water by the countercurrentaction of ambient air against a downward flowing stream of water tobe cooled. The cooling process involves the cooling of entering waterby evaporative cooling of water and sensible heat to a much lesserdegree

• Cooling water supply stream: cooling water supplied to heat

exchangers for purpose of cooling process streams

• Cooling water return stream: cooling water streams leaving heatexchangers, combined for return to a cooling tower

• Range: cooling water return temperature, Tr – cooling water supplytemperature, Ts, directly related to the heat duty

• Approach Gradient: the difference between the wet bulb airtemperature and cooling water leaving the cooling tower.Theoretically, the cooling water temperature can not drop below theair wet bulb temperature. For a given cooling water flow rate, as theapproach gradient decreases, the cost of a cooling tower will increase.

Notes to Analyzer Utility Model (AUM)Users:

Cooling Water utility resources that must accounted in the Analyzer UtilityModel (AUM) should be named either:

Cooling Water or "Cooling Water xx"

where:

xx can be two digits ranging from 01 to 99,

for example, Cooling Water 01

User created utility resources that do not adhere to this format (for example,CW, Sea Water, Cooling Water o3) will not be identified as cooling waterstreams and will be excluded from AUM's cooling water analysis.

Cooling water streams that are not associated with any equipment, will beassigned to the Area with the maximum cooling water flow rate. For areasassigned to two or more circuits, the collected unassigned cooling water flowrate will be assigned to the first area in the circuit handling the largest circuitflow rate.

Cooling water can either be bought or be made. If it is to be made, the dewpoint of ambient air added to the lower model limit for the approach gradientwill determine the lowest possible deliverable temperature. To ensure thatyour specified cooling water utility resource streams can be made, please

review the limits for the two cooling water models:• CTWCOOLING

• CTWPACKAGED




AUM_Air

Utility Design and Scope Generator

for Instrument and Plant Air

OverviewThe Air Utility Module automatically and interactively:

• selects, designs, and sizes air plant project components that conform toyour:

o Project scope design basis

o Interactive entries for air utility design and configurationpreferences

• Augments the scope of your project with a list of designed air utilityproject components in a unique air utility area on the click of the Loadbutton

• Interactive session enables a review of results prior to LOAD creates

o Status messages, suggestions to alleviate design clashes

o Interactive report of equipment and distribution piping designresults

With the Air Utility Module, you can review, revise, add other projectcomponents and/or Run the augmented project to obtain a new projectevaluation.

The Air utility model can be• applied to projects that have been created using

o Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, Aspen Decision Analyzer

o Aspen Process Economic Analyzer

• within Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer

Project areas and their project components• Aspen Process Economic Analyzer/Analyzer projects:

o Each group of project components is contained in a unique

“Report Group”o A report group is a project area

• Aspen Process Economic Analyzer projects: You can create

o A project area

o A report group to coordinate a group of project areas

o The AUM Air utility module works with each project area and itsair requirements




Benefits:• You get early design metrics for decision making

• Decide what’s best, then trigger the LOAD operation

• With LOAD, a new Air utility area will be inserted into your project with itsdesigned list of air system project components

• Before LOAD, air system project components are interactively

o Selected based on your selection preferences

o Designed in accordance with your project basis and air designpreferences

o Sized

o Reported

• In a small fraction of the time and effort it takes to do this work in thetraditional manner

• Change the project scope? Re-run the utility module!

How AUM_Air Works

General AUM_Air Workflow1 Press U button to initiate.

2 Select Air Utility.

AUM_Air opens in MS Excel

3 Move the supplied Control Center toolbar to the top and click it.

4 Check Status.

5 Review the Guide, page 498H349.

6 Select and enter Preferences.

7 Check messages, review results in Report.

8 Revise Configuration parts 1 and 2.




9 Check messages, review results in Report.

10 Click the Load button to close AUM_Air and load the design results intoyour project.

11 Review Area and components.

12 Run the project, review results.

Using AUM_Air

Accessing AUM_Air

To access AUM_Air:

1 Starting with an open project that has been evaluated, click Run, thenclick Utility Model. Or, click the U button to access utility models.

The Utility Model dialog box appears:

2 Click Air – Instrument, Plant.

3 Click OK.

Three actions now occur

1 The model first identifies if a prior Air – Instrument, Plant model area is present in the project. If present, you can choose toDelete the prior area and continue with the model or return to theproject. If you click Delete, the utility model will proceed with thedesign and delay deletion until it is time to load the new results.

2 If no prior Air – Instrument, Plant utililty area is detected,the Welcome screen is displayed and remains present during a timewhen:

a Project requirements are automatically passed to the model

b The model prepares an initial design

c The model then displays the Control Center worksheet, whichlinks to all other worksheets and provides an indication of success




(green signal) or failure (red signal) to create an initial designbased on default design parameters.

3 A Load | Cancel | Minimize dialog box is provided.

4 To continue, click the minimize button at the top. This parks thebutton box for access during the design phase. Cancel ends the Air –

Instrument, Plant model session and returns normal project functionswith no change to the project.

Note: A Control Center button bar is provided to access theControl Center worksheet from any worksheet.

Nine worksheets are presented in a MS Excel framework:

• Welcome

• Control Center

• Guide• Status

• Preferences

• Config 1

• Config 2

• EquipStats

• PipeStats




The Initial Design

On initiation, the Air – Instrument, Plant model reports the status of thedesign on the Control Center worksheet under Status, and if there are any,identifies clashes on the Status worksheet and, further, on the Preferences worksheet.

A Status Report message: Successful. A Load can proceed indicates all iswell between project requirements, design parameters, and designmethodology. At this point, it is wise to review early design metrics byaccessing the EquipStats and PipeStats worksheets.

If captured results are acceptable, a click of the parked Load button:

• carries the design results into the project

• closes the worksheets

• returns to the project for evaluation of the augmented project

Should the design basis produce a clash with project requirements, errormessages and flags are displayed in a top-down succession of worksheets.

The first indication is given under Status Report on the Control Center worksheet. The Status worksheet is the central reporting agency, wherechecks are made and links are provided to source locations in the EquipStats and PipeStats worksheets.

To load the Air – Instrument, Plant data into your Icarusproject:

When you are satisfied with the model and the Status worksheet shows thatthere are no errors, you can load the Air – Instrument, Plant model intothe project.

1 Click the Maximize button on the parked Load | Cancel | Minimize

dialog box.




2 Click Load.

The Aspen Icarus Loader appears, showing the progress of loading the XMLdata into Icarus.

When the Air – Instrument, Plant data has been loaded into Aspen Icarus,the following confirmation message appears:

3 Click OK.

The Air – Instrument, Plant data is now included in your project.

Modifying Air – Instrument, Plant Data

When you have loaded Air – Instrument, Plant data in your project, youmodify that data using the AUM_Air module.

To Modify Air – Instrument, Plant Data:

1 On the main menu, click Run, then click Utility Model. Or, click the U button to access utility models.

The Utility Model dialog box appears. Note that the Status column saysLoaded.




2 Click Air – Instrument, Plant.

3 Click OK.

The following warning message appears:

Note: Clicking Yes does not actually delete the Air – Instrument, Plant

data in your project. You can click Yes, modify the Air – Instrument, Plant data, then choose not to replace the previous Air – Instrument, Plant datawith the modified data by clicking Cancel on the Load | Cancel | Minimize

dialog box.4 Click Yes.

5 Modify the data to your satisfaction.

If you want to replace the loaded data with your modified data, follow thesteps below.

1 Click the Maximize button on the parked Load | Cancel | Minimize dialog box.




2 Click Load.

The Aspen Icarus Loader appears, showing the progress of loading the XMLdata into Icarus.

When the Air – Instrument, Plant data has been loaded into Aspen Icarus,the following confirmation message appears:

3 Click OK.

The Air – Instrument, Plant data is now included in your project.

If you want to keep loaded Air – Instrument, Plant data and not replace itwith your modified data, follow the steps below.

1 Click the Maximize button on the parked Load | Cancel | Minimize

dialog box.




2 Click Cancel.

The following warning message appears:

3 Click Yes to cancel the loading process.

Your original loaded Air – Instrument, Plant data is retained.

Guide for the Air Utility Model(AUM)




SPECS Organization Chart

About this SPECS Book




About an Air Plant Unit




About Distribution Piping for an APU

Methods

In the conceptual design phase, lacking a plot plan, this method is used to

develop air distribution piping.• Some runs may be long, some short.

• Components in the augmented project scope definition may be modified,deleted, new ones added.

The following is a brief description of the methods used.

• Areas assigned to an APU are collected in the sequence of the project andare assembled in a column-row array

• Array dimensions are determined from area dimensions

• Row and column dimensions are figured from total area, number of areasand an initial aspect ratio of 3:2

Air Distribution

• Piping is developed for Instrument Air as well as Plant Air.

• Piping for each service is developed in the same way, except forvolumetric flow and line size

Distribution Piping

• The APU feeds air to the array through a Main Feeder (MF)

• The Main Feeder length is defined in Preferences

• Two Main Manifolds (MM) are used on extra-wide arrays, els one or nonefor an array one column wide

• Each MM feeds a Main Line (ML)• Main lines feed Branch Lines (BR)

• A tee of the Branch line supplies air to an Area Feeder (AF)

• Area Feeders connect to Area Headers (AH)

• Area headers, for 2-D area types such as Grade, Pad, etc supply air to theI-P transducers, control valves

o P&ID information from the original project provide therequirements for I-P and control valve components

o Utility station requirements are developed for each area basedon anticipated air tool usage and area size

A plant air connection is made off the Area Header Plant

for each utility station• Area headers, for 3-D area types such as open steel structures, etc supply

air to Risers, then Laterals which then connect to I-P transducers andcontrol valves.

o Utility station requirements are developed for each 3-D typearea based on anticipated air tool usage and area size




Schematic

The following schematic was prepared to illustrate a large project of 78 areas:

Configuration of Air UtilityProject Components• Project Components

• An Air Plant Unit - APU




• Schematic of an APU

• Multiple APUs

• Compressor Redundancy

Project Components

The Instrument and Plant Air Utility Model creates a set of projectcomponents in accordance with the needs of your:

• Project Scope definition

• Design and selection preferences for Instrument and Plant Air

Typical components• Air Compressors

• Interstage and After-coolers

• Air Filters

• Air Receivers• Air Dryers

• Air distribution piping (instrument, plant air)

• Utility Stations (air, water, steam, condensate drain services)

• Associated installation bulks would be developed during project run

Components are contained in a uniquely definedArea• Area Title contains a unique time and date to differentiate one run from

another

• Area can be modified or deleted in the usual way using Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer/Analyzer

An “Air Plant Unit” - APU• Air intake screens

• Air intake ductwork

• Air compressors

o One main compressor at 100% capacity or two at 50%capacity each

o Optional standby spare compressor

o Optional start-up compressor• Interstage and after-stage coolers

o Optional TEMA water cooled or fin-fan air cooled exchangers

• Air receivers

o Optional individual receivers for instrument and plant air orcombined receiver

o Optional main receiver or two at 50% capacity each

o Optional stand-by receiver




• Air filters – pre-filter and post-filter, one or more of each

• Air dryers - dual tower type (one working, one regenerating)

o One main at 100% capacity or two at 50% capacity each

o Optional standby spare air dryer

o Optional dryer for Plant Air

• Utility piping for turbine steam/condensate, cooling water/return• Distribution piping

o Instrument and plant air

o Utility stations

o Cooling water, steam/condensate headers

o Interconnects between two or more air plant units

Schematic of an Air Plant Unit

General Layout




Multiple Air Plant Units for Multiple Areas

One or up to four Air Plant Units to serve area air requirements.

Two distribution networks for each APU:• instrument air

• plant air

Compressor Redundancy: Multiple, Stand-by, Start-up




Design Considerations• Units of Measure

• Designed Components

• Volumetric Air Flow Rate

• Equipment Selection and Designo Compressor Model Selection

o Interstage and After Coolers; choice of

Air Coolers (for rack mounting)

Shell & Tube Heat Exchangers

o Air Receivers

o Air Filters

o Air Dryers

Units of Measure

Values are reported in the Unit of Measure set of the user’s project, in the:

• Utility Module interactive worksheets and reports

• Augmented user’s project file

Air Utility Area• Designated as AUM_Air_ddmmyy_tttt (date and time stamped)

• Contains Air Utility system project components

Air Utility Project Components

Each item is selected and sized:

• Area headers for cooling water/return, steam/condensate, instrument andplant air

• Air intake screens

• Air intake ductwork

• Compressors

• Interstage coolers

• Utility piping for turbine steam/condensate, cooling water/return

• Plant and Instrument Air Receivers

• Air Pre-filters, After-filters

• Air Dryers

• Distribution Pipe, Valves, Fittings

o Distribution circuits: up to four circuits (one to four air plantunits)

o Distribution piping, for 2D, 3D area types

o Utility stations (total number of stations)




Instrument Air (IA) Requirements: Air Flow

Rate

Plant Air (PA) Requirements: Air Flow Rate




Compressor Model Selection Method

Sizes compressor based on• Total project air flow

• Number of desired air plant units• Project areas assigned to each air plant unit

• Air plant unit redundancy (working spares, stand-by spares)

• Specs for start-up compressor

Model type is based on compressor air flow rate• Low flow rates – reciprocating

• High flow rates – centrifugal

• Flow rates less than model minimum -reciprocating

Reciprocating Compressor for Low CapacityRange




Gasoline Motor-Driven Reciprocating Compressorfor Low Capacity Range, Stand-by Spare

Centrifugal Compressor for High Capacity Range




Inter- and After-compression stage Coolers

Air Filters




Air Receivers

Air Dryers

Interactive Specs• Design Basis

o Equipment Redundancy

o Equipment Configurations

o Selection Specso Design Preferences

o Air Distribution

• Areas and Air Plant Units

• Layout

• Air Distribution Configuration

o Assignment of APUs to Areas




User Preferences• User enters specs interactively in MS Excel SPECS workbook

• Preferences worksheet– design and equipment configuration basis

o Organized by category

o Color coded

o Either/or selections are provided with a base (default) value

o Numeric selections are provided with a base (default) value

o Help messages assist selections

o Error messages are issued for out-of-limit or design clashconditions

• CONFIG worksheets: basis for distribution air piping to areas

o Part 1: Assignment of plant air to areas devoid of equipment

o Part 2: Assignment of an APU to an area

Equipment Redundancy• Main item at 100% capacity

• Main item split into two, each at 50% capacity

• Stand-by spare

o Optional

o Same size as main item or main item at 50% capacity

o Power option for stand-by compressors

Electric motor drive

Large compressors: steam turbine drive

Small compressors: gasoline engine drive

• Start-up compressors onlyo Optional

o Size based on user % of total capacity of main item

Equipment Configurations

Equipment configuration choices:

Combined air train




Individual Instrument air train

Wet or dry plant air train

Basis for Design: Preferences - 1

With the exception of item 1 (Conversion of “Quoted cost” items ….) where nodefault value is provided, every other user preference is supplied with adefault value and minimum and maximum limit values where appropriate.Item 1 requires user entry for an exchange rate which is used in an air utilityinternal cost model to evaluate costs of air intake screen/filters.

1 Conversion of " Quoted cost" items to Project Currency Units (PCU)

o Exchange rate, Project Currency Units per USD:

Note: This entry is required.

2 Ambient Air Conditions (one set for all APUs)

o Dry bulb temperature

o Wet bulb temperature

o Atmospheric pressure

3 Air Requirements - Capacity for Instrument and Plant air (one set for allAPUs)

o Excess capacity, %

Instrument air

Plant air

o Air system leakage, %

o Install utility stations?o Number of utility stations, % adjustment

4 Air intake screens/filters (uses an AUM_Air cost model)

o Air to media ratio

o Adjustments to model estimate

Cost

Hour to install




Weight

5 Compressors (one set of specs for all APUs) Main compressor:

o Main compressor

One at 100% capacity or two each at 50% capacity

Limiting flow rate for a single main compressor, % of

model maximum flowo Stand-by spare compressor

Install?

Driver type (electrical or other: turbine, gas motor)

o Start-up compressor

Install?

Minimum flow rate to qualify for installation

Running time

o Interstage Coolers

Type:

• Water cooled (small: Pre-engineered type orlarge: TEMA BEU)

• Air cooled (AIR COOLER)

Cooling water inlet and rise temperature

Air temperature rise for fin-fan air coolers

Notes:

If low capacity type is selected, may generate multiple low capacitycompressorsHigh capacity compressors may require project mid- and/or high voltagepower distribution levels.

o Utility services for compressors

Steam lines: run distance from boiler house to turbines

Cooling water lines: run distance from cooling waterplant

6 Air Receivers

o Common or separate receivers for instrument air and plant air?

o One main receiver at 100% capacity or two, each at 50%capacity

o Install a stand-by spare?

o Horizontal or vertical vessels?

o Maximum diameter

o Maximum tangent-to-tangent lengtho Instrument air supply time during emergency shut-down

o Plant air supply time during emergency shut-down

7 Air Dryers (Dual Bed–one working, one regenerating)

o Common air dryer for instrument and plant air?

o Is plant air to be dried?

o One main dryer at 100% capacity or two, each at 50% capacity




o Air purge rate

8 Air Filters

o Instrument air

Number of pre-filters

Number of post-filters

o Plant air Number of pre-filters

Number of post-filters

9 Distribution piping

o Minimum line size for air piping

o Distance from APU to process area

o Typical tie-in run length from one APU to another

Configuration Layout Method and

Distribution

Basis for Air Utility Model Pipingo Layout and primary distribution piping is based on the specs for

all areas assigned to an APU

o Area feeder and header, risers, laterals are based on area specs

Area layout in lieu of a project plot plano Project areas are arranged in project sequence

o Each area is given an ID code based on its report group and

area number Example:

• Report group 2 “Solvent Recovery”

• Area 4 description: “Distillation”

• Is given an ID code of 100 x 2 + 4 = 204

• ID code 204 is characterized by its report groupname and area description

o Areas are placed in a rectangular array according to the totalnumber of areas with an initial aspect ratio of 2:3 (fewercolumns than rows)

o Column-row arrangement is modified to obtain a row-column

balanceo A branch line is run across each row with area feeder take-offs

to each area in a row

o Area headers (and risers and laterals for 3D area types)connect to individual project components in that area

o Branches are fed using a Main Line

o Main Lines are fed by Main Manifolds for wide arrays

o Main Manifolds are fed by a Main Feeder from the Air Plant Unit




APU Configuration:o Choose default (one APU for all) or assign each Report Group to

one of four APUs

Example layout – group of areas served byAPU “A”

Circuit Preferences: Configuration of APUs• Worksheet provides a list of Project Areas and air consumption

• Configuration in two parts:

o Part 1: enables areas with no Instrument air requirements tobe provided with plant air, else no air is provided

o Part 2: enables each area to be assigned to an APU

• Initial configuration: all areas are assigned to APU “A”

o Design results are presented for the initial configuration

• Revised configuration: use of up to four (4) APUs

o Design results are presented for the revised configuration




Sample Layouts: One APU

Sample Layouts: Multiple APUs

Design Methods• Sizing Distribution Piping

• Schematic of Distribution Piping

Basis for Sizing Air Distribution Piping• Configuration (IA = instrument air; PA = plant air)




o Assignment of an APU to Project Areas

o Initial configuration: all are areas assigned to one APU

o APU Air flow for IA and PA is determined from sum of areausage requirements

• Sizing

o Air Module uses a built-in layout model to estimate airdistribution piping line lengths

o Each line type is assigned an “Iso” with valve and fitting counts,expansion loops for long runs

o Areas provides air flow requirements for each line

o Lines are sized based on air consumption and a pressure dropof 1 PSI per 100 ft [22.6 KPAG/100 M] or less with a minimumline size as defined in Preferences

o Design pressure: 150 psig [1350 KPAG]

Air Distribution Piping to Project Areas




Distribution for a 3D-Type Area

Sample AUM_Air WorksheetsDisplayed below are sample AUM_Air worksheets. Note the following detailsabout AUM_air and these sample worksheets:

• sheets are non-functional

• all worksheets visible to the user have the version number printed at thebottom of the sheet

• the project illustrated is Aspen Process Economic Analyzer ETOH Sample

Project • except for currency and exchange rate, sheets are in the user's units of

measure defined in the user's project specs

o currency is referred to as PCU - project currency unit

o you must enter an exchange rate when opening a project forthe first time. The exchange rate value will be "remembered"on opening the project thereafter

o ControlCenter, Status and Preferences sheet will alwaysshow an error because you must enter an exchange rate for thecurrency of the project (hyperlinks lead the you fromControlCenter to Status to Preferences to the item to berevised)

o on entering a proper value, the error message is not displayed

List of AUM_Air Worksheets

• Welcome

• ControlCenter




• Guide

• Status

• Preferences

• Config_1

• Config_2

• EquipStats• PipeStats

Welcome Worksheet

Control Center Worksheet




Guide Worksheet




Status Worksheet




Preferences Worksheet




Configuration Part 1: Assignment of Plant

Air to Areas Not Requiring Instrument Air

Configuration Part 2: Assignment of Areas

to an APU




Note: For clarity in this documentation, the following screen shot is shownbelow the one above it. On the actual Config 2 Worksheet, they are side byside.

Report – Equipment Component Stats




Report – Pipe Stats



11 Evaluating the Project 385

11 Evaluating the Project

Running a Project Evaluation

After all the process simulator data has been properly mapped and defined,you are ready to run a project evaluation. The project evaluation producescapital costs, operating costs and investment analysis reports. If any of thecomponents are modified, the evaluation process must be re-run.

To run a project evaluation:

1 Click on the toolbar.

– or –

On the Run menu, click Evaluate Project.

The Evaluate Project dialog box appears.

The dialog box shows the default Capital Costs report file name, Cap_Rep.ccp.This is the report reviewed in Icarus Editor. If you want it to have a differentname, type the file name in the Report File field.

2 Click OK.

If you are using the default Preferences, Aspen Process Economic Analyzerscans the project specifications for errors and/or inconsistencies and any




found are listed in the Scan Messages window.

Note: You can select in Preferences to skip the scan for errors (see pageXX499H48XX).

There are four types of messages:

Scan Message Description/Importance Level

INFOrmational For your information

WARNing Design can be produced, but you are alerted to problems

ERROR A design or cost cannot be produced for an item

FATAL Rare instance for extreme problems

You have the option to continue or stop the evaluation process (except in thecase of FATAL errors, which stop the evaluation process). You should carefullyreview these and fix any problems before proceeding.

When the project evaluation is done, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer listsall errors found in the capital cost evaluation for your reference.

If you are using the default Preferences, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer

automatically displays the Investment Analysis spreadsheets in the MainWindow when the evaluation is complete. See “Reviewing InvestmentAnalysis” on page XX500H439XX for a description of these spreadsheets.

Note: You can select in Preferences not to have Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer automatically display the Investment Analysis (see page XX501H48XX).




Reviewing and RevisingProcess Economics in theAnalyzer Economics ModuleThe Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) includes an interactive economicevaluation workbook, that allows you to review economic, scheduling, andmanufacturing premises and see the impact of revisions to those premises. Itdisplays in Excel key economic information over the project timeline to helpyou evaluate projected operations and the return on investment.

Loading the Analyzer Economics Module(AEM)

To initiate an economic scenario, first load the AEM.

To load AEM:

1 On the Run menu, click Decision Analyzer.

2 On the Decision Analyzer dialog box, mark the Develop Detailed ProcessEconomics Reports check box.

3 Enter the desired reporting currency symbol to use for the reporting of allcosts.

4 If the plant location currency is different from the currency used on thereports, enter the exchange rate as the ratio of Report Currency/PlantLocation Currency.

5 Click OK.

In Excel, two workbook files open: SPECS and RESULTS.




Overview of Workbooks

In addition to showing you the economic analysis of the current project basis,the workbooks allow you to instantly see the impact that revisions to thebasis will have on economic measurements. For example, you can revise therequired working capital percentage on the Project Input worksheet in SPECS

and, as a result, the Cash Flow bar chart on the Figures worksheet inRESULTS will change to reflect this revision. This is explained in detail in the “Revising Premises” section, page X502H397X.

SPECS Workbook

The SPECS workbook consists of the following worksheets, which you cannavigate by clicking the sheet tabs at the bottom of the workbook window:

Guide

The Guide provides you with an online reminder of helpful information, which

you may refer to during an interactive scenario session:• Purpose of Analyzer's Economics Module (AEM) and what AEM does.

• The three classes of information from which AEM works.

• The two workbooks for new scenario premises.

• Details on the worksheets containing input.

• Details on the worksheets containing results.

• Strategy - how to use this module effectively for evaluating business andeconomic options.

Control Panel

The Control Panel allows you to revise high-level stream premises. It featuresspinner controls and reset buttons, enabling you to change unit prices andinstantaneously see the resulting economic metrics and graphed results.




Key economic metrics displayed include: graphs of net present value (NPV)and annual production revenue, payout date, Internal Rate of Return (IRR),NPV over project lifetime, gross, operating and net revenue margins.

Decision Center

The Decision Center is AEM's navigator. It enables you to move quickly acrossall of AEM's user-interactive worksheets, all of which are included in horizontalformat. To view all the worksheets in a vertical format, use the DC_Vworksheet.

Both the horizontal and vertical formats enable you to quickly locate highlevel and lower level categories and the ultimate worksheet locations.Important error messages are displayed on the Decision Center header.

An NPV graph displays the current state of the scenario including high-levelerror messages with pointers to error locations.

DC_V

This worksheet contains the same content as the Decision Center worksheetin a vertical format.

Input Worksheets

The two input worksheets are for user-interactive revisions to premises. Theydefine your economic scenario. Revisions are immediately reflected in theStatus, Statements, EPC, and Figures worksheets. See page X503H397X forinformation on revising economic premises.




Project Input

In the Project Input worksheet, you can revise the schedule, time periods,capital investment, cost of capital investment, phase durations, capital costparameters, manufacturing cost parameters, operating labor andmaintenance cost parameters, general investment parameters, and

escalation.The following is an excerpt:

Stream Input

In the Stream Input worksheet, you can revise the stream factor to determine the

impact of turndown, turnarounds or a proposed expansion; split production into a

domestic and export stream with their associated unit prices; revise prices of by- products, raw materials, and utilities. An important aspect of the Stream Input

worksheet is the use of periodically changing values of stream factor, unit costs

and percent to export. This feature will enable you to study the impact of marketcycles and identify economic threats and opportunities related to production over

the life of the project.

Status Worksheet

View the Status worksheet for a quick summary of which values on the inputworksheets have been revised, need correction, or are incomplete.




The Status worksheet also displays a panel boardgraph of Net Present Value (NPV) and summarystatus report of project and stream inputconditions and major economic indicators to helpguide the analyst.

Capture Worksheet

The Capture worksheet and its initiating buttonsenables you to review and capture highlights of upto 50 economic scenarios. A set of buttons isprovided to initiate the capture of current scenariohighlights in advance of working on the nextscenario.

RESULTS Workbook

The RESULTS workbook consists of six worksheets, which you can navigate by

clicking the sheet tabs at the bottom of the workbook window.The following is an overview of the worksheets.

EPC Worksheet

The EPC worksheet provides before and after information regarding theengineering, procurement and construction aspects of your project. The term “before” refers to the state of your project based on your initial premises,prior to interactively changing from one scenario to another in Analyzer’sEconomic Module. The EPC workbook provides costs in both the currency ofthe plant location and a user-defined “reporting currency. For example, if yourproject were modeled using the European Union country base (EU, currencyin Euro) and you wished to see costs reported in Euro for a project relocatedto Mexico (reporting currency in k-Peso), you could define the reportingcurrency to be Euro and enter the desired exchange rate between the Euroand k-Peso. You would define the reporting currency and exchange rate alongwith the relocation country, at Run time. The EPC worksheet would reportplant location costs in both Euro and k-Peso. This worksheet currentlyprovides the only connection between costs in the country base currency andplant location currency.

The EPC worksheet provides the following information:

• EPC results based on the initial premises (before the scenario)

o Status of stream data

o Exchange rate used to compute plant location costs in the

country base currencyo Summary costs, man-hours in both plant location and country

base currencies

o EPC start and end dates

o Breakouts of costs and man-hour for direct materials,engineering and construction and project indirects.




• EPC scenario results and key economic measureso Economic measures: NPV, IRR, payout time, average annual

production over the life of the project

o Summary and detailed cost and man-hour information resultingfrom changes during the interactive session.




Project Basis

The Project Basis worksheet provides project name, project description,simulator type, capital cost evaluation and parameters, time periods,

construction schedule, manufacturing cost parameters, operating labor andmaintenance cost parameters, general investment parameters, escalation,cost summary, and EPC details based on your initial economic premises.

The following is an excerpt:

Design Basis

The Design Basis worksheet provides summary-level presentations of income,product revenue, manufacturing costs, margins, raw material costs, utilitycosts, and earnings based on your initial economic premises.




The following is an excerpt:

Statements Worksheet

The Statements worksheet, like the EPC, Status and Figures worksheets,shows results of changes made in the Input worksheets.

• Timeline of events (dates, periods).

• Payout time, IRR, NPV.

• Present values for individually selected production periods.

• Period-to-period statements with a display of results for a selectableproduction period: income-expense statement, summary cash flow

statement, capital expenditures statement, margins, and NPV graph.The following is an excerpt:




Figures Worksheet

The Figures worksheet, like the EPC, Status and Statements worksheets,shows results of changes made in the Input worksheets.

• Flows, by Calendar Period: Net and Cumulative Cash Flow, Margins, Grossand Operating and Net Income as a % of Revenue, Product Revenues:Domestic and Export.

• Production: Domestic and Export.

• Distributions, for a selected Production Period: Product Revenues,Manufacturing Costs, Operating Costs, Fixed Charges.

The following is an example of one of the distribution graphs on the Figuresworksheet:




Revising Premises

The premises on which an economic scenario is based can be modified on theProject Input and Stream Input worksheets. The results of modifications areimmediately reflected on the Status, Statements, and Figures worksheets.

Note: Revisions made in the workbook have no impact on the actual projectbasis.

To revise premises:

1 Select either the Project Input or Stream Input worksheet.

2 Go to the Select field of the item you wish to change. Pressing TAB movesthe cursor to the next field, while pressing CLEAR+TAB moves the cursorto the previous field. You can also use the mouse and arrow keys.

The Select field can contain one of the following symbols (not case-sensitive):

Enter To denote

B Use of base value.

R Use of revised value.

P Use of period-to-period values on the Stream Inputworksheet.

For example, changing the symbol from “B” to “R” acts as a toggle betweenthe base and revised value.




In the event a symbol is not entered, the base value will be used.

3 As this is an exercise in revising premises, enter “R” (or “r”) in the Selectfield.

4 Go to the input field and enter the new value. For percentage values,simply enter the percentage value. If 0.2% is to be entered, enter 0.2. If50% is required, enter 50. If a negative value is required, for example toindicate construction is to begin 0.5 periods early, enter a negativelysigned value, –0.5.

As you make revisions, notes and other messages are provided to assure dataintegrity. Each line item of data entry has at least one status “flag.”Informational and other messages are provided to guide you in preparing aconsistent set of premises.

As soon as you move from the revised field, the revision is reflected in theStatus, EPC, Statements, and Figures worksheets.

Note: Viewing the workbooks in a split screen arrangement lets you instantlysee the results of modifications. To do so, click Arrange on the Window menu,select Horizontal, and click OK. You will likely need to adjust the zoom to

about 50%. Keep ECOSYS.xls minimized.

For example, if you revise the required working capital percentage on theProject Input worksheet (shown in window at the top of the split screenpictured below), the Cash Flow bar chart on the Figures worksheet (shown inthe lower window) will change.

vised value of 10.00% will

used.

g field displays “?” andatus of Revision field displaysX!” because “r” has beenered without a revised value

se value will be used




Color Coding

• Base Values: green background, black text.

• Revised Values: blue background, black text.

• Status Values: yellow background, red text.

• Text Notes: blue text.

• Error Messages: yellow background, red text and flag symbols.

• Dates of key events: blue background, red text.

Saving AEM WorkbookTo save changes to AEM worksheets, it is recommended that you save allworkbooks by closing Excel and answering Yes when prompted to save.Saving the worksheets individually has been found to result in an error whenre-launching AEM.

Discussion of Economic Premises

The AEM workbooks organize economic premises into two main categories:project and stream input. This section describes the concepts behind thevarious parameters.

Project Input

As described previously, base values are listed to the right of the itemcategory. The Select field and Enter Revised Base Value field enable alternatestudies. First, enter either an “R” (not case-sensitive) in the Select field torevise the base value. Then enter a revised value in the Enter Revised BaseValue field. You can then enter a “B” (not case-sensitive) in the Select field to




switch between revised and base value. The Value Used field shows thecurrent status of your selection.

The following provides additional information about the individual parameters.

Scenario Reporting

• Title and date data: will be displayed in the headers of the variousworksheets and in the footer of the Status worksheet.

• Currency for Scenario Reporting: every cost value in the EconomicAnalysis workbook will be in the Reporting Currency and converted fromthe plant location currency by the designated exchange rate.

• Plant Location Currency: costs in country base location currency aredeveloped by the Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE) and are revised byAnalyzer’s Relocation Module (ARM). Costs in the plant location currencyare reported only in the EPC worksheet if the user elects a reportingcurrency.

• Reporting Currency: this currency is defined upon entering the Analyzer’sinteractive Economics Module along with an exchange rate relative to the

plant location currency. The exchange rate may be changed, within limits,in the Project Input worksheet. This will enable a user to trend a projectover a period of time, should exchange rates vary from the initial premise. Costs in the reporting currency are reported in all worksheets.

• Exchange rate: number of currency units of Reporting Currency per unit ofPlant Location Currency. The exchange rate may be modified in theProject Input worksheet to reflect a more current or anticipated futurevalue.

• Reporting of Cash flows: in millions of reporting currency units.

Schedule

A timeline is established with a calendar start date to enable the study ofeconomic cycles and report the timing of events. A base calendar start date isautomatically generated to accommodate the base start date of engineering.However, as new premises are added, the lead-time between start ofcalendar and start of engineering may be too short to accommodate otherefforts such as studies and changes to the fixed capital investment. Or, youmay wish to base your reporting calendar on a calendar year basis or yourcompany’s fiscal year. Once you select the start date of the reportingcalendar, you might wish to review your initial premise for the start date ofengineering.

The engineering start date may be modified as well as the calendar start date.Messages are provided in this section for lead-time, pre-planning time and

float to help you to establish timing of other events (see next section onCapital Investment).

• Start Date of the Reporting Calendar: defines (a) the project timeline, (b)enables the escalation to the start date of the calendar of costs enteringthe workbook from Analyzer that are founded on the “System Cost BaseDate”, and (c) enables the dating of tasks and events, including:

o Strategic planning and decision engineering

o Contractor’s engineering and procurement




o Construction delay/early start of construction

o Plant Start-up

o Start of Production

o Payout

o End of production, salvage of fixed capital investment (FCI),

return of working capital, salvage of catalyst and chemicals,etc.

• Start Date of Engineering.

• Status of the calendar: lead time, planning time, float time and otherhelpful status messages.

Time Period

• Period: the designated period is a year. Only yearly periods can beaccommodated with this release.

• Hours per period: determines stream factor, stream flows per period. Yourinitial premise may be revised in the Stream Input worksheet.

Capital Investment

• Decision Engineering Studies: duration is developed from the cost entryand placed on the timeline.

• Owner’s Engineering: duration is developed from the cost entry andplaced on the timeline.

• Increment/Decrement to FCI (fixed capital investment, also known astotal installed cost, total project cost) at the System Base Date: enablesstudies of FCI such as the trade-off between inside and outside batterylimits (ISBL/OSBL), plant capacity (with associated change in streamfactor – see Stream Input), and impact of FCI changes during engineeringon process economics, etc. Consider two uses of this feature (1) to

determine the impact on IRR and NPV of a 10% increase in capital costand (2) making a utility stream by adding more capital and setting theutility stream cost to zero. A change here will impact the phase duration ofengineering, procurement and construction as well as their expendituresalong the timeline. In the AEM workbooks, FCI undergoes a number ofadjustments from the time it is evaluated by the Icarus Evaluation Engine(IEE), as follows and as reported in the EPC worksheet:

o Initial evaluation in Analyzer performed by applying design andcost specifications to the list of project components for thespecified production capacity of the process facility and plantlocation.

o In the AEM workbooks:

Currency revision of FCI from the Plant LocationCurrency to the Reporting Currency, using exchangerate first established during Plant Relocation and thenunder Scenario Reporting in AEM.

Escalation from “System Base Date” to the Start Date ofthe Calendar.

Percentage Increment/Decrement adjustment (thissection).




Escalation of engineering, materials, construction to theperiod of expenditure as determined by the duration ofeach phase, progress of each phase duration, andposition along the timeline.

• Start-up costs: included as a capital expense, range of typical values: 8%to 10% of FCI.

Phase Durations

• Duration of EPC Phase: base value, from Analyzer (CPM-based planningschedule).

• Delay or Early Start of Construction: enables study of impact of delayprior to start of construction or early start. The planning schedule includesearly start. Analyzer splits construction from EPC duration to enabledelays to be studied. A negative delay value results in an early start. Asphase durations are revised, so too are dates of key events along thetimeline. As stream flows and expenditures are moved along the entiretime line by changes in phase durations (or other revisions), they will beevaluated for escalation or unit costs/prices that are assigned to eachperiod.

Capital Cost Parameters

• Working Capital, as a percentage of fixed capital investment (FCI). Therange of typical values is 10% to 25% of FCI (10% to 20% of the totalinvestment, i.e. the sum of FCI and working capital), but you can enterany percentage. A range of typical values is provided for guidance.

• Catalyst and Chemicals: for the initial charge, as a percentage of FCI andsalvage value at the end of production.

• Patents and Royalties, as an initial fee and/or fee, escalated for eachperiod of production and figured on the production for each period.

• Land: range of typical values: 1% to 2% of FCI.

Manufacturing Cost Parameters

• Operating Charges: if no base value is provided, Analyzer will estimateand report a cost value based on Plant Operating Labor. It will splitoperating charges into costs for Operating Supplies and LaboratoryCharges, which values may be revised individually as a percentage ofOperating Labor.

• Range of typical values

o Operating Supplies: 10% to 20% of Maintenance

o Laboratory Charges: 10% to 20% of Operating Labor

Note: Typical ranges do not define limits on user entry.

Operating Labor and Maintenance Costs

• Number of Shifts: base value determined by project components, type offacility, etc. might be revised, especially if Increment/Decrement is madeto FCI.




• Operator: number of operators and hourly rate may be revised from thebase value; Total Operating Labor Cost is displayed.

• Supervision: Number of Supervisors and hourly rate may be revised; TotalSupervision Cost is displayed.

• Maintenance: Cost/period is displayed and is reported as a percentage ofFCI, which % may be revised; range of typical values: 2% to 10% of FCI.


Base values for the following items come from your system input and may berevised in AEM:

• Tax Rate.

• Interest Rate: used in calculating net present values and payout time.

• Economic Life of Project: defines the time for depreciation and should bethe same as production life.

• Salvage Value, as a fraction of the initial capital cost. This value isrecovered at the end of the project life.

• Depreciation Method: select from Straight Lines, sum of the Digits, DoubleDeclining (Balance).

Escalation

Base values of the following items come from your system input and may berevised.

• Project Capital Evaluation, a single value is expanded in AEM for individualtreatment of expenditures along the calendar timeline for:

o Engineering

o Materials

o Construction

• Product Escalation: individually for domestic and export product; period-to-period price/cost values take priority over escalation.

• By-products: period-to-period price/cost values for an individual by-product

take priority over escalation for that by-product.

• Raw Materials: period-to-period price/cost values for an individual rawmaterial take priority over escalation for that raw material.

• Utilities: period-to-period price/cost values for an individual utility takepriority over escalation for that utility.

• General: for remaining categories.

Stream Input

This worksheet allows you to revise base values (assigned or default) forproduct, by-product, raw material and utility streams. Either a single value,applicable to every period (subject to escalation if a cost), or a period-to-period value (not subject to escalation) may be assigned. Indicate use of base(“B”), revised (“R”) for a single value for all periods, or individual period-to-period values (“P”). Symbols are not case-sensitive.




Phases Along the Project Timeline

The following resulting values guide other input specifications.

• Phase.

• Phase duration.

• Start date.

• Fraction of a period devoted to each phase along the calendar timeline,which includes the following:

o Start date of each period.

o Year: displayed with each section to maintain integrity ofperiod-to-period input data.

o Calendar Periods: Period (year) from the start of basicengineering.

o Periods of Operation – year from start-up.

• Start-up, Payout, Shutdown dates.

Production OperationsStream Factor, to study the impact of turndown and expansion.

Production

Price of domestic and export product and percentage of production devoted toexport product. The production capacity is reported for reference.

By-Products

Price of each by-product. By-product rates are reported for the designatedproduction capacity. The current version is limited to reporting 25 by-products.

Raw Materials

Price of each raw material. Consumption of each raw material is reported fordesignated production capacity. The current version is limited to reporting 25raw materials.

Utilities

Price of each utility; for ISBL/OSBL studies, consider revising an ISBL utilitystream cost in lieu of its production by an OSBL unit and revision of the FCI(Project Input>Capital Investment>Increment/Decrement to FCI) to account

for the OSBL unit’s FCI – Consumption of each utility is reported fordesignated production capacity.




Reviewing Results in AspenIcarus Reporter

Accessing Aspen Reporter

To access Aspen Icarus Reporter:


– or –

On the View menu, click Capital Costs View.

The Select Report Type To View dialog box appears.

2 Keep Interactive Reports selected and click OK.

The Reporter imports and loads the reports from Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer.




After the reports are loaded, the Aspen Icarus Reporter window appears.




Aspen Icarus Reporter Menu Bar

File Menu

Import Data – Import project repor ts. See page XX504H428XX for instructions.

Run Report – Run selected repor t. See pages XX505H408XX (Standard reports), XX506H421XX (Excel reports),and XX507H416XX (HTML reports) for instructions.

Open Workbook – Open the last Excel workbook c reated. See page XX508H424XX for instructions.

Create User Database – Export SQL database. See page XX509H429XX for instructions.

Exit – Close Aspen Icarus Reporter.

Trend Menu

Add Trend Data to Database – Add the trend data from the project reports current ly l oadedin Aspen Icarus Reporter to the trending database. See page XX510H425XX for instructions.

Create New Trend in Excel – Export t rending database to Excel. See page XX511H426XX forinstructions.

View Existing Trend Data – Open the trending data workbook in Excel. See “Data Trending,”pages XX512H425XX through XX513H428XX, for instructions

Clear Al l Saved Trends – Clear the trend ing database. See page XX514H425XX for instructions.

Which Report Mode?

There are four report modes: Standard reports, HTML reports, Management

reports, and Excel reports. All but Management reports present Capital Costs

and Design and Basis reports. Management reports contains snapshots ofproject data frequently requested by project management.

Standard, HTML, and Excel reports do not just present the same data indifferent applications. Because of the differing capabilities of the applications,data is presented differently in each. The choice of mode may depend uponwhat you wish to do with the data at a particular time.

Standard Reports

With Standard reports selected in the Report Mode section, the Reportssection displays a tree-structure grouping of standard reports.

Report Descriptions

Open the necessary category and sub-category folders and click on a reportto display a brief description of that report in the Description section.




Aspen ICARUS Reporter displays a description of the selected report.

See page XX515H412XX for descriptions of all Standard reports.

Opening a Report

Not all of the reports contain each of the features described in this guide. Forexample, the Contents view only appears on reports with multiple sections.In order to see all the features described, select the Con t r a c t o r – COA

S u m m a r y report located in the following folder:

Capital Cost Reports\Direct Costs\COA Summaries

To open the selected report:

• Click the Run Report button .

- or -

On the File menu, click Run Report.

- or -

Double-click on the report.

The report window appears.




Navigating

If there are multiple sections, a tree-structure Contents view appears on theleft side of the window, allowing you to jump to a section simply by clickingthe section in the Contents.

The arrow buttons on the toolbar let you page through the report:

Next Page Previous Page

Last Page First Page

Because the last page of a report usually contains the totals, clicking the Last

Page button is a convenient way to access them.

Magnification

To change the magnification level:

1 In the Magnification box, click , then click the desired level from themenu.




Note: You can also click directly in the Magnification box (without clicking

) and then zoom in and out using the up and down arrow keys on yourkeyboard.

2 When viewing the report at large magnification, you may wish to hide the

Contents view by clicking the Toggle Group Tree button . This makes

more room for the report.

Segregating a Cost Section

If the cursor changes into a magnifying glass icon when placed over a costsection’s title or totals, you can double-click to open a separate tab windowcontaining only that cost section.

For example, under Civil in the Con t r a c t o r – COA Sum m a r i e s report, thecursor changes into a magnifying glass when placed over the Concrete costsection’s title or totals.

Double-clicking on this cost section’s titles or totals opens a separate tabwindow.




Here, the Equipment cost section is displayed in a separate tab window,where it can be viewed and printed apart from the rest of the report.

Searching

To search the report:


2 Type the text string for which you want to search.

3 Click Find Next.

The next instance of the text string is framed in red.

Printing

To print the report:


The Print dialog box appears.

2 Make any desired changes to the default settings; then click OK.




List of Standard Reports




HTML Reports

With HTML reports selected in the Report Mode section, the Reports sectiondisplays a tree-structure grouping of HTML reports.

Report DescriptionsOpen the necessary category and sub-category folders and click on a reportto display a brief description of that report in the Description section.




Opening an HTML Report

To open the selected report:1 Do one of the following:

• Click the Run Report button.

– or –

• On the File menu, click Run Report.

– or –

• Double-click on the report.

A status window tells you when the export is complete and asks if you wouldlike to view the report now.

2 Click Yes.

Your browser displays the report.




Note: Generating the report as an .htm file allows the report to be sent in ane-mail.

Management Reports

With Management Reports selected in the Report Mode section, the Reportssection displays a tree-structure grouping of Management reports. Thesereports are intended to serve as snapshots of the project scenario.

Opening a Management Report

To open a Management report:

1 Select the report.


• Click the Run Report button.

- or -

• On the File menu, click Run Report.

- or -

• Double-click on the report.

The Management Reports Viewer displays the report. Pictured below is theDetailed Weight Information report, one of the Piping reports in theDiscipline folder.




Other reports, like the Equipment Cost (Total Cost) report shown below,show simply a bottom-line total.

Exporting Management Reports to Excel

You can export Management reports to Excel. This is particularly useful forwhen you want to be able to e-mail the report.

To export a Management report to Excel:

1 Click Export to Excel on the Viewer’s File menu.

Reporter searches for the last Excel workbook to which you exported a report.

• If no existing workbook is found, Reporter asks you to specify a worksheetname (see step 3) and creates a workbook – either DefaultWB.xls in theReporter output folder (if this is your first export to Excel since last re-

booting) or a workbook with the file and path name of the last workbookto which you exported since starting your computer.

• If an existing workbook is found, the Export to Excel Workbook dialog boxappears, asking if you want to overwrite the existing workbook, appendthe report to the existing workbook, or create a new workbook.




Select To do this

Overwrite existingworkbook

Reset the existing workbook with the selected report asthe only worksheet; any previously created worksheetswill be cleared.

Append to existingworkbook

Add the report as another worksheet in the existingworkbook; previously created worksheets will be retained.

Create new workbook Specify a new workbook in which the selected report willappear as a worksheet.

Clicking Create new workbook expands the dialog box to let you select afolder and enter a file name.

Note: Do not enter a file extension or period when entering a new workbookname.

2 Make your selection; then click OK.




3 Enter a name for the worksheet.

4 Click OK.

The Export Status dialog box informs you when the export is done and asksif you would like to open the workbook now.

5 Click Yes to open the workbook.

Excel displays the report.

Excel Reports

With Excel reports selected in the Report Mode section, the Reports sectiondisplays a tree-structure grouping of Excel reports.




Report Descriptions

Open the necessary category and sub-category folders and click on a reportto display a brief description of that report in the Description section.

Aspen ICARUS Reporter displays a description of the selected Excel report.

Opening an Excel Report

To open a report:

1 Select the check box next to the desired report.

You can select multiple report check boxes to open multiple reports.

Marking a folder’s checkbox will open all of the reports in the folder.

2 Click the Run Report button or click Run Report on the File menu.

Reporter searches for the last Excel workbook to which you exported a report.

• If no existing workbook is found and this is your first export to Excelduring this session, Reporter creates DefaultWB.xls in the Reporteroutput folder:




...Economic Evaluation V7.0\ic_cache\Reporter\Output

• If no existing workbook is found, but you have exported from Reporter toExcel since you last started you computer (to a file that’s since beenmoved or deleted), Reporter creates a workbook with the file and pathname of the last workbook to which you exported.

• If an existing workbook is found, the Export to Excel Workbook dialogbox appears, asking if you want to overwrite the existing workbook,append the report to the existing DefaultWB.xls workbook, or create anew workbook.

Select To do this

Overwrite existingworkbook

Reset the existing workbook with the selected report asthe only worksheet; any previously created worksheetswill be cleared.

Append to existingworkbook

Add the report as another worksheet in the existingworkbook; previously created worksheets will be retained.

Create new workbook Specify a new workbook in which the selected report willappear as a worksheet.

Selecting Create new workbook expands the dialog box to let you enter aworkbook path and name.




Note: Do not enter a file extension or period when entering a new workbookname.

After you make your selection and click OK, Excel opens a workbook

displaying the report.




Note: Exporting the report to an .xls file allows it to be sent in an e-mail.

AutoFilter

Several of the larger Excel reports generated by Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer take advantage of the AutoFilter feature in Excel.

To view a report that includes AutoFilter:

• Open the following report:

Capital Cost Reports\Direct Costs\Item Summaries\Combined

When AutoFilter is available, clicking next to a column displays a list of allthe different entries made in the column. Selecting an entry displays onlyrows that contain that entry in the column.

For example, selecting 105 – Misc. Item Allowance in the COA

Description column of the Item Summary Combined report would displayonly accounts with Code of Account (COA) 105.

Selecting Top Ten displays only items that contain one of the top ten mostfrequent entries.

Selecting Blanks (from the bottom of the list) displays only rows that containa blank cell in the column, while selecting NonBlanks displays only rows thatcontain a value in the column.

Opening Workbook Without Running Report

To view the last workbook created without running a newreport:

• On the File menu, click Open Workbook.




Data Trending

Data Trending facilitates comparison of scenarios by allowing you to reviewcapital cost summaries of different scenarios in a single Excel workbook. If,for example, you created three different scenarios for a project, you could usethe Data Trending feature to display the direct costs of each on one

spreadsheet, with a separate row for each scenario.

Clearing Trending Database

Because you only want to compare certain scenarios, the first step is usuallyto clear the database used to populate the Excel trending workbook.

To clear the trending database:

1 On the Trend menu, click Clear All Saved Trends.


2 Click Yes to confirm clearing of the data.

The Trending Data Update dialog box tells when this is done.

3 Click OK.

Adding Trend Data to Database

The next step is to add trend data to the database.

To add the current project reports’ trend data to the

database:

1 On the Trend menu, click Add Trend Data to Database.




The Trending Data Update dialog box tells you when Reporter has finished

adding the trend data.

2 Click OK.

You will need to add the trend data from the project reports of the otherscenarios you are comparing. For each of the other scenarios, open thereports in Reporter and complete the Adding Trend Data to Database

instructions above.

Using Reporter’s import function, you can open the other scenarios’ reportsin Reporter without opening the scenarios in Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer. See page XX516H428XX for instructions.

Creating a New Trend in Excel

After you have added the trend data from the Capital Cost reports of thescenarios you are comparing, you are ready to create a new trend in Excel.

To create a new trend in Excel:

1 On the Trend menu, click Create New Trend in Excel.

The Export to Excel Trending Workbook dialog box gives you the choice ofeither appending the trend data to the existing file or creating a new file.

2 Make you selection; then click OK.




The Export Trend Data into Excel dialog box appears. By default, all sixcapital cost categories are marked.

3 Clear any categories you want to exclude from the workbook; then clickOK.

The Export Status window tells you when the export is complete and asks ifyou would like to open the trending workbook now.

4 Click Yes.

Excel displays the trending workbook containing a spreadsheet for each of thecapital cost categories. Each set of trend data entered into the trendingdatabase is displayed on a separate row. (The workbooks for any categoriesexcluded at the Export Trend Data into Excel dialog box are blank).




5 After having created the trending workbook, you can access it fromReporter by clicking View Existing Trend Data on the View menu.

Importing Data into Aspen Icarus Reporter

When you have a project scenario open in Aspen Process Economic Analyzerand select Capital Costs (Interactive) from Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer, Reporter automatically imports that project scenario’s Capital Cost reports as it opens.

However, once you’re at the Aspen Icarus Reporter window, you canimport a project scenario’s Capital Cost reports without having the projectscenario open in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.

To import a Capital Cost report:

1 Click Import Data on the File menu.

The Import Selection dialog box appears.




2 Use the browse tree to locate the project scenario folder, which should beat:

…Archives_Aspen Process Economic Analyzer\[Project]\[Project Scenario]

After clicking the project scenario folder, PROJID should appear in the Fileset to import section.

3 Click PROJID; then click Import.

Reporter imports the data. When complete, the selected scenario’s reportscan be run from Reporter.

Creating a User DatabaseYou can export the Icarus SQL Database, listing the Relation attributes usedby the Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE), to a Microsoft Access Database (.mdb)file.

ICARUS Reference, Chapter 35, “Database Relations”, defines the ICARUSDatabase Relations and the different attributes under each.

To create a user database:

1 Click Create User Database on the File menu.

Reporter searches for the last .mdb file it created.

• If the file is not found or if this is your first database creation, the CreateUser Database dialog box appears with only one Export Option: CreateNew Workbook. The lower part of the dialog box provides fields forselecting a path and filename.

• However, if the last created file is found, the Export Options also includeOverwrite Existing Workbook. This option is marked by default, so thelower part of the dialog box is not visible until you select the Create New

Workbook check box.




2 Select a folder, enter a database name, and then click OK.

Reporter creates the .mdb file.

3 To review and work with the database, start Microsoft Access and openthe .mdb file.

Reviewing Results in IcarusEditorIcarus Editor is a fully OLE-compliant, Multiple Document Interface (MDI) texteditor program.

Accessing Icarus Editor

To view Capital Costs in Icarus Editor:1 Do one of the following:


– or –

• Click Capital Costs View on the View menu.

T2 TOn the Select Report Type To View dialog box, click Evaluation

Reports; then click OK.




Icarus Editor opens displaying the Capital Cost report.

The right-hand pane contains the report and the left-hand pane contains a

tree-structure Contents view that lets you jump to sections of the report.

Note: Click on the toolbar to turn the Contents view on and off (or clickContents on the View menu).

Printing a Single Section

The Contents view also lets you print a single section, rather than the entirereport.

To print a single section:

• Right-click on a section; then click the Print button that appears.

Icarus Editor Toolbar

New – open a new document in the Document View




Open – open an existing document

Save – save current document to disk

File Properties – view selected properties of current document

Print – print the current document

Print Preview – print preview the current document

Page Setup – specify how the current document will be printed

Cut – cut selected text to windows clipboard

Copy – copy selected text to windows clipboard

Paste – paste contents of windows clipboard into insertion location

Bold – bold selected text

Italic – italicize selected text

Underline – underline selected text

Select Font – specify font for selected text

Find (CTRL+F) – find any text string within the current document

Preferences – set and save your preferences

Toggle Contents – turn OFF/ON the Contents View

Cascade – display multiple documents cascaded

Tile Horizontal – display multiple documents tiled horizontally

Tile Vertical – display multiple documents tiled vertically

Help Contents – display on-line help

Report SectionsTitle Page

Two title pages are produced. This way, if the report is being printed on fan-fold paper, one of the title pages will be produced on a page facing up.




Features

• Estimate Base: financial quarter from which cost basis is derived and dateIcarus Evaluation Engine (IEE) was produced. Run Date: Date and timethat project evaluation was run.

• The currency symbol used in the report.

• Telephone numbers to call for technical support.

Contract Structure

The Contract Structure section provides names of contractors and reportingarrangement.

Table of Contents

The Table of Contents lists section names and the page number on whicheach starts. The number of sections may vary depending on the number ofReport Groups. If the project contains only one, then there will be only asingle summary. If more than one, there will be a separate summary foreach, plus a summary for the total project.




Project Summary

The Project Summary provides an overview of project costs.




Project Data Sheet

The Project Data Sheet lists items with separate columns showing user-entered values and system default values.

Total Manpower Schedule

The Total Manpower Schedule shows construction manpower loading based onthe CPM Construction Schedule.




Ways to influence this schedule include:

• Adjusting productivities, shifts per day, length of the workweek using theGeneral Rates specifications form and the Craft Rates specifications form.These forms are accessed in Project Basis view under Project Basis\Basisfor Capital Costs\Construction Workforce.

• Indexing man-hours either at the Project level (Project Basis\Basis forCapital Costs\Indexing) or at the Area level.

The number of MEN PER DAY for each vertical bar is generated by summing the

labor assigned to all the work items that fall within the period represented by

that bar in the barchart.

Cash Flow Summary

The Cash Flow Summary shows total capital cost spent.




This barchart schedule assumes that the DESI GN ENG’ G AND PROCUREMENT

monies are already spent at the start of construction - the curve is not trulytied to the CPM schedule. During construction, capital is then spent formaterial, direct field labor, equipment rental and subcontract work, Home andField Office, Start-up, etc., as the cost is incurred. By the end of construction,the TOTAL, AMOUNT given in the Project Summary is indicated here.

Operating costs, such as start-up utilities, raw materials, initial catalystcharges, etc., are not included.

Project Schedule Data Sheet

The Project Schedule Data Sheet lists the fabrication and ship times forequipment items by class and provides barcharts of the following:

General Schedule: Balanced display of Basic and Detail Engineering,Procurement and Construction (EPC).

Engineering Schedule: Details for Basic and Detail Engineering andProcurement; summary for Construction.

Construction Schedule: Details for Construction- others summarized.

Contracts Schedule: Schedule for contractor(s). When a single contractor isperforming all work, this schedule shows no new information.




Contract Summary

The Contract Summary breaks costs down by contractor.

Summaries By Report Group

Summaries By Report Group provides the direct material and labor costs andmanhours by report group for all areas reporting to that group.

List of Equipment and Bulk Material By Area

For each Area, the Equipment and Bulk Material List is divided into threesections. First there is the Component List , followed by the Area Bulk Report ,and finally the Area Data Sheet. Following the last Area of each Report Group,there are two more reports - the Report Group Summary and the ReportGroup Equipment Summary.

Appendix A- Design Data Sheets

Appendix A contains the Design Data Sheets for those items which are heavilydesigned by the system- fewer items will have Design Data Sheets than arelisted in the Component List, above, which lists all user-added components.Since the Design Data Sheet details the design on which the cost andinstallation labor is based, it is especially useful during calibration of the




system’s material costs and man-hours. It helps you compare yourbenchmark item to Icarus’ on an “apples-to-apples” basis.

Appendix B- Detailed Bulk Material and Field Manpower

Listing

Appendix B lists the design and cost details for every component, whethersystem-generated or user-added. The results are reported in the sequencethat the items appear in the Area tree diagram.

Appendix C- Bulk Material and Field Manpower Summary-by Report Group

Appendix C consists of one summary of the material and manpower man-hours and cost for all direct costs in the project. There is one report perReport Group; if there is only one Report Group, then this report iseliminated. It is replaced by the project bill of material (see Appendix Ddescription below).

Appendix D –Bulk Material and Field Manpower Summary

- Total Project

Appendix D is a project bill of material (BOM). The format summarizes totaldirect costs for all accounts. Due to the fact that the numbers are large, thisis the best source of material costs and man-hours for calibration.

Appendix E – Direct Material and Manpower Summary byMajor Account - Total Project

Appendix E lists the Icarus default units of measure as well as any usermodifications.

Reviewing Investment AnalysisYou can view the Investment Analysis results generated by Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer in two modes:

1 View the results in the Main Icarus Window (ICS spreadsheets).

2 View the results in MS Excel.

If you are using the default Preferences, Aspen Process Economic Analyzerautomatically displays the four Investment Analysis spreadsheets in the MainWindow after you run an evaluation. You can set Preferences so that AspenProcess Economic Analyzer does not automatically display the spreadsheets,in which case you would have to select to view them as described below.




Viewing Investment Analysis

To view the Investment Analysis in the Main IcarusWindow (ICS spreadsheets)



– or –

• On the View menu, click Investment Analysis View.

2 Use the tabs at the bottom of the window to move among the fourspreadsheets.

To view the Investment Analysis in MS Excel

1 On the main menu, click Tools | Options | View Spreadsheets in Excel.

T2 Do one of the following:


– or –

• On the View menu, click Investment Analysis View.

Note: In the Excel mode, additional spreadsheets are generated that reportdetails with regards to utilities, raw material and products. For instructions togenerate customized investment analysis reports, see Using the Reporting

Assistant in Excel mode, page XX517H458XX.

Equipment Summary

The Equipment Summary (EQUIP.ICS) contains a list of project componentsused in the analysis.




For each component, the summary contains the following information:

Area Name: The name of the operational unit area.

Component Name: The name of the project component.

Component Type: The type symbol for the component.

Total Direct Cost: The total direct material and labor costs associated with theproject component (including installation bulks), in the project currency.

Equipment Cost: The bare equipment cost associated with the projectcomponent.

Project Summary

Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS) contains a project summary for the capitalcosts (equipment plus bulks) and schedule. This worksheet also includesoperating unit costs (labor wage rates and utility unit costs), utility flow/userates (steam/water flow rates, etc.) and operating and maintenance costs.

Project Summary Input Data

The following information on the Project Summary spreadsheet is user-entered, except where noted:

Project InformationProject Name Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project name

ProjectDescription

Brief description of Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer project, from Project Properties

Analysis Dateand Time

The date and time this analysis was performed

Simulator Type The name of the process simulator from whichprocess data was imported

Simulator The version of the process simulator




Version

Simulator ReportFile

The name of the process simulator report file

Simulator ReportDate

Date and time of the process simulator report file

Economic

Analysis Type

The name of the Icarus system used for the

evaluationAspen ProcessEconomicAnalyzer Version

Version number for Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzer system

Project Directory Directory path for the current Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer project

Scenario Name Name of the current scenario (if applicable)

ScenarioDescription

Description of the current scenario, from ProjectTitle on the General Project Data form.

Capital Cost Evaluation Basis

Date Date of capital costs/schedule analysis

Country Country basis for the capital costs/scheduleanalysis

Units of Measure Units of Measure for analysis

Currency (Cost)Symbol

System currency symbol which depends on theselected country basis

CurrencyConversion Rate

Conversion factor between user-selectedcurrency to the currency used by the systeminternally for the selected Country basis. Forexample, if the US country basis is selected, theinternal system currency is US Dollars.Therefore, all numbers will be reported in USDollars. However, if a currency conversion rateof 1.5 is specified, all internal values will be

multiplied by 1.5 and then reportedSystem Cost BaseDate

The capital costs basis date of the system. TheAdjusted Total Project Cost represents thecalculated capital cost of the project (calculatedat this base date) escalated to the Start Date ofEngineering.

Project Type Project type identified on General Specs form

Design code Selected design code for equipment

Prepared By Identifier for the preparer of the processevaluator

Plant Location Location of the plant

Time Difference

Between SystemCost Base Dateand Start Date forEngineering

Number of days between the date of the

system’s Cost Base data (for example, firstquarter, 2000) and the project’s start date forbasic engineering.

User CurrencyName

User assigned name for the currency

User CurrencyDescription

User assigned description of the currency

User CurrencySymbol

User assigned symbol of the currency. This isthe symbol used for reporting the cost results in




the reports.

Descriptions for the following parameters are provided in more detail under Investment Parameter

specifications (page XX518H101XX).

Time Period

Period Description Duration of timeOperating Hoursper Period

Number of hours in specified period

Number of Weeksper Period

Number of weeks in specified period

Number of Periodsfor Analysis

Set to 20 periods for investment analysis

Schedule

Start Date for

Engineering

The beginning date for EPC (engineering,

procurement, and construction)Duration of EPCPhase

The calculated EPC duration in weeks

Length of Start-upPeriod

Number of weeks scheduled for start-upbeyond the end of the EPC phase

Duration ofConstruction Phase

The calculated construction duration in weeks

Completion Date forConstruction

The calendar date for the end of EPC

Capital Costs Parameter

Working CapitalPercentage

Percentage of total capital expense per periodrequired to operate the facility until therevenue from product sales is sufficient tocover costs.

Operating Costs Parameters

Operating Supplies Indicates the lump-sum cost of operatingsupplies.

Laboratory Charges Indicates the lump-sum cost of laboratorycharges.

User EnteredOperating Charges(as percentage)

Indicates the user-entered value for totaloperating charges.

Operating Charges

(Percent ofOperating LaborCosts)

Includes operating supplies and laboratory

charges. If the user enters a lump-sum valuefor either “Operating Supplies” or “LaboratoryCharges”, the addition of the two values willoverride the “User Entered Operating Charges”

Plant Overhead(Percent ofOperating Laborand MaintenanceCosts)

Consists of charges during production forservices, facilities, payroll overhead, etc.




G and A Expenses(Percent of SubtotalOperating Costs)

General and administrative costs incurredduring production such as administrativesalaries/ expenses, R&D, product distributionand sales costs.


Tax Rate The percent per period of earnings that mustbe paid to the government.

Desired Rate ofReturn

Indicates the desired (i.e., user- entered)return rate, in percent per period, for theinvestment.

Economic Life ofProject

Indicates the length of time in terms of periodsover which capital costs will be depreciated.

Salvage Value(Fraction of InitialCapital Cost)

The expected value of an asset at the end of itsusable life for the company. The differencebetween an asset’s cost and its salvage valueis the amount to be depreciated over theasset’s usable life.

Depreciation

Method

There are four depreciation methods allowed in

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer: StraightLine, Sum of the Digits, Double Declining(Balance), Accelerated Cost Recovery System(ACRS). See “Investment Parameters” inChapter 3 for a detailed definition of eachdepreciation method.

Escalation

Project CapitalEscalation

Rate at which project capital expenses mayincrease expressed in percent per period. If theaddition of Engineer-Procure-Construct (EPC)period and start-up period is greater than one

whole period, Project Capital Escalation is usedto escalate the capital expenses for periodsbeyond the first period.

Products Escalation Rate at which the sales revenue from productsof the facility are to be escalated (increased) interms of percent per period.

Raw MaterialEscalation

Rate at which the raw material costs of thefacility are to be escalated (increased) in termsof percent per period.

Operating andMaintenance Labor

Rate at which the operating and maintenancecosts of the facility are to be escalated(increased) in terms of Escalation percent perperiod. The operating labor costs include

operators per shift and supervisory costs.Utilities Escalation User-entered percentages reflecting the

anticipated utility price increase each period.

Project Summary Output Data

The following OUTPUT data is generated by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer:




Project Results Summary

Total ProjectCapital Cost

The total capital cost investment needed forthe project. If the calculated EPC period ismore than a year, the capital costs expenditure

will be spread out over the length of the EPCperiod.

Total Raw MaterialsCost

The total raw material cost of the facility expressed in terms of cost per period.

Total ProductsSales

The total product sales of the facility expressedin terms of cost per period.

Total Operatingand MaintenanceLabor Cost

The operating labor (including operators/shiftand supervisors/shift) and maintenance laborcosts in terms of cost per period. Themaintenance cost includes maintenance laborand supplies.

Total Utilities Cost The total utilities usage cost expressed in cost

per period.

Total OperatingCost

The total of raw material, utility, operatinglabor, maintenance, operating charges, plantoverhead and G and A expenses.

Operating LaborCost

Includes operators per shift and supervisorsper shift costs.

Maintenance Cost Maintenance cost of the equipment includinglabor and materials.

Operating Charges Includes operating supplies and laboratorycharges.

Plant Overhead Consists of charges during production forservices, facilities, payroll overhead, etc.

Subtotal OperatingCost

Subtotal cost of raw materials, operating labor,utilities, maintenance, operating charges, andplant overhead.

G and A Cost General and administrative costs incurredduring production. This is calculated as apercentage of the Subtotal Operating Costs.

The costs listed under Project Results Summary are broken down intoindividual elements under Project Capital Summary:

Project Capital Summary

PurchasedEquipment

The total material cost of process equipmentand quoted equipment cost items. Material costis accounted for in the codes of account 100 -

299.

Equipment Setting The total construction labor cost for settingequipment in place.

Piping

Civil

Steel

Instrumentation

Electrical

The cost reported for each of these itemsindicates the total material and constructionlabor cost calculated for the category. Theabove cost items may have originated fromtwo sources:

Installation Bulks (please refer to Icarus




Insulation

Paint

Reference).

User: The user can add project componentsthat create cost items in these categories. Theproject components may be in the followingcategories: Plant bulks, Site development andBuildings.

Other This item is the total of the following costs:design, engineering, and procurement costs;material charges (freight and taxes); andconstruction field indirect costs (fringebenefits, burdens, consumables/small tools,insurance, equipment rental, field services,field office construction supervision, and plantstart-up).

Subcontracts The total cost of subcontracted work. This costitem is normally zero in Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer.

G and A Overheads General and administrative costs associatedwith engineering, materials, and constructionwork.

Contract Fee The total cost of contract fees for engineering,material, construction, any subcontractedwork.

Escalation The total capital costs escalation amount. Thiscost item is normally zero in Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer.

Contingencies The additional costs required to bring thisproject to completion. In Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer, this cost item isautomatically calculated based on the projecttype and process complexity.

Total Project Cost The total project capital cost of the plantcalculated by the Icarus Evaluation Engine asof the “System Cost Base Date”.

Adjusted TotalCapital Cost

Indicates the Total Project Cost (describedabove) adjusted to the Start of BasicEngineering. The Total Project Cost isescalated , using the Project Capital EscalationParameter, from the system Cost Base date tothe start date of basic engineering.

Below is the formula used:

C_at=C_t*(1+(t_diff*e)/(w*7*100))

where:

C_at = Adjusted Total Capital Cost

C_t = Total Capital Cost

t_diff = Time difference between System Cost Base Dateand Start Date for Engineering

e = Project Capital Escalation

w = Number of weeks per period

Raw Material Costs and Product Sales

Raw Materials Costper Hour

Total raw material usage cost per hourspecified in the Raw Material Specificationsfile.





Total cost of raw materials per period. Thisnumber is generated by multiplying RawMaterials Cost per Hour by Operating Hoursper Period.

Products Sales perHour

Total produced product sales expressed in costper hour.

Total Products Sales Total product sales per period. This number isgenerated by multiplying Products Sales perHour by Operating Hours per Period.

Main Product Name The main product of the plant is considered tobe the product which produces the largestsales figure per period. This field contains thedescription of the main product (assigned bythe user).

Main Product Rate The production rate of the main product.

Main Product UnitCost

The unit cost rate of the main product.

Main Product The production basis (or unit of measure) ofProduction Basis the main product (LB,

GALLONS, etc.).

Main Product Rateper Period

The production rate of the main product perperiod .

Main Product Sales The total sales figure of the main product perperiod.

By-product Sales The total sales figure per period of theby-products (i.e., products other than themain product of the plant).

Operating Labor and Maintenance Costs

Operating Labor

Operators per Shift The number of operators per shift per hournecessary to operate the plant.

Unit Cost The wage rate for each operator expressed incost per operator per shift.

Total OperatingLabor Cost

Total operating labor cost obtained bymultiplying number of operators per shift bythe unit cost and by Operating Hours perPeriod.

Maintenance

Cost/8000 Hours The cost of maintaining the facility equipmentfor 8000 hours of operation of the facility.

Total MaintenanceCost

The total maintenance cost of the facility perperiod.

Supervision

Supervisors perShift

The number of supervisors per shift per hournecessary to oversee personnel who operatethe facility.




Unit Cost The wage rate for each supervisor expressedin cost per supervisors per shift.

Total SupervisionCost

Total supervising labor cost obtained bymultiplying number of supervisors per shift bythe unit cost and by Operating Hours perPeriod.

Utilities Costs

The utility cost breakdown is given below for electricity, potablewater, fuel and instrument air as well as user defined process utilitiessuch as steam.

Note: The Process utilities details are available only when the resultsare viewed in Excel. These are made available through separatespreadsheets.

The description of each utility includes:

Rate The rate of use of the utility in terms ofamount per hour.

Unit Cost The unit cost of the utility in cost per amount.

Total Cost The total cost of the utility in cost per period.

Cashflow

Cashflow (CASHFLOW.ICS) calculates the net present value (NPV), internalrate of return (IRR), profitability index (PI), payback period, etc.

The spreadsheet displays the cashflow information shown by period. The beginning part of thespreadsheet contains data/results carried over from the Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS)

spreadsheet.

Item Description




TW Number of Weeks per Period

T Number of Periods for Analysis

DTEPC Duration of EPC Phase

DT Duration of EPC Phase and Startup

WORKP Working Capital Percentage

OPCHG Operating Charges

PLANTOVH Plant Overhead

CAPT Total Project Cost

RAWT Total Raw Material Cost

PRODT Total Product Sales

OPMT Total Operating Labor and Maintenance Cost

UTILT Total Utilities Cost

ROR Desired Rate of Return/Interest Rate

AF ROR Annuity Factor

TAXR Tax Rate

IF ROR Interest Factor

ECONLIFE Economic Life of Project

SALVAL Salvage Value (Percent of Initial Capital Cost)

DEPMETH Depreciation Method

DEPMETHN Depreciation Method Id

ESCAP Project Capital Escalation

ESPROD Products Escalation

ESRAW Raw Material Escalation

ESLAB Operating and Maintenance Labor Escalation

ESUT Utilities Escalation

START Start Period for Plant Startup

PODE Desired Payout Period (excluding EPC and StartupPhases). Reserved for future use.

POD Desired Payout Period: Reserved for future use.

DESRET Desired Return on Project for Sales Forecasting.Reserved for future use.

END End Period for Economic Life of Project

GA G and A Expenses

DTEP Duration of EP Phase before Start of Construction

OP Total Operating Labor Cost

MT Total Maintenance Cost

Sa l es

A number will appear in this category only after the time allotted for all priorphases (engineering, procurement, construction and startup phases) hasexpired.

SP (ProductsSales)

The total products sales value per period calculatedin PROJSUM.ICS.




SPF (ForecastedSales AnnuityFactor)

Reserved for future use.

SF (ForecastedSales)

Reserved for future use.

S (Total Sales) Indicates the amount received per period from sold

products. This number is either SP or SF.

Expenses

Includes both capital and operating expenditures per period listedbelow.

CAP (CapitalCosts)

Indicates, by period, total funds spent prior to startup.

Unescalated Cumulative Capital Cost: Indicates thetotal capital costs spent through the current period.This is based on the Total Project Capital Cost inPROJSUM.ICS.

Capital Cost: Indicates, by period, the amount of

initial, non-variable costs associated with the project.This number is based on the Total Project Capital Costfound in PROJSUM.ICS.

Cumulative Capital Cost: Indicates capital expendituresthrough period n. For example, the number in period 4represents the total capital expenditures beginning inperiod 1 and ending in period 4.

Working: Indicates the amount required to operate thefacility before the revenue from product sales issufficient to cover costs. Working Capital is a lump-sum amount which takes effect during the start-upperiod. It is escalated at rate equal to the ProjectCapital Escalation rate.

OP (OperatingCosts)

Indicates, by period, the total expenditure on thefollowing items necessary to keep the facilityoperating: Raw Materials, Operating Labor Cost,Maintenance Cost, Utilities, Operating Charges, PlantOverhead, Subtotal Operating Costs, and G and ACosts. This number is the Total Operating Costimported from PROJSUM.ICS and entered in this fieldafter capital expenditures cease.

(R)Revenue

Indicates, by period, the amount of money available after capital andoperating expenses have been paid. This number is obtained by subtracting

Capital Costs and Operating Costs from Sales.DEP Depreciation Expense: the amount by which the value of the capitalcost decreases each period. The Total Project Capital Cost is depreciated, viathe chosen depreciation method, over the useful Economic Life of the facility.The Straight Line Method assumes that the item will depreciate by a constantamount over its Economic life. When the Sum of the Years Method is used,the depreciation expense decreases during each year of the project’s usefullife. When the Double Declining Balance Method is used, the project isdepreciated in geometric increments. The Accelerated Cost Recovery System




assumes that the project begins operating in the second half of the first year,rather than in the beginning of the first year.

E Earnings Before Taxes: funds available after all expenses have beenpaid. This number is obtained by subtracting the Depreciation and theInterest Expenses from the Revenue.

TAX Indicates amount owed to the government. This number is obtained bymultiplying the tax rate by Earnings Before Taxes.

NE Net Earnings: funds available after taxes have been paid. This numberis obtained by subtracting the Taxes from the Earnings Before Taxes.

TED Total Earnings: total cash available from project. This number iscomputed by adding the Depreciation Expense to the Net Earnings. Since thedepreciation expense is a non-cash expense (no cash actually leaves thefacility in order to pay the depreciation expense) adding the depreciation tothe net earnings gives the total cash flow obtained from the project. Inclusionof the Depreciation Expenses reduces the amount of taxable income.

TEX Total Expenses (Excludes Taxes and Depreciation): the total expenses

of the project including capital, operating, and any interest expense.FVI Future Value of Cumulative Cash Inflows: sums the Sales receivedthrough period n and indicates what the Sales would be if they had beenreceived in the current period. For example, the value in period 4 is what thesales in periods 1-4 would have been if all of these funds had been received inperiod 4.

PVI Present Value of Cumulative Cash Inflows: the current worth of all thecash received through period n. For example, the number in period 4represents the value that the sales generated in periods 1 through 4 would beif those sales were received in the first period. This number is obtained bysumming all of sales from prior time periods adding this amount to sales inthe current time period. Using the specified interest rate, this total is then

discounted back to the first time period.

PVOS Present Value of Cumulative Cash Outflows, Sales.

PVOP Present Value of Cumulative Cash Outflows, Products: the currentworth of all of the cash paid through period n. For example, the number inperiod 4 represents the value that the expenses paid in periods 1 through 4would be if those expenses were paid in the first period. This number isobtained by summing all of the outflows (Capital Costs, Operating Costs,Interest Expense) from prior time periods and adding this amount to theoutflows in the current period. Using the specified interest rate, this total isthen discounted back to the first time period .

PVO Present Value of Cumulative Cashflows: represents PVOS or PVOP

depending on whether or not you entered a desired payout period. If youentered a desired payout period, the basis for the cash outflow calculation isthe Forecasted Sales. Otherwise, the basis is Product Sales.

PV Present Value of Cashflows: the present worth of the Total Earningsreceived in the current period. For example, the number in period 4represents the value that the Total Earnings generated in period 4 discountedback to the first time period.

Final results are shown below:




NPV Net Present Value: the current worth of all the Net Earnings receivedthrough period n. For example, the number in period 4 represents the valuethat the Net Earnings generated in periods 1 through 4 if those earnings werereceived in the first period. This number is obtained by summing all of the NetEarnings from prior time periods and adding this amount to the Net Earningsin the current time period. Using the specified interest rate, this total is then

discounted back to the first time period. The sign of this value determines theanalysis result. If, in a certain period, the sign of the net present value isnegative, then the proposed investment appears not to be profitable, thus far.For example, if the sign of the net preset value is negative in period 3, thenthe project does not appear to be profitable during periods 1, 2, and 3.However, if the sign is positive, then the project appears to be profitable,from period 3 onward. If the net present value equals zero, then the projectdoes not incur any losses or gains (break-even point).

IRR Internal Rate of Return: the rate at which the present value of all cashflows is zero. It is also known as the Discounted Cash-Flow Rate of Return.This value is calculated at the “End Period for Economic Life of Project” (i.e., “Economic Life of Project” and considering the length of EPC and Startup

Period). At the “End Period for Economic Life of Project”, it is assumed thesalvage value of the plant and the working capital are recouped. IRR is theafter-tax interest rate at which the organization can borrow funds and breakeven at the end of the project life.

MIRR Modified Internal Rate of Return: the profitability of the project. Theinternal rate of return is the interest rate which equates the present value ofa project’s expected cash inflows to the present value of the project’sexpected costs (or outflows). The internal rate of return for each period iscalculated by dividing the Present Value of Cumulative Inflows by the PresentValue of Cumulative Outflows and raising this to a power and multiplied by100. Two criteria are critical in evaluating the internal rate of return. First, ifthe sign of the rate of return is negative, the project appears not to be

profitable. If the sign is positive, then the project appears to be profitable. Ifthe rate of return equals zero then the project incurs no losses or gains(break-even point). In addition, if the rate of return is greater than the ratewhich could be obtained from other opportunities (i.e., investing in a bank),then the project probably should be undertaken.

NRR Net Rate of Return: the profitability of the project. The net rate ofreturn for each period is calculated by dividing the Net Present Value by thePresent Value of Cumulative Outflows and then multiplying the result by 100.

PO Payout Period: the expected number of years required to recover theoriginal investment in the project. This row will indicate the length of timethat the facility needs to operate in order to recover the initial capitalinvestment (total capital cost plus working capital). If a number is entered for

the Desired Payout Period, the spreadsheet will determine the amount ofSales necessary to meet this desired payout.

ARR Accounting Rate of Return: measures a project’s contribution to thefirm’s net income. This number is the ratio of the project’s Average AnnualExpected Net Income to its Average Investment. For example, the AverageAnnual Expected Net Income for the fourth period is determined by summingnet earnings from periods 1 through 4 and divided by 4. The AverageInvestment is determined by finding the Salvage Value, and adding this




number to the Total Project Cost and dividing this total by 2. If the accountingrate of return is greater than one, then this is an indication that the projectmight be a profitable undertaking. If the sign is negative, then the projectdoes not appear to be profitable. If this number equals zero then the projectincurs no losses or gains (break-even point).

PI Profitability Index: shows the relative profitability of any project; itshows the present value of the benefits relative to the present value of thecosts. For each period, this number is computed by dividing the Present Valueof the Cumulative Cash Inflows by the Present Value of the Cumulative CashOutflows. If the profitability index is greater than one, then the projectappears to be profitable. If this index is less than one, then the projectappears not to be profitable. If this number equals zero then the projectincurs no losses or gains (break-even point).

Analysis

Analysis results are shown by period. “( - )” indicates the project in the current

period appears unprofitable, while “0” indicates break-even status.

Dep r e c i a t i o n Ca l c u l a t i o n s

This section presents details on the calculation of depreciation.

Executive Summary

Executive Summary (EXECSUM.ICS) contains a project summary intended tobe reviewed by executives and other business decision makers.

It contains the following information:

PROJECT NAME Aspen Process Economic Analyzer projectname




CAPACITY Capacity of plant for major product

PLANT LOCATION Location of plant

BRIEF DESCRIPTION Brief description of project, from ProjectProperties

SCHEDULE

Start Date forEngineering

The beginning date for EPC (engineering,procurement, and construction)

Duration of EPCPhase

The calculated EPC duration in weeks

Completion Date forConstruction

The calendar date for the end of EPC

Length of Start-upPeriod

Number of weeks scheduled for start-upbeyond the end of the EPC phase

INVESTMENT

Currency Conversion Conversion factor between user-selectedcurrency to the currency used by the

system internally for the selected Countrybasis. For example, if the US country basisis selected, the internal system currency isUS Dollars. Therefore, all numbers will bereported in US Dollars. However, if acurrency conversion rate of 1.5 is specified,all internal values will be multiplied by 1.5and then reported

Total Project Capital The total capital cost investment needed forthe project. If the calculated EPC period ismore than a year, the capital costsexpenditure will be spread out over thelength of the EPC period

Total Operating Cost The total of raw material, utility, operatinglabor, maintenance, operating charges,plant overhead and G and A expenses


The total raw material cost of the facilityexpressed in terms of cost per year

Total Utilities Cost The total utilities usage cost expressed interms of cost per year

Total Product Sales The total product sales of the facilityexpressed in terms of cost per year

Desired Rate ofReturn

Desired rate of return expressed in terms ofpercent per year.

PROJECT INFORMATION

Simulator Type The name of the process simulator fromwhich process data was imported

Version The version of the process simulator

Report File The file name of the process simulatorreport file

Report Date Date and time of the process simulatorreport file




Economic AnalysisType

The name of the Icarus system used for theevaluation

Version Version number of the Icarus system.

System Cost BaseDate

The capital costs basis date of the system.The Adjusted Total Project Cost representsthe calculated capital cost of the project

(calculated at this base date) escalated tothe Start Date of Engineering.

Project Directory Directory path for the current Aspen ProcessEconomic Analyzer project

Analysis Date Date investment analysis was run.

Country basis Country basis for the capital costs/scheduleanalysis

Project Type Project type identified in the standard basisspecs

Design code Selected design code for equipment

Prepared By Identifier for the preparer of the processevaluator

Using the Reporting Assistant

The Reporting Assistant feature lets you create your own customized reportspreadsheets, combining information from all other Icarus generatedspreadsheets.

The sections below describe the steps to create such custom reports whenviewing the results within the Icarus Main Window (ICS) and when viewingthem in Excel.

Using the Reporting Assistant in ICS

To develop a customized spreadsheet file and template

1 On the Tools menu, click Options | Reporting Assistant.




The Reporting Assistant Options dialog box appears.

2 On the Report File tab, click New.

3 In the Save As dialog box, type a name for the report file that will containyour customized spreadsheet. For example, type Cu s t om as shownbelow.

4 Click Save.

5 Click the Report Templates tab.




6 In the Template Files section, click New.

7 In the Save As dialog box, type a name for the template file (forexample, s u m m a r y ) and click Save.

This example creates a reporting template for future use calledSummary.tra.

8 In the Template Entries section, click New Entry. In the Column Labelfield, enter a label (for example, “Project Name”) for the first column onyour custom report spreadsheet. The Display Column box shouldautomatically display “1”.

9 The Entry Definition section defines the data to be entered in the above

column. Select a file name in the Source box, then enter the column androw of the source data.

For example, in the figure below, the contents of Column C, Row 8 of Project.ics has been specified to appear in the customized reportspreadsheet’s Project Name column.




10 Follow the same procedure (steps 7 - 8) to add more entries. You can usea variety of sources. For example, adding the following entries will resultin a report template that uses all three of the previously discussed .icsfiles as sources.

Column LabelDisplayColumn Source

SourceColumn

SourceRow

Project Name 1 projsum.ics C 8

Start Date forEngineering

2 projsum.ics C 61

Tax Rate 3 projsum.ics C 112

Purchased

Equipment Cost 4 projsum.ics C 172

Total ProjectCost

5 cashflow.ics C 14

TotalMaintenanceCost

6 cashflow.ics C 40

CompletionDate forConstruction

7 execsum.ics B 17

11 When all the template entries are added, return to the Report File tabview. To the right of the Template File field, click Browse.

12 Select the newly created template file (for example, Summary.tra) and

click Open.

13 Click OK to exit the Reporting Assistant Options dialog box.

Using the Reporting Assistant in Excel mode

When the results are viewed in Excel, certain additional results are madeavailable to the user. These include details about the process utilities as wellas the individual raw material and products in the project.




The Excel mode uses two files:

A s p e n P r o c e s s

Ec o n om i c

A n a l y z e rWB . x l s

T h i s w o r k b o o k c o n t a i n s t h e s p r e a d s h e e t s u s e d t o

r e p o r t t h e i n v e st m e n t a n a l y s i s r e s u l t s . T h i s i s a n

I CA RUS s y s t e m f i l e a n d u s e r s a r e r e com m e n d e d

n o t t o m o d i f y i t s co n t e n t s .

A s p e n P r o c e s s

Ec o n om i cA n a l y z e rW B _TRA . x l s

T h e Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls f i l e

s t o r e s t h e c u st o m i z a t io n s t h a t a r e i n t u r n u s e db y t h e Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB.xls. Y o u

c a n m o d i f y i t s co n t e n t s t o cu s t o m i z e t h e RunSummary w o r k s h e et .

The global copy of these files resides in the \Data\ICS folder. The files arecopied into the individual project folder when the investment analysis resultsare invoked

Note: If copies of these files already exist within the projects, then they maynot be replaced and so may have to be replaced manually by the user. In thecase of ICARUS projects that are migrated from previous versions, any olderversions of these files will be saved as a backup and the newer versions will

be used.

The Run Summary worksheet in the Aspen Process Economic

AnalyzerWB.xls workbook is the sheet that can be customized by the user.The Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls file stores thecustomizations that are in turn used by the Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzerWB.xls. The Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls filesstores:

• The template to be used in the Run Summary worksheet

• Any additional user defined functions (UDF) that the user wishes toincorporate.

The default Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls that is

provided with the system can be used to review these aspects of the file. Thesections below explain this further.

Steps to customize the Run Summary worksheet:

If you want to view a particular piece of information fromone of the spreadsheets in Aspen Process Economic

AnalyzerWB.xls, on the Run Summary sheet, follow thesesteps.

1 Close any open ICARUS projects and close ICARUS.

2 Open the ICS>>Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls file.

3 Edit the Template worksheet and add any user-defined functions that youintend to use (see sections below).

4 Save and close the Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls

file.

5 Re-open the ICARUS project.




6 Delete or rename any previous versions of Aspen Process Economic

AnalyzerWB.xls and Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls that may exist within the ic_cache>>Current Working Project folder.

7 Run the investment analysis and ensure that your changes are reflected inthe Run Summary worksheet.

Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzerWB_TRA.xls>>Templateworksheet:

The Template worksheet has three columns that you can modify.

This column denotes

Dest the destination column in the Run Summary worksheet, where aparticular piece of data should be reported.

Column Heading the title that should be used.

Source/Formula the source from which the data should be retrieved. Formulascould also be used.

Here is an example:

Dest Column Heading Source/Formula

C Time Now()

D Project Name 'Project Summary'!C8

Keep the following in mind when editing the Template:

• Entries must begin at cell D10

• Processing of entries will end when a cell in column D is empty

• The Source/Formula should not contain “=”; for example,Now(),'Project Summary'!C8

• If you intend to define and use other functions, see the sections below.

Aspen Process EconomicAnalyzerWB_TRA.xls>>User defined

functions:

All user-defined functions should begin with UDF_ ,




for example, UDF_UtilCost_Steam100PSI().

Functions that begin with Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerF_ refer toAspen Process Economic Analyzer system functions.

Using the Visual Basic Editor, you can view, edit, and add user definedfunctions in the Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls

workbook. The screen capture below shows a snippet from this file. Using thesamples provided, you could add more functions in the sections markedInsert your functions here. If you need technical assistance in this regard,contact the AspenTech Support Team.

Generating the Custom Report

To generate a report developed in Reporting Assistant:

1 Run a project evaluation.

2 On the Run menu, click Add Entry for Reporting Assistant.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer generates the report based upon thetemplate created in the Reporting Assistant. The data that was entered underList of Entries on the Reporting Assistant Options dialog box appears ascolumns in the spreadsheet.

Every time Add Entry for Reporting Assistant is selected, the latest data isentered on the bottom row of the report. This way, you can compare results.




Item EvaluationAspen Process Economic Analyzer allows you to run an evaluation on a singlecomponent and view an Item Report. The type of Item Report displayed canbe selected in Preferences (see page XX519H48XX).

To run an item evaluation and display the Item Report:

1 Right-click on the component in either Project Explorer or the List view,and then click Evaluate Item on the pop-up menu.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer runs the item evaluation.

Note: If the evaluation has already been run, you only have to click ItemReport.

2 Right-click on the component and click Item Report on the pop-up menu.

You can also click the Evaluate button on the Component Specifications

form to run the item evaluation and display the Item Report.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Item Report.




3 You can include multiple components in the Item Report: on the List view(area level), select the desired components, right-click on one of thecomponents, and click Item Report on the pop-up window. The resultingItem Report lists individually the summary data (cost or sizing) for eachselected component.

Automatic Item Evaluation

You can have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer automatically run an itemevaluation whenever you click OK or Apply on a Component Specificationsform.

To turn automatic item evaluation on and off:1 On the Tools menu, point to Options.

2 On the Options sub-menu, a check appears next to Automatic ItemEvaluation when the feature is turned on. Clicking Automatic ItemEvaluation turns the feature on and off.



Appendix A: Equipment and Slots of those Equipment Affected by Mapping 465

Appendix A: Equipment andSlots of those EquipmentAffected by Mapping

The following table lists the Equipment and Slots of those Equipment whichwill be affected by mapping:

Important: When you do Map Based On Last Session, the slots listed onthis table WILL CHANGE.

Object Name Attributes wiped out during re-size

DAT MIXER CpTangentTangentHeight

CpVesselDiameter

CpDesignTemperature

CpDesignGaugePressure CpLiquidVolume

DESIGN PRESS. -GAUGEDESIGN TEMPERATURE

CAPACITY

DIAMETER

VESSEL T-T HEIGHT

DAT OPEN TOP CpTangentTangentHeight

CpVesselDiameter

CpDesignTemperature

CpLiquidVolume

DESIGN TEMPERATURE

CAPACITY

DIAMETERVESSEL T-T HEIGHT

DAT REACTOR CpTangentTangentHeight

CpVesselDiameter

CpDesignTemperature

CpDesignGaugePressure

CpLiquidVolume

DCP ANSI CpPumpEfficiencyPercent




CpFluidSpecificGravity

CpFluidHead

CpDriverPower

CpDesignTemperature


CpLiquidFlowrateCapacity

Head

Liquid specif. grav.

Driver power

Design temperature

Design press. -gauge

Pump fractional efficiency

Pump % efficiency

No. of identical items

DCP ANSI PLAST No. of identical items

Pump % efficiencyPump fractional efficiency


Design temperature

Driver power


Head

Capacity

CpLiquidFlowrate


CpDesignTemperature

CpDriverPowerCpFluidHead


CpPumpEfficiencyPercent

DCP API 610 CpPumpEfficiencyPercent


CpFluidHead

CpDriverPower

CpDesignTemperature


CpLiquidFlowrate

CapacityHead


Driver power

Design temperature



Pump % efficiency





DCP API 610 IL CpPumpEfficiencyPercent


CpFluidHead

CpDriverPower

CpDesignTemperatureCpDesignGaugePressure

CpLiquidFlowrate

Capacity

Head


Driver power

Design temperature



Pump % efficiency

No. of identical itemsDCP CENTRIF CpPumpEfficiencyPercent


CpFluidHead

CpDriverPower

CpDesignTemperature


CpLiquidFlowrate

Capacity

Head


Driver powerDesign temperature



Pump % efficiency


DCP GEN SERV No. of identical items

Pump % efficiency



Design temperature

Driver power


Head

Capacity

CpLiquidFlowrate


CpDesignTemperature

CpDriverPower




CpFluidHead


CpPumpEfficiencyPercent

DCP GEN-SERV CpPumpEfficiencyPercent


CpFluidHeadCpDriverPower

CpDesignTemperature


CpLiquidFlowrate

Capacity

Head


Driver power

Design temperature


Pump fractional efficiencyPump % efficiency


DCP IN LINE CpPumpEfficiencyPercent


CpFluidHead

CpDriverPower

CpDesignTemperature


CpLiquidFlowrate

Capacity

HeadLiquid specif. grav.

Driver power

Design temperature



Pump % efficiency


DDDTPACKED CpTrayType

CpTangentTangentHeightTopSection

CpDiameterTopSection

CpDesignTemperatureTopSection

CpDesignPressureTopSection

CpTangentTangentHeightBottomSection

CpDiameterBottomSection

CpDesignTemperatureBottomSection

CpDesignPressureBottomSection

TRAY TYPE

BOTTOM DESIGN PRESS.




BOTTOM DESIGN TEMP.

TOP DESIGN PRESSURE

TOP DESIGN TEMP.

TOP T-T HEIGHT

TOP SECT'N DIAMETER

BOTTOM T-T HEIGHTBOTTOM SECTION DIAM.

DDDTTRAYED CpTrayType

CpTangentTangentHeightTopSection

CpDiameterTopSection

CpDesignTemperatureTopSection

CpDesignPressureTopSection

CpTangentTangentHeightBottomSection

CpDiameterBottomSection

CpDesignTemperatureBottomSection

CpDesignPressureBottomSection

TRAY TYPEBOTTOM DESIGN PRESS.

BOTTOM DESIGN TEMP.

TOP DESIGN PRESSURE

TOP DESIGN TEMP.

TOP T-T HEIGHT

TOP SECT'N DIAMETER

BOTTOM T-T HEIGHT

BOTTOM SECTION DIAM.

DF ROTY DISK CpSurfaceArea

SURFACE AREA

No. of identical itemsDF ROTY DRUM CpSurfaceArea

SURFACE AREA


DGC CENTRIF CpDesignTemperatureInlet

CpDesignGaugePressureInlet

CpDesignGaugePressureOutlet

CpActualGasFlowrateInlet

ACTUAL CAPACITY

INLET PRESSURE-GAUGE

EXIT PRESSURE -GAUGE

INLET TEMPERATURE


DGC CENTRIF IG No. of identical items

INLET TEMPERATURE



ACTUAL CAPACITY

EXIT TEMPERATURE






CpDesignTemperatureOutlet


CpDesignTemperatureInlet

DGC RECIP MOTR No. of identical itemsINLET TEMPERATURE



ACTUAL CAPACITY





DHE AIR COOLER DUTY

[2]CpTubeWallThicknessSecondService

[3] CpTubeWallThicknessThirdServiceCpTubeWallThicknessFirstService

CpTubeLength

CpNumberBays

CpNumberTubeRows

[3] CpDesignTemperatureInletThirdService

[2] CpDesignTemperatureInletSecondServ

CpDesignTemperatureInletFirstService

CpHeight

[3] CpDesignGaugePressureThirdService

[2] CpDesignGaugePressureSecondService

CpDesignGaugePressureFirstServiceCpBayWidth

[2] CpBareTubeAreaSecondService

[3] CpBareTubeAreaThirdService

CpBareTubeAreaFirstService

No. of tube rows

Height

Number of bays

Bay width

Tube length

Tube thickness/BWG

Inlet temperatureDesign press. -gauge

Bare tuo. of identical items

DHE FIXED T S No. of identical items

Surface area

Number of shells

Tube pressure -gauge

Tube temperature




Shell pressure-gauge

Shell temperature

No. of tubes/shell

Extended tube length

Tube thickness

Tube pitchNo. of tube passes

Tube outside diam.

Shell diameter

CpTubeLengthExtended

CpNumberTubePasses

CpNumberTubesPerShell

CpNumberShells

CpShellDiameter

CpDesignGaugePressureShell

CpDesignTemperatureShell

CpHeatTransferAreaCpTubeOutsideDiameter

CpTubePitch

CpTubeDesignGaugePressure

CpDesignTemperatureTube

CpTubeWallThickness

Required surface area (with overdesign)

RAW SURFACE AREA

DUTY

DHE FLOAT HEAD No. of identical items

Surface area

Number of shellsTube pressure -gauge

Tube temperature


Shell temperature

No. of tubes/shell


Tube thickness

Tube pitch

No. of tube passes

Tube outside diam.

Shell diameterCpTubeLengthExtended

CpNumberTubePasses


CpNumberShells

CpShellDiameter






CpHeatTransferArea

CpTubeOutsideDiameter

CpTubePitch



CpTubeWallThicknessRequired surface area (with overdesign)

RAW SURFACE AREA

DUTY

DHE PRE ENGR No. of identical items

Surface area


Tube temperature


Shell temperature

Tube thickness

No. of tube passesCpNumberTubePasses



CpHeatTransferArea



CpTubeWallThickness


RAW SURFACE AREA

DUTY

DHE TEMA EXCH DUTYRAW SURFACE AREA


CpTubeWallThickness



CpTubePitch


CpHeatTransferArea



CpShellDiameterCpNumberShells


CpNumberTubePasses


Shell diameter

Tube outside diam.

No. of tube passes




Tube pitch

Tube thickness


No. of tubes/shell

Shell temperature

Shell pressure-gaugeTube temperature


Number of shells

Surface area


DHE U TUBE No. of identical items

Surface area

Number of shells


Tube temperature

Shell pressure-gaugeShell temperature

No. of tubes/shell


Tube thickness

Tube pitch

No. of tube passes

Tube outside diam.

Shell diameter


CpNumberTubePasses

CpNumberTubesPerShellCpNumberShells

CpShellDiameter



CpHeatTransferArea


CpTubePitch



CpTubeWallThickness

Required surface area (with overdesign)RAW SURFACE AREA

DUTY

DHT HORIZ DRUM VESSEL T-T LENGTH

DIAMETER

CAPACITY

DESIGN TEMPERATURE

DESIGN PRESS. -GAUGE




CpLiquidVolume


CpDesignTemperature

CpVesselDiameter

CpTangentTangentLength

DHT JACKETED CpTangentTangentLengthCpVesselDiameter

CpDesignTemperature


CpLiquidVolume


DESIGN TEMPERATURE

CAPACITY

DIAMETER

VESSEL T-T LENGTH

DHT MULTI WALL CpTangentTangentLength

CpVesselDiameterCpDesignTemperature


CpLiquidVolume


DESIGN TEMPERATURE

CAPACITY

DIAMETER

VESSEL T-T LENGTH

DRB KETTLE RAW SURFACE AREA


CpDesignTemperatureTubeCpTubeDesignGaugePressure

CpHeatTransferArea



CpDuty

SHELL PRESSURE-GAUGE

TUBE PRESSURE -GAUGE

SHELL TEMPERATURE

TUBE TEMPERATURE

DUTY

NO. OF IDENTICAL ITEMS

surface area

DRB THERMOSIPH RAW SURFACE AREA




CpHeatTransferArea






CpDuty



SHELL TEMPERATURE

TUBE TEMPERATUREDUTY


surface area

DRB U TUBE surface area


DUTY

TUBE TEMPERATURE

SHELL TEMPERATURE



CpDutyCpDesignGaugePressureShell


CpHeatTransferArea




RAW SURFACE AREA

DTW DC HE TW CpDesignGaugePressure

CpDesignTemperature

CpVesselDiameter

CpTangentTangentHeightDESIGN PRESS. -GAUGE

DESIGN TEMPERATURE

Diameter

Vessel t-t height

DTW PACKED CpTangentTangentHeight

CpTrayType

CpTotalPackingHeight

CpVesselDiameter

CpDesignTemperature



DESIGN TEMPERATURE

TRAY TYPE

Diameter

Vessel t-t height

Total packing height

DTW TRAYED CpTangentTangentHeight

CpTrayType




CpTraySpacing

CpNumberTrays

CpVesselDiameter

CpDesignTemperature


DESIGN PRESS. -GAUGEDESIGN TEMPERATURE

NUMBER OF TRAYS

TRAY TYPE

Diameter

Vessel t-t height

tray spacing

DVT CONE BTM CpVesselHeight

CpVesselDiameter

CpDesignTemperature


CpLiquidVolumeDESIGN PRESS. -GAUGE

DESIGN TEMPERATURE

CAPACITY

DIAMETER

HEIGHT

DVT CYLINDER CpVesselDiameter

CpTangentTangentHeight

CpDesignTemperature


CpLiquidVolume

DVT GAS HOLDER CpVesselDiameterCpDesignTemperature


CpGasVolume


DESIGN TEMPERATURE

CAPACITY

DIAMETER

DVT JACKETED CpTangentTangentHeight

CpVesselDiameter

CpDesignTemperature


CpLiquidVolume


DESIGN TEMPERATURE

CAPACITY

DIAMETER

VESSEL T-T HEIGHT

DVT LIVE BTM CpVesselHeight




CpVesselDiameter

CpDesignTemperature

CpSolidVolume

DESIGN TEMPERATURE

CAPACITY

DIAMETERHEIGHT

DVT MULTI WALL CpTangentTangentHeight

CpVesselDiameter

CpDesignTemperature


CpLiquidVolume


DESIGN TEMPERATURE

CAPACITY

DIAMETER

VESSEL T-T HEIGHTDVT SPHERE CpVesselDiameter

CpDesignTemperature


CpLiquidVolume


DESIGN TEMPERATURE

CAPACITY

DIAMETER

DVT SPHEROID CpVesselDiameter

CpDesignTemperature

CpDesignGaugePressureCpLiquidVolume


DESIGN TEMPERATURE

CAPACITY

DIAMETER

DVT STORAGE CpVesselHeight

CpVesselDiameter

CpDesignTemperature


CpLiquidVolumeGallonsBarrels


DESIGN TEMPERATURE

CAPACITY

DIAMETER

HEIGHT

EAC CENTRIF M No. of identical items

INLET TEMPERATURE






ACTUAL CAPACITY

CpActualGasFlowrate



CpDesignTemperatureInletEAC CENTRIF T No. of identical items

INLET TEMPERATURE



ACTUAL CAPACITY

CpActualGasFlowrate




EAC RECIP GAS No. of identical items

INLET TEMPERATUREEXIT PRESSURE -GAUGE


ACTUAL CAPACITY

DRIVER POWER

CpActualGasFlowrate

CpDriverPower




EAC RECIP MOTR No. of identical items

INLET TEMPERATUREEXIT PRESSURE -GAUGE


ACTUAL CAPACITY





EAC SINGLE 1 S No. of identical items

INLET TEMPERATURE



ACTUAL CAPACITY

CpActualGasFlowrate




EAC SINGLE 2 S No. of identical items

INLET TEMPERATURE






ACTUAL CAPACITY

CpActualGasFlowrate


CpDesignGaugePressureInletCpDesignTemperatureInlet

EAD AIR DRYER CpGasFlowrate

CAPACITY

EAT COND CELL VOLUME

CpCellVolume

EAT FLOAT CELL VOLUME PER CELL

NUMBER OF CELLS

CpNumberCells

CpVolumePerCell

ECP AXIAL FLOW CpTemperature

CpFluidSpecificGravityCpFluidHead

CpDriverPower

Head


Driver power

Temperature


ECP TURBINE CpTemperature


CpFluidHead

CpDriverPower

Head


Driver power

Temperature


ECR BRADFORD CpCrusherFlowrate

CpDriverPower

DRIVER POWER

PRODUCT SIZE

MANTLE DIAMETER

RATE

ECR CONE CpCrusherFlowrate

CpProductSize

CpMantleDiameter

CpDriverPower

DRIVER POWER

PRODUCT SIZE

MANTLE DIAMETER




RATE

ECR ECCENTRIC CpCrusherFlowrate

CpProductSize

CpMantleDiameter

CpDriverPower

DRIVER POWERPRODUCT SIZE

MANTLE DIAMETER

RATE

ECR GYRATOR CpCrusherFlowrate

CpProductSize

CpMantleDiameter

CpDriverPower

DRIVER POWER

PRODUCT SIZE

MANTLE DIAMETER

RATEECR HAMMER MED RATE

MANTLE DIAMETER

PRODUCT SIZE

DRIVER POWER

CpDriverPower

CpMantleDiameter

CpProductSize

CpCrusherFlowrate

ECR JAW CpCrusherFlowrate

CpProductSize

CpMantleDiameter

CpDriverPower

DRIVER POWER

PRODUCT SIZE

MANTLE DIAMETER

RATE

ECR PULVERIZER CpFlowrate

CpProductMeshSize

CpProductFeedSize

CpMantleDiameter

CpDriverPower

DRIVER POWER

PRODUCT SIZE

MANTLE DIAMETER

RATE

ECR REV HAMR RATE

MANTLE DIAMETER

PRODUCT SIZE

DRIVER POWER




CpMantleDiameter

CpDriverPower

CpProductSize

CpCrusherFlowrate

ECR ROLL RING CpCrusherFlowrate

CpProductSizeCpMantleDiameter

CpDriverPower

DRIVER POWER

PRODUCT SIZE

MANTLE DIAMETER

RATE

ECR ROTARY CpProductSize

CpMantleDiameter

CpDriverPower

CpCrusherFlowrate

DRIVER POWERPRODUCT SIZE

MANTLE DIAMETER

RATE

ECR S IMPACT RATE

MANTLE DIAMETER

PRODUCT SIZE

DRIVER POWER

CpDriverPower

CpMantleDiameter

CpProductSize

CpCrusherFlowrate

ECR S ROLL HVY RATE

MANTLE DIAMETER

PRODUCT SIZE

DRIVER POWER

CpCrusherFlowrate

CpDriverPower

CpMantleDiameter

CpProductSize

ECR S ROLL LT RATE

MANTLE DIAMETER

PRODUCT SIZE

DRIVER POWER

CpDriverPower

CpMantleDiameter

CpProductSize

CpCrusherFlowrate

ECR S ROLL MED RATE

MANTLE DIAMETER




PRODUCT SIZE

DRIVER POWER

CpDriverPower

CpMantleDiameter

CpProductSize

CpCrusherFlowrateECR SAWTOOTH CpCrusherFlowrate

CpProductSize

CpMantleDiameter

CpDriverPower

DRIVER POWER

PRODUCT SIZE

MANTLE DIAMETER

RATE

ECR SWING HAMR RATE

MANTLE DIAMETER

PRODUCT SIZEDRIVER POWER

CpDriverPower

CpMantleDiameter

CpProductSize

CpCrusherFlowrate

ECRYBATCH VAC CpLiquidVolume

CAPACITY


ECRYMECHANICAL CpLength

LENGTH


ECRYOSLO CpCrystallizerRate

RATE


ECT ATM SUSPEN CpDriverPower

DRIVER POWER


ECT BATCH AUTO No. of identical items

DIAMETER

CAPACITY

CpCentrifugeCapacity

[2] CpBatchFlowrate

CpCentrifugeDiameter

ECT BATCH BOTM No. of identical items

DIAMETER


ECT BATCH TOP No. of identical items

DIAMETER





ECT BOT UNLOAD No. of identical items

DIAMETER


ECT DISK CpCentrifugeDiameter

DIAMETER

No. of identical itemsECT INVERTING CpCentrifugeDiameter

DIAMETER


ECT RECIP CONV No. of identical items

DIAMETER


ECT SCREEN BWL No. of identical items

DIAMETER

INSIDE DIAMETER

INSIDE LENGTH

CpBowlDiameterCpBowlLength

ECT SCROLL CON No. of identical items

DIAMETER


ECT SOLID BOWL CpBowlLength

CpBowlDiameter

DIAMETER

INSIDE DIAMETER


ECT TOP UNLOAD CpCentrifugeDiameter

CpCentrifugeCapacity

CAPACITY

DIAMETER


ECT TUBULAR CpBowlDiameter

DIAMETER


ECT VIBRATORY CpProductFeedSize

CpScreenDiameter

DIAMETER

SCREEN DIAMETER


ED ATMOS TRAY No. of identical items

TRAY AREA

CpTrayArea

ED PAN CpSurfaceArea

AREA





ED SPRAY CpEvaporationRate

EVAPORATION RATE


ED VAC TRAY No. of identical items

TRAY AREA

CpTrayAreaEDC CENTRF PRE No. of identical items

FLOW RATE

CpGasFlowrate

EDC CLOTH BAY CpSurfaceArea

SURFACE AREA


EDC CYCLONE CpCycloneDiameter

DIAMETER


EDC ELC H VOLT No. of identical items

FLOW RATE

CpGasFlowrate

EDC ELC L VOLT No. of identical items

FLOW RATE

CpGasFlowrate

EDC MULT CYCLO No. of identical items

FLOW RATE

CpGasFlowrate

EDC PULSE SHKR CpGasFlowrate

FLOW RATE


EDC WASHERS SURFACE AREA


EDD DOUBLE ATM CpTrayArea

SURFACE AREA


EDD SINGLE ATM CpTrayArea

SURFACE AREA


EDD SINGLE VAC CpTrayArea

SURFACE AREA


EE FALL FILM No. of identical items

Heating area

CpHeatTransferArea

EE FORCED CIR CpHeatTransferArea

Heating area


EE LONG TUBE CpTubeMaterial




Mat'l of construction

CpHeatTransferArea

Tube material

Heating area


EE LONG VERT No. of identical itemsArea

CpSurfaceArea

EE STAND HOR No. of identical items

Area

CpSurfaceArea

EE STAND VERT No. of identical items

Area

CpSurfaceArea

EF CARTRIDGE CpLiquidFlowrate

FLOW RATE


EF LEAF DRY No. of identical items

SURFACE AREA

CpSurfaceArea

EF LEAF WET No. of identical items

SURFACE AREA

CpSurfaceArea

EF PLATE FRAM No. of identical items

FRAME CAPACITY

CpFrameCapacity

EF SCROLL CpProductFeedSizeSelection

FEED SIZE


EF SEWAGE CpSurfaceArea

SURFACE AREA


EF SPARKLER CpSurfaceArea

SURFACE AREA


EF TUBULAR CpLiquidFlowrate

FLOW RATE


EF WHITEWATER CpLiquidFlowrate

FLOW RATE


EFU BOX CpStandardGasFlowrate

CpProcessType

CpDuty

CpDesignTemperature






Duty

Standard gas flow

Process type

Design temperatureDesign press. -gauge

EFU HEATER CpStandardGasFlowrate

CpProcessType

CpDuty

CpDesignTemperature



Duty

Standard gas flow

Process type


EFU PYROLYSIS CpDesignGaugePressure

CpDesignTemperature

CpDuty

CpProcessType

CpStandardGasFlowrate


Duty

Standard gas flow

Process type


EFU REFORMER CpStandardGasFlowrate

CpProcessType

CpDuty

CpDesignTemperature



Duty

Standard gas flow

Process type

Design temperature


EFU VERTICAL CpDesignGaugePressure

CpDesignTemperature

CpDuty

CpProcessType

CpStandardGasFlowrate





Duty

Standard gas flow

Process type

Design temperature


EGC RECIP GAS No. of identical itemsINLET TEMPERATURE



ACTUAL CAPACITY

DRIVER POWER

CpActualGasFlowrate

CpDriverPower




EGP CANNED RTR CpLiquidFlowrateCpDriverPower

Flow rate

Driver power


EGP GEAR CpLiquidFlowrate

CpDriverPower

Flow rate

Driver power


EGP MECH SEAL No. of identical items

Driver power

Flow rate

CpLiquidFlowrate

CpDriverPower

EHE CROSS BORE RAW SURFACE AREA


CpHeatTransferArea

Heat transfer area


EHE FIN TUBE RAW SURFACE AREA


CpTubeLength

CpNumberFins


CpHeatTransferArea


Number of fins


No. of tubes/shell




Tube length

Heat transfer area


EHE HEATER ELC No. of identical items

Power output

CpHeaterPowerEHE HEATER STM No. of identical items

Heat transfer area

CpHeatTransferArea


RAW SURFACE AREA

EHE HEATER-ELC CpHeaterPower

Power output


EHE HEATER-STM RAW SURFACE AREA


CpHeatTransferAreaHeat transfer area


EHE JACKETED RAW SURFACE AREA


CpTubeLength


CpHeatTransferArea

CpDesignTemperature


Design temperature


No. of tubes/shell

Tube length

Heat transfer area


EHE ONE SCREW RAW SURFACE AREA


CpHeatTransferArea

Heat transfer area


EHE PLAT FRAM DESIGN TEMPERATURE


Surface area



CpDesignTemperature

CpSurfaceArea

CpHeatTransferArea





RAW SURFACE AREA

EHE PLAT+FRAM RAW SURFACE AREA


CpHeatTransferArea

CpSurfaceArea

CpDesignTemperatureCpDesignGaugePressure


Surface area


DESIGN TEMPERATURE

EHE SHELL TUBE No. of identical items

Heat transfer area

Tube length

CpHeatTransferArea

CpTubeLength

Required surface area (with overdesign)RAW SURFACE AREA

EHE SHELL+TUBE RAW SURFACE AREA


CpTubeLength

CpHeatTransferArea

Tube length

Heat transfer area


EHE SPIRAL PLT RAW SURFACE AREA



CpHeatTransferArea


Heat transfer area


EHE SUC HEATER No. of identical items

Heat transfer area

CpHeatTransferArea


RAW SURFACE AREA

EHE SUC-HEATER RAW SURFACE AREA


CpHeatTransferArea

Heat transfer area


EHE TWO SCREW RAW SURFACE AREA


CpHeatTransferArea

Heat transfer area





EHE WASTE HEAT RAW SURFACE AREA


CpFlowrate

CpHeatTransferArea

No. of identical itemsRate

Heat transfer rate

EM ATTRITION CpCrusherFlowrate

CpProductSize

CpMantleDiameter

CpDriverPower

DRIVER POWER

PRODUCT SIZE

MANTLE DIAMETER

RATE

EM AUTOGENOUS CpSolidFlowrateCpProductSize

CpDiameterInside

CpDriverPower

DRIVER POWER

PRODUCT SIZE

MANTLE DIAMETER

RATE

EM BALL MILL CpSolidFlowrate

CpMantleDiameter

CpProductSize

CpDiameterInside

CpDriverPower

DRIVER POWER

PRODUCT SIZE

MANTLE DIAMETER

RATE

EM MIKRO PULV RATE

MANTLE DIAMETER

PRODUCT SIZE

DRIVER POWER

CpDriverPower

CpMantleDiameter

CpProductSize

CpCrusherFlowrate

EM MIKRO-PULV CpCrusherFlowrate

CpProductSize

CpMantleDiameter

CpDriverPower

DRIVER POWER




PRODUCT SIZE

MANTLE DIAMETER

RATE

EM ROD CHARGER RATE

MANTLE DIAMETER

PRODUCT SIZEDRIVER POWER

CpDriverPower

CpMantleDiameter

CpRodDiameter

CpProductSize

CpSolidFlowrate

EM ROD MILL CpSolidFlowrate

CpProductSize

CpDiameterInside

CpMantleDiameter

CpDriverPowerDRIVER POWER

PRODUCT SIZE

MANTLE DIAMETER

RATE

EM ROD-CHARGER CpSolidFlowrate

CpProductSize

CpRodDiameter

CpMantleDiameter

CpDriverPower

DRIVER POWER

PRODUCT SIZEMANTLE DIAMETER RATE

EM ROLLER

EP DIAPHRAGM CpTemperature


CpFluidHead

CpLiquidFlowrate

CpDriverPower


Head

Temperature

Flow rate

Driver power


EP DUPLEX CpTemperature


CpFluidHead

CpLiquidFlowrate




CpDriverPower


Head

Temperature

Flow rate

Driver powerNo. of identical items

EP RECIP MOTR No. of identical items

Driver power

Flow rate

Temperature

Head


CpDriverPower

CpLiquidFlowrate

CpFluidHead

CpFluidSpecificGravityCpTemperature

EP ROTARY CpTemperature


CpFluidHead

CpLiquidFlowrate

CpDriverPower


Head

Temperature

Flow rate

Driver powerNo. of identical items

EP SIMPLEX CpTemperature


CpFluidHead

CpLiquidFlowrate

CpDriverPower


Head

Temperature

Flow rate

Driver power


EP SLURRY CpTemperature


CpFluidHead

CpLiquidFlowrate

CpDriverPower





Head

Temperature

Flow rate

Driver power


EP TRIPLEX CpTemperatureCpFluidSpecificGravity

CpFluidHead

CpLiquidFlowrate

CpDriverPower


Head

Temperature

Flow rate

Driver power


ERD DIRECT CpSurfaceAreaSURFACE AREA


ERD INDIRECT CpSurfaceArea

SURFACE AREA


ERD JAC VACUUM No. of identical items

CAPACITY

CpDryerCapacity

ERD JAC-VACUUM CpDryerCapacity

CAPACITY


ERD VACUUM CpDryerCapacity

CAPACITY


ETDSATM SYSTEM No. of identical items

TRAY SURFACE

CpTraySurfaceArea

ETDSATM-SYSTEM CpTraySurfaceArea

TRAY SURFACE


ETDSTURBO CpTraySurfaceArea

TRAY SURFACE


ETDSVAC SYSTEM No. of identical items

TRAY SURFACE

CpTraySurfaceArea

ETDSVAC-SYSTEM CpTraySurfaceArea

TRAY SURFACE





ETDSVACUUM CpTraySurfaceArea

TRAY SURFACE


ETURCONDENSING CpPowerOutput

Power output

No. of identical itemsETURGAS CpPowerOutput

Power output


ETURNON COND No. of identical items

Power output

CpPowerOutput

ETURNON-COND CpPowerOutput

Power output


EVP MECH BOOST No. of identical items

Actual capacity

CpActualGasFlowrate

EVP MECH-BOOST CpActualGasFlowrate

Actual capacity


EVP MECH-BOOST CpActualGasFlowrate

Actual capacity


EVP MECHANICAL CpDriverPower

CpActualGasFlowrate

Driver power

Actual capacity


EVP WATER SEAL No. of identical items

Actual capacity

CpActualGasFlowrate

EVP WATER-SEAL CpActualGasFlowrate

Actual capacity


EVS HUMMER CpNumberDecks

CpSurfaceArea

NUMBER OF DECKS

AREA


EVS ONE DECK CpWidth

CpLength

WIDTH

LENGTH





EVS SIFTER 1 No. of identical items

DIAMETER

CpScreenDiameter

EVS SIFTER 2 No. of identical items

DIAMETER

CpScreenDiameterEVS SIFTER 3 No. of identical items

DIAMETER

CpScreenDiameter

EVS SIFTER-1 CpScreenDiameter

DIAMETER



DIAMETER



DIAMETER


EVS THREE DECK CpWidth

CpLength

WIDTH

LENGTH


EVS TWO DECK CpLength

CpWidth

WIDTH

LENGTH


EVT PLAST TANK CpLiquidVolume

CpTemperature

CpVesselHeight


CpVesselDiameter

GAUGE PRESSURE

TEMPERATURE

HEIGHT

VOLUME

DIAMETER

EVT WOOD TANK CpLiquidVolume

CpTemperature

CpVesselHeight


CpVesselDiameter

GAUGE PRESSURE

TEMPERATURE

HEIGHT




VOLUME

DIAMETER

EWFETHIN FILM Heat transfer area


CpHeatTransferArea

EWFEWFE SYSTEM Heat transfer areaNo. of identical items

CpHeatTransferArea

Size Interactive Slots - AirCooler Overall U

Fin Thickness

Duty

CpTubePitch

CpTubeOutsideDiameterFirstService

CpTubeLength

CpTubeFinHeight

CpPowerPerFan

CpNumberTubeRowsCpNumberBays

CpFinPitch

CpBayWidth

CpBareTubeAreaFirstService

Overall Heat transfer Coefficient

Size Interactive Slots -Compressor

CpSpecificHeatRatio

CpDriverPower

CpCompressibilityFactorOutlet

CpCompressibilityFactorInlet


Size Interactive Slots - TurboExpander

CpSpecificHeatRatio

CpPowerOutput

CpCompressibilityFactorInlet


Size Interactive Slots -HeatExchanger

Heat Exchanger Area Minimum Overdesign Factor

Overdesign Factor

Final Surface Area

LMTD

Overall Heat transfer Coefficient

Raw Surface Area

Shell Side Fouling Resistance

Shell Side Heat Transfer Coefficient

Side For Hot Stream

Surface Area with Overdesign

Temperature Correction Factor

Tube Side Fouling Resistance

Tube Side Heat Transfer Coefficient

UA

Overall U




Size Interactive Slots -HeatExchanger_PlateFin

CpExchangerDepth

CpExchangerLength

CpExchangerVolume

CpExchangerWidth

CpRemarks2 :

CpMaterialCostPerUnitCpLaborHoursPerUnit

Size Interactive Slots - Pump CpLiquidFlowrate

CpFluidViscosity


CpFluidHead

Size Interactive Slots -Pump_Gear

CpViscosityCS

CpLiquidFlowrate


CpFluidHead

Size Interactive Slots -

Pump_Vacuum

CpActualGasFlowrate

CpLiquidFlowrateCpFluidViscosity


CpFluidHead

Size Interactive Slots -Vessel_Horizontal

Size Interactive Slots -Vessel_Spherical

Size Interactive Slots -Vessel_Spheroid

Size Interactive Slots -Vessel_Vertical

WFE WFE SYSTEM

:

Heat transfer area


CpHeatTransferArea



Index 499

Index

.

.D01 file extension, Icarus Objectfiles 128

.EML file extension, importing costlibraries 292

.UCL file extension, importing costlibraries 292

2

2/3 rule 89, 238

A

About command Help menu 42

Absolute Basisstreams 114, 117, 122–124, 178

Accelerated Cost Recovery System(ACRS)

Investment Parameters,Depreciation Method 104

Accounting Rate of Return (ARR)Cashflow spreadsheet 453

ACRS See Accelerated CostRecovery System (ACRS)

Activate Custom Model optionPreferences 49

Add Area command 182

Add buttonPipe Details form 193Wage Rate Info form 73

Add Entry for Reporting AssistantRun menu 39, 462

Add Project Component command183

Add Stream buttontoolbar 37, 178

Add Stream commandView menu, PFD 174View menu, PFD 178

Add Trend Data to Databasecommand

Trend menu, Aspen IcarusReporter 426

Adding areas 182 project components 182streams 216–219

Additional Project Component filesimporting from 5.0/5.1 22

Adjusted Total Capital CostProject Summary spreadsheet

447AdminDir

location, Preferences 50AEM See Analyzer Economics

Module (AEM)Air coolers

design criteria specifications 89Air supply

instrumentation loop 196All Crafts Percent of Base

General Wage Rates 71Allow Docking command 35Analyzer 2.0B

importing from 22–24Analyzer Economics Module (AEM)

388–405error when re-launching 400loading 388RESULTS workbook 393–398revising premises 398–399saving workbooks 400SPECS workbook 389–393

Analyzer Scale-Up Module (ASM)295–298



Index 500

Analyzer Utility Model (AUM) notes 120

Anchor boltscivil installation bulk 194

Apply 2/3 Rule for Design PressureDesign Criteria 89

Apply buttonDevelop Stream specifications

form 116, 217Installation Bulks form 188Interactive Sizing form 224Mat'l Man-hour Adjustments

form 190Preferences dialog box 47

Areaadding 182 deleting 205icons 27importing 200

List view display of items 30mapping 152pop-up menu 183re-numbering 205simulator 144, 153, 158, 171type 182

Area Information dialog box 182Area title 199, 200Areas

dimensions 199, 200electrical specifications 199, 200equipment specifications 199,

200index manhours 199, 200index material costs 199, 200insulation specifications 199, 200paint specifications 199, 200piping specifications 199, 200steel specifications 199, 200title 199, 200type definition 199, 200

ARR(Accounting Rate of Return)Cashflow spreadsheet 453

ASMEpressure vessel design code

selection 65Aspen Icarus Reporter

accessing 406creating a user database 430Data trending 426Excel reports 418–425HTML reports 416–418importing data 429Management reports 418–421

menu bar 408report mode 408standard reports 408–416

Aspen Pluslink to IPE 135map specs 82

models used in sizing towers 243AspenTech

Aspen Plus simulator program 82Auto Filter 425Automatic Item Evaluation

checked command Tools menu 41, 464

Automatic task backup 49

B

Backup optionsPreferences 49

Base Design ValueAnalyzer Economics Module

(AEM) 398, 399Base Stream

Develop Stream specificationsform 117

Develop Streams dialog box 122–124, 178

BaseCase, default scenario name19

BasisMap dialog box 153streams 114, 117, 124, 122–

124, 178Basis for Capital Costs

construction workforce 70–73indexing 74input units of measure 59introduction 58libraries 125, 126output (reports) units of

measure customization 61selecting defaults 126

BFD See Block Flow Diagram (BFD)BinCacheDir

location, Preferences 50Block Flow Diagram (BFD)

displaying 146 Drag & Find feature 147introduction 146right-click commands 148View menu 150Zoom commands 148–149

Bottom sump height



Index 501

towers, design criteria 90BS5500

pressure vessel design codeselection 65

Buildings 181By-products

escalation 404Stream Input worksheet 405

C

Cached project information 44Cancel button


Preferences dialog box 47Capacity

changing 295Capacity over-design factor See

Pump overdesign factorCapital cost parameters

Project Input worksheet 403Capital Costs

Cashflow spreadsheet 451depreciation 103–104, 451errors 387escalation 104, 447, 450Executive Summary spreadsheet

455Investment Parameters 105Project Summary spreadsheet

444, 446–447reports 48, 435, 437toolbar button 37, 406, 431View command 40, 150, 173,

406, 431Capital investment

Project Input worksheet 402Capture worksheet

Analyzer Economics Module(AEM) 393

Cascade command Window menu 28, 42

Cash Flow Summary

reports, Icarus Editor 437Cash flows

Project Input worksheet 401Cashflow spreadsheet 449–454CASHFLOW.ICS

Cashflow spreadsheet 449–454ChemCAD

map specs 83

simulator report preparation136–137

Chemstationslink to IPE 11, Also See

ChemCADCivil

installation bulk 194material costs and man-hours

189Clear All Saved Trends command

Trend menu, Aspen IcarusReporter 426

ClipboardDirlocation, Preferences 50

Close command File menu 38

COA See Code of Account (COA)COADir

location, Preferences 50Code of Account (COA)

allocating UCL item costs to 284Cold Inlet Stream field 224Cold Outlet Stream field 224Color coding

Component Specifications form187

Component Map Information 156,158

Component Name 157Component Specifications form

accessing 186

color coding 186, 187Options button 187, 188P&ID button 191, 194

Component Status 157Components See Project

componentsComponents view

Palette 33ComponentsDir

location, Preferences 50Compressors

design criteria specifications 89sizing 214

Computer namescenario information 25

Configuration optionsmapping 154, 158

Constructionworkforce 70–73

Construction scheduleProject Schedule Data Sheet 438

Contingency



Index 502

General Specs 63, 64, 66Project Summary spreadsheet

447Contingency Percent field

General Specs 63, 64Contractor

fees 447reports 438

Control Center button bar 344Control centers

instrumentation loop 196Control Panel worksheet


Control signalinstrumentation loop 196

Control valveinstrumentation loop 196–197

Copy button

toolbar, Icarus Editor 433Copy command

library items 291project components 202, 204

Cost librariesdeleting 294duplicating 293Equipment Model Library (EML)

277–281importing 292introduction 276Unit Cost Library (UCL) 281–287

Costs See Capital costs; Directcosts; Equipment; Labor;Operating costs; Project cost;Project direct costs; Totaldirect cost; Total project cost;Utility costs

Design Basis worksheet 395distribution graph, Figures

worksheet 397EPC worksheet 393

Country Base 21Craft code 74Craft rates

construction workforce 73–74Create New Project dialog box 18,

22Create New Trend in Excel

command Trend menu, Aspen Icarus

Reporter 427 Create Stream dialog box 121,

123, 217, 218

Create tab viewDevelop Streams dialog box 121

Create User Database commandFile menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter

408, 430Create User Database dialog box

Aspen Icarus Reporter 430Creating

project scenarios 18–22streams 216–219

Creating a new project 18Currency

Analyzer Economics Module(AEM) 388, 393

Currency Conversion Ratecreating a project 21Executive Summary spreadsheet

455General Project Data 21, 58Project Summary spreadsheet

443Currency Name 21Currency Symbol 21Current Map List

Project Component MapSpecifications dialog box 81

Custom Modelinstructions 206–210Preferences 49

Custom Tasks command Tools menu 41

Cut commandproject components 203

Cyclone inlet linear velocitydesign criteria specifications 98

D

Data trendingAspen Icarus Reporter 426

DC_V worksheetAnalyzer Economics Module

(AEM) 390Decision Analyzer command

Run menu 388Decision Analyzer dialog box 388Decision Center worksheet


Delete buttonPipe Details form 193

Delete Mappings command 158Deleting



Index 503

areas 205components 204mappings 158projects and project scenarios 43

DensityDevelop Stream specifications

form 118Depreciation expense

Cashflow spreadsheet 451Depreciation method

Project Input worksheet 404Depreciation Method

Cashflow spreadsheet(CASHFLOW.ICS) 450, 451

Investment Parameters 103Project Summary spreadsheet

(PROJSUM.ICS) 445Design code

Executive Summary spreadsheet

456Project Summary spreadsheet

443Design Code

General Specs 65Design Criteria

libraries 125selecting defaults 126

Design Criteria specifications 86Design pressure

applying 2/3 rule for 90, 238design criteria specifications 87

sizing agitators 233sizing heat exchangers 239sizing towers 249utility specifications 101

Design temperaturedesign criteria specifications 88sizing agitators 233sizing heat exchangers 239sizing towers 249utility specifications 100

Desired Rate of ReturnCashflow spreadsheet

(CASHFLOW.ICS) 450

Executive Summary spreadsheet(EXECSUM.ICS) 455

Investment Parametersspecifications 103

Project Summary(PROJSUM.ICS) spreadsheet445

Detailed Process Economics reportsError! Not a valid bookmarkin entry on page 388

Develop Equipment Library Modelform 279

Develop Product Specifications

dialog box 112Develop Stream specifications form

116, 217, 219Develop Streams dialog box 121,

122, 217, 218Develop Utiltiy Specifications dialog

box 99Dimensions, areas 199, 200DIN

pressure vessel design codeselection 65

Direct costs Also see Total directcost

Directoriesproject, locations - Preferences

50–53Disconnect command

streams 180Disconnected Streams dialog box

180Discounted cash-flow rate of return

See Internal Rate of Return(IRR)

Display results after evaluationPreferences 48

Docking 35Documentation 15Double Declining (Balance)


Draw Disconnected Stream buttontoolbar 180

Draw Disconnected Stream buttontoolbar 37

Draw Disconnected Streamcommand

View menu, PFD 180Draw Disconnected Stream

commandView menu, PFD 174

Duct installation bulk 193

E

EarningsCashflow spreadsheet 452

Economic Life of Project



Index 504


(PROJSUM.ICS) 445, 450ECOSYS.xls 388, 399Edit Connectivity button

toolbar 37, 175, 176

Edit Connectivity commandView menu, PFD 174, 175

Electricalinstallation bulk 197material costs and man-hours

189specs, areas 199, 200

Electricityoperating unit costs

specifications 108E-mail

reports 418, 419, 424EML See Equipment Model Library

(EML)Engineering schedule

Project Schedule Data Sheet 438Engineer-Procure-Construct (EPC)

periodCashflow spreadsheet

(CASHFLOW.ICS) 450Executive Summary spreadsheet

(EXECSUM.ICS) 455Investment Parameters 104

Engineer-Procure-Construct periodProject Summary spreadsheet

(PROJSUM.ICS) 444, 445EPC SeeEngineer-Construct-Procure (EPC) period

EPC PhaseProject Input worksheet 403

EQUIP.ICSinvestment analysis

spreadsheets 441Equipment

adding 182cost 442specifications, areas 199, 200

Equipment Model Library (EML)

adding an item to 278adding EML item as a

component 280 creating 277definition 276EMLDir, location 50

Equipment Summaryinvestment analysis

spreadsheets 441

ERROR message 387Error Messages command

View menu 40Escalating library costs 291Escalation

Cashflow spreadsheet

(CASHFLOW.ICS) 450, 451cost libraries 291Investment Parameters 104Project Basis worksheet,


Project Input worksheet 404Project Summary spreadsheet

(PROJSUM.ICS) 445, 447Estimate Class 58Estimate Date 58Evaluate button

Component Specifications form187, 463

Evaluate Item command 463Evaluate Project button

toolbar 37, 386Evaluate Project command

Run menu 39, 386Evaluation

item 463Preferences 48project 386

Evaluation Engine 241, 430Excavation and backfill

civil installation bulk 194Excel

Analyzer Economics Module(AEM) 388–405

Excel Custom Model files 206–210Excel reports

Auto Filter 425descriptions 422opening 422

Exchange rate See Also CurrencyConversion Rate

Analyzer Economics Module(AEM) 393, 401

EXECSUM.ICS 454–456Executive Summary spreadsheet

454–456Exit command

IPE File menu 40–42 Expenses

Cashflow spreadsheet 452Export to Excel Trending Report

dialog box



Index 505

Aspen Icarus Reporter 427Export to Excel Workbook dialog

boxAspen Icarus Reporter 419, 423

Export to SPECS Command File menu 38

Export Trend Data into Excel dialogbox

Aspen Icarus Reporter 428External Simulation Import Tool

commandTools menu 41

External Simulation Import Toolcommand

Tools menu 139–141

F

Facility Type

Investment Parameters 105FATAL message 387Figures worksheet


File menu Aspen Icarus Reporter menu bar

408IPE menu bar 38

Fit into one pageZoom dialog box 149

Float in Main Window command 35Flow rate units

product specifications 113Fluid classes

utility streams 99Foaming tendency

trayed towers, design criteria 92Foreman wage rate

general wage rates 73Form work

civil installation bulk 194Fraction basis 119Freeze Content button

Properties Window 34

FreightGeneral Specs 64

Fueloperating unit costs

specifications 108Furnace fractional efficiency

heat exchanger design criteria 89FVI (Future Value of Inflows)

Cashflow spreadsheet 452

G

G and A ExpensesCashflow spreadsheet

(CASHFLOW.ICS) 450Investment Parameters 105Project Summary spreadsheet

(PROJSUM.ICS) 446Galvanizing (for steel)

paint installation bulk 198General and administrative costs


(PROJSUM.ICS) 446General investment parameters

Project Input worksheet 404General Project Data

creating a new project scenario21

project specifications 57General rates

construction workforce 70–73General Specs 62–65Gray borders

Component Specifications form187

Green bordersComponent Specifications form

187Grid Settings command

View menu, PFD 174, 175Grids

viewing in Block Flow Diagram(BFD) 151

viewing in Process Flow Diagram(PFD) 175

Grids Visible commandView menu, BFD 151

Groutcivil installation bulk 194

H

Heat exchangersdesign criteria specifications 90sizing 238–240utility specifications 98

Help menu 42 Helper wage rate

general wage rates 72HETP (height equivalent of a

theoretical plate)packed towers, design criteria 91



Index 506

Hot Inlet Stream field 221Hot Outlet Stream field 224HTML reports

descriptions 416Item Report 48opening 417, 418

Hyprotechlink to IPE 11, Also See HYSIM,

HYSYSHYSIM

map specs 84models used in sizing towers 243simulator report preparation

137–139HYSYS

map specs 85models used in sizing towers 243simulator report preparation

139–141

I

Icarus Editor printing report 433printing report section 432reviewing results 431–440toolbar 432Tools menu 41

Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE)241, 430

Icarus interface 26–36Icarus Object files 128Icarus Project Component

Selection dialog box 156, 280,285, 288

IEE See Icarus Evaluation Engine(IEE)

Import command File menu 38 Libraries view, Palette 127, 292

Import Connected Streams optionPreferences 49

Import Data commandFile menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter

408File menu, Aspen Icarus

Reporter 429 Import Installation Bulks option

Preferences 49Import Selection dialog box

Aspen Icarus Reporter 429Importing

areas 200

components 200project from previous version

22–24scenarios 201specification files 127

Inch-Pound (IP), units of measure

20, 126, 127Incomplete items 31Indexing

Project Basis specifications 74Indicating signal

instrumentation loop 196Indirect costs

general wage rates 71Project Summary spreadsheet

447reports 447Unit Cost Library (UCL) 276

Indirectsgeneral wage rages 71

INFOmational message 387Input Units of Measure

Specifications dialog box 20,59

Installation bulksaccessing 188civil 194duct 193electrical 197instrumentation 194insulation 197

introduction 188material man-hour additions 191paint 198pipe details 191pipe spec 191Preferences 48steel 194

Instrument airoperating unit costs

specifications 108utility costs, Project Summary

spreadsheet 449Instrument volumetric model 194–

196Instrumentation

installation bulk 194loop adjustments 196–197material costs and man-hours

189Insulation

installation bulk 197material costs 189



Index 507

Interactive sizing 213–219Interactive Sizing form 153, 157,

220, 224Interest rate

Project Input worksheet 404Interface layout 26–36

Save Window States option 48

Internal Rate of Return (IRR)Cashflow spreadsheet 453Statements worksheet 396Status worksheet 393

Investment Analysisproject specifications 101–114viewing in MS Excel 441

Investment Analysis Viewcommand

View menu 40, 441Investment Parameters

libraries 125project specifications 101–108selecting defaults 126

IP, units of measure 20, 126, 127IPE 5.0/5.1

importing from 22–24IPELog.txt

Preferences, Logging 53IRR (Internal Rate of Return)

Cashflow spreadsheet 453Item evaluation 463

automatic 464

Item Reportinstructions for running 463 Preferences 48

Item Report command 463

J

JISpressure vessel design code

selection 65Job Number field 58Junction boxes

instrumentation loop 196

L

Labor cost per unitUnit Cost Library (UCL) 284

Labor hours per unitUnit Cost Library (UCL) 284

Labor Unit Costs

operating unit costsspecifications 107, 108

Laboratory chargesProject Input worksheet 403

Laboratory ChargesInvestment Parameters 105

Project Summary spreadsheet444, 446

Ladders, steel - installation bulks194

Length of Start-up PeriodInvestment Parameters 106

LibrariesBasis for Capital Costs 59, 125cost libraries 262–294Design Criteria 125Equipment Model Library (EML)

277input units of measure 59–60

moving to another directory 129Project Component Map

Specifications 125specification libraries 125–129Unit Cost Library (UCL) 281Utility Specifications 125view 32

Liquid entrainment method 95, 257List view

description 30mapped components 157simulator file name 144

Status column 157, 184Load Data buttontoolbar 37, 144

Load Data commandRun menu 39, 144

Locationsplant relocation 295plant/project location 64, 443Preferences 50–53

LoggingPreferences 53

Loopsinstrumentation installation bulks

194modifications 196–197

M

MagnificationAspen Icarus Reporter 410 Block Flow Diagram (BFD) 148–

149



Index 508

Main productProject Summary spreadsheet

448Main Window

display options 35interface, default position 26

printing 38 understanding 28–29

Management reports 418–421Man-hour indexing 74Manpower Productivity Expert

(MPE) Tools menu 41

Manufacturing cost parametersProject Input worksheet 403

Map All Items optionMap dialog box 153

Map commandpop-up menu 152

Map dialog box 152Map Items button

toolbar 151Map Items command

Run menu 39, 151Map Selected Item(s) option

Map dialog box 153Map Unsupported Models To

Quoted Cost ItemPreferences, Process tab 49

Mapping simulator modelsinstructions 151–158

specifications 81units of measure mapping specs77–80

unsupported models 49, 82Mass flow


Material adjustmentsindexing, area level 199, 200

Material and man-hour additionsinstallation bulks 191

Material and man-houradjustments

installation bulks 189, 208Material and man-hour indexing 74Material cost per unit

Unit Cost Library (UCL) 284Material costs

indexing 74Material Index Info form 75Material streams

product specifications 111

Mean temperature difference(MTD) 238

Menu barAspen Icarus Reporter 408IPE 26, 40–42

Metric, units of measure 20, 126,

127Microsoft Access Database (.mdb)

file 430MIRR (Modified Internal Rate of

Return)Cashflow spreadsheet 453

Mixture buttonDevelop Stream specifications

form 116Mixture Specs

developing streams 118Modify command

simulator block 145streams 180

Modify tab viewDevelop Streams dialog box 115

MTD See Mean temperaturedifference (MTD)

Multi-core runsinstrumentation loop 196

MUSEdesign criteria specifications 89

N

Net EarningsCashflow spreadsheet 452

Net Present Value (NPV)Cashflow spreadsheet 453Statements worksheet 396Status worksheet 393

Net Return Rate (NRR)Cashflow spreadsheet 453

New commandFile menu 18, 22, 38

New Component Information dialogbox 184

New Project button

toolbar 18, 37NPV (Net Present Value)

Cashflow spreadsheet 453NRR (Net Return Rate)

Cashflow spreadsheet 453Number of Periods for Analysis

Investment Parameters 103Number of shifts 71

Project Input worksheet 403



Index 509

Number of Weeks per PeriodInvestment Parameters 103

O

OK button

Develop Stream specificationsform 116Installation Bulks form 48, 189Mat'l Man-hour Adjustments

form 190Open button

toolbar 24, 37Open command

File menu 24, 38 Palette Projects view 25

Open Existing Project dialog box 24Open Workbook command

File menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter

408, 425Opening an existing project 24Operating and Maintenance Labor

EscalationInvestment Parameters 104Project Summary spreadsheet

(PROJSUM.ICS) 445Operating charges

Cashflow spreadsheet 450Investment Parameters 105Project Input worksheet 403Project Summary spreadsheet

444, 446Operating costs

Cashflow spreadsheet 451Figures worksheet 397introduction to IPE 12Investment Parameters 105product specifications needed to

evaluate 113Project Summary spreadsheet

444raw material specifications

needed to evaluate 109Operating Hours per Period


444Operating labor and maintenance

Project Input worksheet 403Operating labor and maintenance

costsCashflow spreadsheet 450Investment Parameters 105, 107

Project Summary spreadsheet445, 446, 448–449

Operating ModeInvestment Parameters 106

Operating suppliesProject Input worksheet 403

Operating SuppliesInvestment Parameters 105Project Summary spreadsheet

444Operating Unit Costs

libraries 125project specifications 107–

108 selecting defaults 126

Options buttonComponent Specifications form

187, 188Options menu

Component Specifications form49, 187, 188

Options sub-menu Tools menu 41

Order Number 205Overall column efficiency

design criteria specifications 93tower sizing 251

Overdesign factor 225heat exchangers 90, 239pumps 88

Overtime

hours,general wage rates 72rate, general wage rates 72

Overwrite Project Backups option48, 49

P

P&ID button 191, 194Packed towers

design criteria specifications 91sizing 254, 255

Paintmaterial costs 189

specs, areas 199, 200Palette

Components view 33, 183 cost libraries 277–294deleting a project from 44description 32–34Docking and undocking 35dragging components from 183floating in Main Window 35



Index 510

hide/display 33interface, default position 26Libraries view 32, 125–129,

277–294opening projects 25Projects view 25, 32, 33, 44, 46,

51Recent Items folder 183 specification libraries 125unlocking projects from 46View menu 40, 173

Paste buttontoolbar, Icarus Editor 433

Paste commandproject components 202, 204

Patents and royaltiesProject Input worksheet 403

Payout periodCashflow spreadsheet 453

Period DescriptionInvestment Parameters 102

Phase durationsProject Input worksheet 403

PhasesStream Input worksheet 405

PI (Profitability Index)Cashflow spreadsheet 454

Pile types 67Pipe Details installation bulk 191Pipe Spec installation bulk 191Pipe volumetric model 192–193

Pipinginstallation bulks 191–193material costs and man-hours

189volumetric model 192

Piping and InstrumentationDrawings (P&ID) manual 191,194

Piping specificationsareas 199, 200

Plant bulkscomponent categories 181difference from installation bulks

188Plant capacity

changing 295Plant location

changing 295Plant Overhead

Cashflow spreadsheet 450Investment Parameters 105

Project Summary spreadsheet444, 446

Platforms, steel - installation bulks194

PO (Payout Period)Cashflow spreadsheet 453

PODE (Payout Period DesiredCashflow spreadsheet 450

Ports Visible buttontoolbar 37, 175

Ports Visible commandView menu, PFD 174

Potable wateroperating unit costs specifiations

108utility costs, Project Summary

spreadsheet 449Precooler

suffix for mapping 155tower configurations 159, 245,

247Preferences

accessing 46Backup tab view 49buttons 46description 46General tab view 47introduction 46Locations tab view 50–53Logging tab view 53Process tab view 49

prompts 47saving window states 48 Tools menu 41

Prepared By fieldgeneral project date 58

Present Value of CashflowsCashflow spreadsheet 452

Pressure vessel design codeGeneral Specs 65

Primary fluid component 116, 119,217

Print command IPE File menu 38

Print Preview command File menu 38

Print Setup command File menu 38

Printing Aspen Icarus Reporter 412 forms and reports in Main

Window 38 Icarus Editor 432



Index 511

Pro/IImodels used in sizing towers 243R/R minimum 90simulator report preparation

141–142Problem description

SimSci report preparation 142Process Complexity

contingency affected by 66General Specs 63

Process connectionintrumentation loop 196

Process ControlGeneral Specs 64

Process Descriptioncontingency affected by 66equipment design allowance

affected by 66General Specs 63

Process Design specifications 77–101

Process equipment 181Process Flow Diagrams (PFD) 171–

180Process Fluids

Investment Parameters 106Process options

Preferences 49Process Stream field

product specifications 113raw material specifications 110

Process vessel height to diameterratiodesign criteria specifications 94vessel sizing procedure 259, 261

Product escalationProject Input worksheet 404

Product salesper hour, Project Summary

spreadsheet 448per period, Project Summary

spreadsheet 448total, Project Summary

spreadsheet 446

Product specificationsinvestment analysis

specifications 111–114libraries 126selecting defaults 126

Product Support on the Webcommand

Help menu 42Production

Stream Input worksheet 405Production operations

Stream Input worksheet 405Productivity adjustments 71Products Escalation

Investment Parameters 104

Project Summary spreadsheet445

Profitability IndexCashflow spreadsheet 454

Project areas See AreaProject Basis

Basis for Capital Costs 58–74default specifications 125General Project Data 57introduction 55Investment Analysis 101–114Process Design 77–101Project Properties 56specification libraries 125Streams 114–125

Project Basis view 27Project Basis worksheet


Project Capital EscalationCashflow spreadsheet 450, 451Investment Parameters 104Project Summary spreadsheet

445, 447Project capital evaluation

Project Input worksheet 404Project component

connecting to stream 176Project Component Map Preview

dialog box 154, 156, 158Project Component Map

Specificationsdialog box 80libraries 125project specifications, Process

Design 80–86selecting defaults 125

Project components

adding 182component specifications 186copying 202deleting 204Equipment Model Library

(EML) items 280 importing 200installation bulks 188re-numbering 204



Index 512

Unit Cost Library (UCL) item 285Project cost

Cashflow spreadsheet 450contingency percentage 63Project Summary spreadsheet

447

Project Data Sheetreports, Icarus Editor 436

Project DescriptionProject Properties 19, 56Project Summary spreadsheet

442Project directories

alternate directories 51copying 46default, setting 52

Project evaluationPreferences 48running 386

scan for errors 48, 386Project Explorer 26, 27

Docking and undocking 35floating in Main Window 35interface, default position 26relation to Palette 32View menu 40, 173

Project in use - message 45Project Input worksheet

Analyzer Economics Module(AEM) 390, 398–399

Analyzer Economics Module

(AEM) 400–404Project LocationGeneral Specs 64

Project NameAspen Plus - IPE simulator link

135Cashflow spreadsheet 454Create New Project dialog box

19, 23Project Summary spreadsheet

442Save As dialog box 43

Project Properties

creating a new project 19Project Basis specifications 56

Project scenarioscreating new 18deleting 43importing 201opening existing 24salvaging 44saving 42

unlocking 45Project Schedule Data Sheet

reports, Icarus Editor 438Project Summary

reports, Icarus Editor 435Project Summary spreadsheet

(PROJSUM.ICS) 442–449Project Title

General Project Data 58Project Summary spreadsheet

443Project Type

contingency affected by 66Executive Summary spreadsheet

456General Specs 63, 64Project Summary spreadsheet

443Project view 27Projects

copying 46creating 18–22deleting 43opening existing 24view 32, 33

PROJSUM.ICSinvestment analysis 442–449

PromptsPreferences 47

Properties Windowdescription 34

Docking and undocking 35floating in Main Window 35Freeze Content button 34interface, default position 26relationship to specifications

form 34, 186View menu 40, 173

PROVISION See SimSci's Pro/IIwith PROVISION

Pump overdesign factordesign criteria specifications 88,

241sizing procedures 241

Pumpsdesign criteria specifications 88sizing 214

PV (Present Value)Cashflow spreadsheet 452

PVI (Present Value of Inflows)Cashflow spreadsheet 452

PVO (Present Value of Outflows)Cashflow spreadsheet 452



Index 513

PVOP (Present Value of Outflows –Products)

Cashflow spreadsheet 452PVOS (Present Value of Outflows –

Sales)Cashflow spreadsheet 452

Q

Question mark in Status columncomponent specifications 157,

186Quoted cost item

mapping overhead/bottoms splitto 245

mapping unsupported models to49

Quoted cost itemsmapping unsupported models to

81Quoted equipment 181, 188

R

Rate fieldproduct specifications 113raw material specifications 110

Rate Units fieldproduct specifications 113raw material specifications 110

Raw materialcosts, Cashflow spreadsheet 450

costs, Executive Summaryspreadsheet 455

costs, project specifications 111costs, Project Summary

spreadsheet 446, 447escalation 104, 445, 450project specifications 108–111

Raw Material EscalationCashflow spreadsheet 450Investment Parameters 104Project Summary spreadsheet

445

Raw Material Specificationsinvestment analysis, projectbasis 108–111

libraries 126selecting defaults 126

Raw materialsescalation 404Stream Input worksheet 405

Rebar

civil installation bulk 194Recent Items folder 183 Reconnect Sink command

stream, Process Flow Diagrams(PFD) 180

Reconnect Source command

streams, Process Flow Diagram(PFD) 180

Red bordersComponent Specifications form

187Refrigerant 222Relation attributes 430Relative Basis

streams 114, 117, 122–124, 178Relocating

introduction 12Remarks field

project properties 20Project Properties 56

Re-number commandRun menu 205

Re-numberingareas 205project components 204

Report filesReporting Assistant 457

Report templatesReporting Assistant 457

Reporter See Aspen IcarusReporter

Reporting Assistant 456–462Reports

Analyzer Economics Module(AEM) Error! Not a validbookmark in entry on page

388customizing 456–462data trending 426–428Excel Error! Not a valid

bookmark in entry on page

388, 418–425HTML 416–418Item report 463

Management reports 418producing 386, 388, 463Standard reports 408–416

Reroute All Streams commandRun menu 172

Reset buttonDevelop Stream specifications

form 116Residence time



Index 514

design criteria specifications 92,94

sizing crystallizers 235sizing vessels 256, 259, 261

Re-Size commandproject component pop-up menu

153, 215RESULTS workbook


RevenueCashflow spreadsheet 451–454

Royalties See Patents androyalties, Project Inputworksheet

Run Report commandFile menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter

408

S

SalesCashflow spreadsheet 450

Salvage Project As dialog box 45Salvage Value

Project Input worksheet 404Salvage Value (Percent of Initial

Capital Cost)Cashflow spreadsheet 450impact on depreciation 103Investment Parameters 103Project Summary spreadsheet

445recouped 453

Salvaging project scenarios 44Save As command

File menu 38, 43Save button

toolbar 37, 42Save command

File menu 38, 42Save Project As dialog box 43Save Window States checkbox

Preferences 48

Savingcached information 44project scenarios 42window states 48

Scan for Errors before evaluationPreferences 48

Scan Messages 387Scenario Description

General Project Data 58


Scenario Namecreating a new project 19importing Standard Basis from

5.0 23


Scenario reportingProject Input worksheet 401

Scenarioscreating 18–22importing 201opening existing 24–25

ScheduleProject Input worksheet 401Project Schedule Data Sheet 438

Screensdesign criteria specifications 97

Select a Suffix dialog box 155Select command

Project Basis pop-up menu 129Select Import Type dialog box 23Select Simulator Type dialog box

143Sensor

instrumentation loop 196–197Separation factor

design criteria specifications 95sizing vessels 256, 257

Show Page Bounds

View menu, BFD 151View menu, PFD 174

Sieve tray design 253Signal cabling, instrumentation -

installation bulks 194SimSci's Pro/II with PROVISION

models used in sizing towers 243R/R minimum 90, 255SHORTCUT column operation

255simulator report preparation

141–142Simulation reports

Aspen Plus 132–135, 243, 245ChemCAD 136–137HYSIM 137–139, 243, 245HYSYS 139–141, 243, 245loading 28Pro/II 141–142, 243selecting 144



Index 515

Simulation Sciences Also See SimSci's Pro/II withPROVISION

link to IPE 11Simulator data

loading 143–145

mapping 151–158mapping specifications 81unsupported models 49

Simulator File Nameproject specifications, Process

Design 143Simulator Type

Executive Summary spreadsheet455

project specifications, ProcessDesign 143


Simulator Units of MeasureMapping Specs

libraries 126project specifications, Process

Design 77–80selecting defaults 126

Single Component SummaryReport

Preferences 48Site development 181Size button 213, 220Size Icarus Project Component(s)

optionsMap dialog box 153Size Item option 177, 213Sizing

calculations 230–261ChemCAD items 137defaults 230–261HYSIM items 138mapped components 153, 157,

213overview 213parameters 87, 89, 91, 92, 94,

96, 98

requirements 230–261Sizing Expert 98, 153, 177, 213–

219Sizing Method field

Equipment Model Library (EML)279

Snap to Grid checkboxGrid properties 175

Snap to Grid command

View menu, BFD 151View menu, PFD 174

Soil conditionsGeneral Specs 64, 67

Solids handling informationdesign criteria specifications 97

SourceMap dialog box 153

Specification basisproduct specifications 113raw material specifications 110

Specification filescreating 126 deleting 128 duplicating 128importing 127introduction 125modifying 127 moving to another directory 129selecting 129

Specification librariescustomizing 126–129 introduction 125moving to another directory 129

SPECS workbookAnalyzer Economics Module

(AEM) 389–393Spreadsheets

customizing 456–462SQL database

exporting to Microsoft Access

430Stairs, steel - installation bulks 194Standard Basis

file, selecting 129input file, General Project Data

57Standard reports

descriptions 408, 413–412 navigating 410opening 409printing 412 searching 412

Start date, basic engineering

Executive Summary spreadsheet455, 456

General Specs 64Project Summary spreadsheet

443, 444, 447Starting program 17Start-up period, length

Investment Parameters 106Statements worksheet



Index 516


Status bar 26View menu 40, 173

Status columnList view 157, 184

Status worksheetAnalyzer Economics Module

(AEM) 393Steam utility 222Steel

installation bulk 194material costs and man-hours

189specifications, areas 199, 200

Straight LineInvestment Parameters,

Depreciation Method 103Stream Input worksheet




Streamsabsolute basis 123adding 121, 177basis mode 123connecting to equipment during

sizing 219–226

connectivity, Process FlowDiagram (PFD) 175creating 121, 177creating from Project Explorer

216–219deleting 124, 180material 111modifying 115process 113product specifications 111relative basis 123

Streams List commandView menu, BFD 151

View menu, PFD 174Subcooling

tower configurations 159Suffixes

mapping 154, 155Sum of the Digits


Supervision

costs, Project Input worksheet404

System administration fileslocations, Preferences 50

System cost base dateExecutive Summary spreadsheet

456Project Summary spreadsheet

443

T

Tax RateCashflow spreadsheet 450Investment Parameters 103Project Summary spreadsheet

445Taxes

amount owed, Cashflow

spreadsheet 452General Specs 64, 66indirects, Project Summary

spreadsheet 447Template files

Reporting Assistant 458TEX (Total expenses)

Cashflow spreadsheet 452Tile command

Window menu 28, 42 Time period

Project Input worksheet 402Timed backup 49Toolbar

buttons 36description 36docking 36interface, default position 26View menu 40, 173

Tools menu 41 Total direct cost

Capital Cost report, Icarus Editor440

Equipment Summaryspreadsheet (EQUIP.ICS) 442

Total earningsCashflow spreadsheet 452

Total ExpensesCashflow spreadsheet 452

Total Manpower Schedulereports, Icarus Editor 436

Total Operating Cost, ExecutiveSummary spreadsheet 455

Total project cost



Index 517

Cashflow spreadsheet 450Project Summary spreadsheet

447Tower configurations

mapping 154, 161–169, 245–248

Training commandHelp menu 42

Transducersinstrumentation loop 196

Transmitters, instrumentation -installation bulks 194

Trayed towersdesign criteria specifications 92sizing 251, 252, 255

Trend menu, Aspen IcarusReporter 408, 426, 427

Trending database reports 426–428

Trim coolersuffix for mapping 155tower configurations 159, 245,

247Type definition, area 199, 200

U

UCL Se e Unit Cost Library (UCL) Unique Project Backup options 49Unit Cost field

product specifications 114raw material specifications 111

Unit Cost Library (UCL)adding an item to 283adding UCL item to a project 285creating 282 definition 276

Units of measureinput customization 20, 59output (reports) customization

61project properties 20scenario information 25Unit Cost Library (UCL) 284

Units of Measure Specificationdialog box 78

Unlock command 45Unsupported simulator models

Preferences 49Update button


User Custom Model 206–210

User namescenario information 25

Utilitiesescalation 404list of availiable utility resources

222

Stream Input worksheet 405usage estimation 119

Utilities EscalationCashflow spreadsheet 450Investment Parameters 104Project Input worksheet 404Project Summary spreadsheet

(PROJSUM.ICS) 445Utility costs

Cashflow spreadsheet 450Executive Summary spreadsheet

455heat-transfer utilities 101non-heat transfer utilities 108Project Summary spreadsheet

449Utility Specifications

libraries 125, 126project specifications 98–101selecting defaults 126

Utility streamcreating 98modifying 98

Utility Unit Costsoperating unit costs

specifications (non-heattransfer utilities) 108

utility specifications (heat-transfer utilities) 101

V

Valve tray sizing 253Vapor disengagement height

towers, design criteria 90Version

scenario information 25Vessel

design criteria specifications 95–97

diameter, General Specs 65height to diameter ratio 94, 259,

261sizing 214, 255

View Existing Trend Data commandTrend menu, Aspen Icarus

Reporter 408, 429



Index 518

View menu 40, 173

W

Wage ratesconstruction workforce

specifications 70–73WARNing message 387What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get

Zoom dialog box 149Window menu 42 Window states, saving 48 Workbook mode

understanding 28–29View menu 40, 173

Workforce reference baseGeneral Wage Rates 71

Working capitalProject Input worksheet 403

Working capital percentageProject Input worksheet 399

Working Capital PercentageInvestment Parameters 105

WYSIWYGZoom dialog box 149

Z

ZoomAspen Icarus Reporter 410 Block Flow Diagram (BFD) 148–

149

toolbar 37

manual aspen analyzer version 7

Documents